B.tech Civil Syllabus AR16 Revised

GMRIT
Academic Regulations, Curriculum and Syllabi
2016
B. Tech.
Civil Engineering
(4 Year Program)
Department of Civil Engineering

GMR Institute of Technology
Rajam, Andhra Pradesh
(An Autonomous Institute Affiliated to JNTU Kakinada, AP)
NBA Accredited and NAAC Accredited
ACADEMIC REGULATION,
CURRICULUM AND SYLLABI
2016
Civil Engineering
(CE)
(Affiliated to JNTUK, Kakinada and Accredited by NAAC ad NBA)

Rajam, Srikakulum District, Andhra Pradesh 532 127
www.gmrit.org
Academic Rules and Regulations
2016
Undergraduate Programmes
GMR Institute of Technology

Rajam 532 127, Andhra Pradesh
(An Autonomous Institute, Affiliated to JNTU, Kakinada, AP)
Accredited by NAAC & NBA
GMR Institute of Technology (GMRIT) | Regulation 2016
Contents
1. Eligibility for Admission ................................................................................................... i

2. Duration of B. Tech. Programme................................................................................... i
3. Branches of Study................................................................................................................ i
4. Programme Structure ........................................................................................................ ii
4.1. Credit Distribution for the Courses Offered .................................................... v
4.2. Structure of the Curriculum ................................................................................... v
4.3. Credits Break-up for Various Category of Courses ....................................... vii
4.4. Division of Marks for Continuous and Semester End Assessment .......... viii
5. Evaluation Methodology .................................................................................................. ix
5.1. Continuous Assessment Pattern for all Courses ............................................ ix
6. Attendance Requirements ............................................................................................... xiii
7. Promotion Policies .............................................................................................................. xiv
8. Graduation Requirements ............................................................................................... xiv
9. Flexibility to Add or Drop Courses ............................................................................... xvi
10. Withdrawal from Examination ...................................................................................... xvi
11. Curriculum ............................................................................................................................. xvii
The Vision of GMRIT
 To be among the most preferred institutions for engineering and technological

education in the country
 An institution that will bring out the best from its students, faculty and staff – to learn,
to achieve, to compete and to grow – among the very best
 An institution where ethics, excellence and excitement will be the work religion, while
research, innovation and impact, the work culture
The Mission of GMRIT
 To turnout disciplined and competent engineers with sound work and life ethics
 To implement outcome based education in an IT-enabled environment
 To encourage all-round rigor and instill a spirit of enquiry and critical thinking among
students, faculty and staff
 To develop teaching, research and consulting environment in collaboration with
industry and other institutions
Academic Regulations for B. Tech. Programme

(For all the batches of candidates admitted in the Academic Year 2016–2017 and subsequently)
1. Eligibility for Admission
The total seats available as per the approved intake are grouped into two categories viz.
category A and Category B with a ratio of 70:30 as per the state government guidelines vide G.O
No.52
a. The admissions for category A and B seats shall be as per the guidelines of Andhra
Pradesh State Council for Higher Education (APSCHE) in consonance with
government reservation policy.
 Under Category A: 70% of the seats are filled through EAMCET counseling.
 Under Category B: 30% seats are filled based on 10+2 merits in compliance
with guidelines of APSCHE
b. Admission eligibility-Under Lateral Entry Scheme
Students with diploma qualification have an option of direct admission into 2nd year
B. Tech. (Lateral entry scheme). Under this scheme 20% seats of sanctioned intake
will be available in each course as supernumerary seats. Admissions to this three
year B Tech later entry Programme will be through ECET. The maximum period to
complete B. Tech. under lateral entry scheme is six consecutive academic years from
the date of joining.
2. Duration of the Programme
The course duration for the award of the Degree in Bachelor of Technology will be four
academic years, with two semesters in each year. However if a student is unable to complete the
course within 4 years, he/ she can do so by giving more attempts but within 8 consecutive
academic years from the date of admission.
Academic Calendar
For all the eight semesters a common academic calendar shall be followed in each semester by
having sixteen weeks of instruction, one week for the conduct of practical exams and with three
weeks for theory examinations and evaluation. Dates for registration, sessional and end
semester examinations shall be notified in the academic calendar of every semester. The
schedule for the conduct of all the curricular and co-curricular activities shall be notified in the
planner.
3. Branches of Study
B. Tech. Programmes
I. Chemical Engineering (CH)
II. Civil Engineering (CE)
III. Computer Science and Engineering (CS)
IV. Electrical and Electronics Engineering (EE)
i
V. Electronics and Communication Engineering (EC)

VI. Information Technology (IT)
VII. Mechanical Engineering (ME)
VIII. Power Engineering (PE)
4. Programme Structure
The curriculum will consist of courses of study (Theory, Practical, Contemporary Courses,
Mini Project, Term Papers, Project, Audit Courses, Self-study Courses, MOOCs, Summer
Internship and Full Semester Internship and Courses related Employability Skills) and
syllabi as prescribed by the respective Boards of Studies from time to time. The curriculum is
bifurcated into FSI and Non-FSI modes from 7th semester onwards.
Every student will be required to opt for six elective courses spanned across the semester from
4th to 8th semester from the list of electives as prescribed in the curriculum. Under Choice Based
Credit System (CBCS), the students may take one elective from the list of open electives offered
by other branches of engineering technology in consultation with their respective department.
a. Integrated Courses: Integrated courses are exclusively designed to provide a

unique learning experience to the students with the concept of layered learning
where in the students have the chances to practice while learning. These courses
designed by blending both theory and laboratory components in their core
curriculum and will be evaluated for 130 marks.
b. Contemporary Courses: These courses are designed with the help of experts from
industries and driven by experts from industries along with the internal faculty
members on the recent developments in core areas of engineering and technology.
These courses shall be registered as an elective course during their course of study
c. Mini Project: The curriculum offers Mini Projects in two different forms viz: (i) Mini
Project as a mandatory component in all lab courses (ii) 2 credit Mini Project during
5th or 6th semester. With respect to second one (ii) students will take mini project
batch wise and the batches will be divided as similar to lab courses. The report will
be evaluated by a committee as nominated by CoE constituted with internal &
external panels
d. Term Paper: The Term Paper is a self-study report and shall be carried out either
during 5th or 6th semester in choice with Mini Project. Every student will take up
this term paper individually and submit a report. The scope of the term paper could
be an exhaustive literature review choosing any engineering concept with reference
to standard research papers or an extension of the concept of earlier course work in
consultation with the term paper supervisor. The report will be evaluated by a
committee as nominated by HoD with the approval of CoE
e. Project work: The final project work shall be carried out during the 8th semester in
the non- FSI Model. Projects will be taken up batch wise. Internal evaluation will be
ii
done by the Project Review Committee (PRC), comprising of HOD and two senior
faculty members along with the project supervisor. Semester end evaluation will be
done by Project Evaluation Committee (PEC) comprising of three members
including HOD, project guide and an external examiner nominated by the CoE
f. Audit Courses: Audit courses are among the compulsory courses and do not carry
any credits. All the students shall register for one Audit courses in the beginning of
3rdsemester. List of the courses will be notified at the beginning of the third
semester for all students and the student has to choose one audit course under self-
study mode at the beginning of third semester. By the end of sixth semester, all the
students (regular and lateral entry students) shall complete the audit course. The
students will have total four chances to clear the audit course beginning from third
semester. Further, the student has an option to change the audit course in case if
s/he is unable to clear the audit course in the first two chances. However, the audit
course should be completed by 6thsemester and its notification will be given in
the 6th semester marks memo. Its result shall be declared with “Satisfactory” or
“Not Satisfactory” performance. In case, if any student could not clear the Audit
course in four attempts , the case may be presented before the Academic council for
an appropriate action before the completion of 8th semester
g. Self-Study Courses: Self-study courses are the courses which are more similar to
theory courses where in the students learn the courses on independent mode. The
evaluation and assessment pattern for such courses shall be carried out as similar
to regular theory course. These courses shall be opted after getting proper
approval from the respective head of the department as well from the other head of
the department which is offering the course. The credits earned through these
self- study courses over and above the mandatory courses, and it will not be
accounted in CGPA calculation.
h. MOOCs: Meeting with the global requirements, to inculcate the habit of self-
learning and in compliance with UGC guidelines, MOOC (Massive Open Online
Course) have been introduced as electives
 The proposed MOOCs would be additional choices in all the elective
groups subject to the availability during the respective semesters
and respective departments will declare the list of the courses at
the beginning of the semester, which are having a minimum of 45
hours in a given semester
 Course content for the selected MOOCs shall be drawn from
respective MOOCs links or shall be supplied by the department.
Course will be mentored by faculty members and Assessment &
evaluation of the courses shall be done by the department
 Three credits will be awarded upon successful completion of each
MOOCs
iii
i. Summer Internship: As a part of curriculum in all branches of Engineering, it is

mandatory for all students to undergo summer internship Programme at industries
(core or allied) / R & D organization to get practical insight of their subject domain
during summer break after the 4th semester. This summer internship Programme
shall be availed to a maximum duration of 4 weeks and the assessment shall be
carried out with both internal and external experts leading to “Satisfactory” and
“Non-Satisfactory Performance” and it will not be accounted for the calculation of
CGPA
j. Employability Skills: It is mandatory for all students to take a course on
Employability Skills from 3rd Semester to 6th Semester. The Employability Skills are
covered under two broad streams viz. Aptitude skills and Soft Skills. The credits
earned through these courses will be indicated in the grade sheet and will not be
taken into account for CGPA calculation.
k. Industry Driven One Credit Courses (IDC): Meeting with the industry
requirements, to reduce the gap between industry and academia this one credit (15
hrs.) course has been introduced over and above regular courses from 3rd Semester
to 6th Semester for the interested students. The credits earned through these
courses will be indicated in the grade sheet and will not be taken into account for
CGPA calculation.
l. Full Semester Internship: Students can opt for full semester Internship
Programme at industries based on their self-interest either during 7th or 8th
semester to get practical insight relevant to their core branch of engineering or in
allied branch of study under the guidance of internal and external expert members
in the institute and at Industries respectively. All Students who wish to choose FSI
pattern shall exercise this option well before the commencement of 7th semester.
Students who wish to take FSI during 8th semester will have to take one additional
course in 7th semester when compared with Non FSI stream. In case of some
extraordinary cases, students may be permitted to choose the FSI pattern even
before the commencement of 8th semester. In all such cases student shall take one
additional course offered during 8th semester under self-study mode and acquire
the required credits.
i. Minimum CGPA cut-off up to 5th semester as prescribed by CDC
ii. Competency mapping
iii. Students who opt for FSI either in 7th or 8th will be provided with
Internship subject the availability/selection by the industries
Further the credits earned through FSI Programme will be indicated in the grade sheet
and will be accounted for the calculation of CGPA.
FSI final evaluation will be done by the FSI Review Committee (FSIRC), comprising of
HOD, one senior faculty member and External (Industry) expert nominated by HOD.
iv
4.1. Credit Distribution for Courses Offered
No Course Credits
1 Theory Course 3
2 Integrated Course 4
3 Laboratory/Drawing Course 2
4 MOOCs 3
5 Elective courses 3
6 Audit Course 0
7 Term Paper 2
8 Mini Project 2
9 Summer Internship 0
10 Project work 10
11 Full Semester internship 16
Co-curricular and Extra-Curricular
12 2
Activities(CCEC)
13 Employability Skills (ES) 2
14 Industry Driven One Credit Courses (IDC) 1
4.2. Structure of curriculum

Following are the TWO models of course patterns out of which any student
shall choose one model based on the notified criteria for selection..
a. Full Semester Internship (FSI) Model

b. Non Full Semester Internship Model
In the Full semester internship Model, the students selected/opted for internship
will be distributed in both the 7th and 8th semester based on the internships
available. In the Non Full Semester Internship Model, all the selected students
shall carry out the Project work as per the norms.
A. Course Pattern for Four year Regular Programme (FSI)
Total
Sem. No. of Theory Courses No. of Lab Courses
Credits
I 21
II 5 3 21
III 3 + Employability Skills+ CCEC 25
6(5 Theory + 1 Integrated) 3+ CCEC Activities+
IV 25 + 1 + 1
Employability Skills
Summer Internship (Audit course) 0
6 (4 Compulsory Theory + 1 1+ Term paper/Mini Project +
V 23
Integrated + 1 Elective) Employability Skills + CCEC
v
6 + Audit course 1 + Term paper/Mini project +

VI (3 Compulsory Theory + 1 CCEC Activities + Employability 23 + 1+1
Integrated + 2 Elective) Skills
VII Full semester internship 16
VIII 4 (2 Compulsory + 2 Elective) 2 16
Total 34+4+1 Audit courses 16+Term paper +Mini project+ 174
Internship +CCEC +Employability
Skills+ Audit Course
B. Course Pattern for Four Year Regular Programme (Non - FSI)

Total
Credits
I 21
5 3
II 21
III 3+ Employability Skills + CCEC 25
6 (5 Theory + 1 Integrated)
IV 3+ Employability Skills +CCEC 25 + 1+1
V 23
Integrated + 1 Elective) Employability Skills+ CCEC
6+ Audit course 1 + Term paper/Mini project+
VII 3 (1 Compulsory + 2 Elective) 2 13
VIII 3 (2 Compulsory + 1 Elective) Project work 19

16+Term paper + Mini project +
36+4+1 Audit courses Project work + CCEC + 174
Total
C. Course Pattern for Three Year Lateral Entry Programme (FSI)
Total
Credits
6 (5 Theory + 1 Integrated) 3+ CCEC Activities+ Employability
IV 25 + 1+1
Skills
V 23
6+ Audit course 1 + Term paper/Mini project
vi
VII Full semester internship 16
VIII 4 (2 Compulsory + 2 Elective) 2 16

10 + Term paper +Mini project+
Total 24+4+1 Audit courses Internship report +CCEC + 132
D. Course Pattern for Three year Lateral Entry Programme (Non FSI)
Total
Credits
6 (5 Theory + 1 Integrated)
IV 3+ CCEC Activities+ Employability
24 + 1+1
Skills
V 23
6 + Audit course 1 + Term paper/Mini project +
VII 3 (1 Compulsory + 2 Elective) 2 13
VIII 3 (2 Compulsory + 1 Elective) Project work 19

10 + Term paper +Mini project+
Total 26+4+1 courses Internship report +CCEC + 132
4.3 Credit Break-up for Various Category of Courses

a. For Four year regular Programme (FSI)
Total Theory Courses : 34 @ 3 credits each = 102
(29 Core Courses + 5 Elective Courses)
Total Integrated Courses : 4 @ 4 credits each = 16
Total Laboratory Courses : 16 @ 2 credits each = 32
Term Paper with self-study report : 1 @ 2 credits =2
Mini Project with self-study report : 1@ 2 credits =2
CCEC Activities : 2 @ 1 credits =2
Employability skills : 2@ 1 credits =2
FSI internship : 1 @ 16 credits = 16
b. For Four year regular Programme (Non FSI)
Total Theory Courses: 36 @ 3 credits each = 108
vii
Total Integrated Courses: 4 @ 4 credits each = 16

Total Laboratory Courses: 16 @ 2 credits each = 32
Term Paper with self-study report : 1 @ 2 credits = 2
Mini Project with self-study report : 1@ 2 credits = 2
CCEC Activitie s: 2 @ 1 credits = 2
Employability skills: 2@ 1 credits = 2
Project work: 1 @ 10 credits = 10
c. For three year lateral entry Programme (FSI)

Term Paper with self-study report : 1 @ 2 credits= 2
CCEC Activities: 2 @ 1 credits =2
Employability skills: 2@ 1 credits =2
Internship report: 1 @ 16 credits =16
d. For three year lateral entry Programme (Non FSI)

Term Paper with self-study report : 1 @ 2 credits = 2
CCEC Activities : 2 @ 1 credits = 2
Employability skills : 2@ 1 credits = 2
Project work : 1 @ 10 credits = 10
4.4 Division of Marks for Continuous and Semester End Assessment
Marks Marks for

Course Continuous Semester end
Assessment Assessment
Theory 40 60
Integrated Course 40 (60T+30L)
Drawing courses 25 50
Laboratory 25 50
Term Paper 50 --
Audit Courses 50 --
viii
Mini Project 25 50
Industry Driven Courses (IDC) 25 --
Full semester Internship 200 200
Project work 100 100
5. Evaluation Methodology
a. The assessment will be based on the performance in the semester-end examinations
and / or continuous assessment, carrying marks as specified in Clause 10
b. At the end of each semester, final examinations will normally be conducted during
October/November and during April / May of each year. Supplementary examinations
may also be conducted at such times as may be decided by the Institute
c. Continuous Assessment Marks will be awarded on the basis of Continuous Evaluation
made during the semester as per the scheme given in Clause 10
d. The letter grade and the grade points are awarded based on the hybrid grading
system having earned grades and awarded grades. Grading is done based on the
percentage of marks secured by a candidate in individual course as detailed below:
Range of Percentage Letter Qualitative Grade
of Marks Grade Meaning Point
90-100 A+ Outstanding 10
Earned grade
85-89 A Excellent 9
Due to relative B+ Very Good 8
grading system the
B Good 7
ranges of marks may Awarded grade
C+ Average 6
vary for each course
C Satisfactory 5
based on the normal
D Pass 4
distribution of marks
< 40 for theory and F Fail 0
Earned grade
< 50 for Lab
e. After completion of the Programme, the Cumulative Grade Point Average

(CGPA) from the I Semester to VIII Semester (from III to VIII semester for
lateral entry) is calculated using the formula:.
Where n is the number of courses registered for, ‘ci’ is the credits allotted to
the given course and ‘gi’ is the grade point secured in the corresponding
course.
5.1 Continuous Assessment Pattern for all Courses
a. Theory Course
 Out of 40 marks allotted for continuous assessment 30 marks will be awarded
based on two tests(Each Test will be conducted for 40 marks and scale down to 30
marks) conducted and10 marks shall be awarded based on conduct of one
assignment test as given below:
ix
Internal Test 1 & Test 2: 30 Marks (80 % of marks secured in 1st best internal tests
and 20% marks secured in 2nd best internal test)
 The duration of each internal test will be 90 minutes and shall cover two units
of syllabus in each test
 All the students will be notified with the marks secured within one week after
the completion of the sessional exams
 Students are permitted for reconciliation with in a period of two working days
after the notification of marks
 The evaluation methodology of Design and Drawing Courses coming under
theory will be given in their respective course handouts which will be
approved by department HOD.
Assignment Test : 10 Marks (Test will be conducted for 30 marks and scale
down to 10 marks)
 The duration of each test will be 120 minutes predominantly focusing on
Higher Order Thinking Skills covering all the possible range of all such
HOTs. In case, if the course has little scope of HOTs, assessment shall be
carried out with LOTs
b. Integrated Course
40 marks allotted for continuous assessment as given below:
Theory Course
20 marks will be awarded based on two tests conducted similar to
theory( Each Test will be conducted for 40 marks and scale down to 20
marks) as given below:
Internal Test 1 & Test 2 : 20 Marks (80 % of marks secured in 1st best
internal tests and 20% marks secured in 2nd best internal test)
Laboratory
20 marks are awarded for continuous assessment and following is the
pattern for the award of 20 marks
Preparation, Observation &
Result : 10 Marks Record : 05 Marks
Internal Test : 05 Marks
External Exam (Lab) : 30 Marks
External Exam (Theory) : 60 Marks
c. Laboratory Course:
25 marks are awarded for continuous assessment and following is

the pattern for the award of 25 marks
Without Mini Project:
Viva – Voce : 05 Marks
With Mini Project (through Augmented Experiments):
x

Viva – Voce : 05 Marks
Augmented Experiment : 05 Marks
Engineering drawing course is evaluated in line with lab courses
and the pattern of awarding 25 marks for continuous evaluation
is as following
Day-to-day work : 15 marks
Internal test : 10 marks
There shall be two internal tests for 10 marks each during the
semester and the average shall be considered.
d. Term Paper
Continuous Assessment : 50 Marks Distribution

Literature Survey : 10 Marks
Review 1 : 15 Marks
Review 2 : 15 Marks
Final Presentation : 10 Marks
e. Audit Courses
Online Objective Test : 50 Marks
f. Mini Project
Review 1 : 05 Marks
Review 2 : 05 Marks
g. Project
Innovativeness of the Project : 05 Marks
Experimentation / Simulation
20 Marks Result Analysis : 05 Marks
Review 1 : 20 Marks
Review II : 20 Marks
Project Report : 10 Marks
h. Full Semester Internship

Continuous Assessment : 200 Marks
xi
Distribution
Internship Progress Report : 20 Marks On Site Assessment: 30 Marks
Assessment by industry : 100 Marks (Intern Assessment Tool)
Final Assessment on Campus : 50 Marks
Distribution
Project Report : 120 Marks
i. Co-Curricular and Extra Curricular (CCEC) Activities
Students shall acquire 1 credit each in 2nd and 3rd years with the
following scheme:
Scheme of evaluation for the CCEC activities:
 No. of slots in each Semester @ 2 slots every week 24
 No. of Stream (2-CC + 1-EC) 3
 No. of slots allotted for each stream 8
Requirement for the award of 1- Credit
 Students shall choose at least two streams of events in each
semester
 Students shall secure 75% attendance in each stream of
events to obtain a certificate
 Students shall obtain 2 certificates of Participation in each
semester.
The credits earned through these courses will be indicated in the

grade sheet and will not be taken into account for CGPA calculation.
j. Employability Skills (ES)
Students have to take up these courses from 3rd – 6th semesters. In both streams i.e
Aptitude Skills & Soft Skills (AS and SS) Students will be assessed in each semester.
Based on the marks secured in continuous assessment, students will be assessed for AS.
Based on the attendance for the various activities scheduled, students will be assessed
for SS. 16 periods are allotted for each stream per semester.
 Assessment for Aptitude skills

Continuous assessment : 30 Marks
Comprehensive Test : 20 Marks
For continuous assessment one examination will be conducted after every 5 weeks for a
maximum of 10 marks each (3x10=30). At the end of the semester a comprehensive
xii
test will conducted for 20 marks. The student shall secure at least 40% marks in each
semester to get qualified.
Assessment of Soft Skills
Continuous Assessment for Soft skill is done based on the participation of the students
in the various activities schedule during each semester. In every semester 6 activities
under SS will be organized and students are expected to attend at least 4 activities to
get qualified.
Student will secure 1 credit at the end of 4th semester and at the end of 6th semester
subject to the condition that he/she secures 40% marks in AS and 75 attendance in SS in
each semester.
h. Industry Driven One Credit Courses

Online Objective Test : 25 Marks
Grading:
Marks 25 ≤ and 20 ≥ : Excellent
Marks 20 < and 15 ≥ : Very Good
Marks 15 < and 10 ≥ : Good
Marks < 10 : Satisfactory
6. Attendance Requirements
a) It is desirable for a candidate to put on 100% attendance in all the

subjects. However, a candidate shall be permitted to appear for the
semester end examination by maintaining at least 75% of attendance
on an average in all the courses in that semester put together
b) The shortage of attendance on medical grounds can be condoned to
an extent of 10% provided a medical certificate is submitted to the
Head of the Department when the candidate reports back to the
classes immediately after the leave. Certificates submitted afterwards
shall not be entertained. Condonation fee as fixed by the college for
those who put on attendance between ≥ 65% and <75% shall be
charged before the end examinations. Attendance may also be
condoned as per the State Government rules for those who participate
in sports, co-curricular and extra- curricular activities provided their
attendance is in the minimum prescribed limits for the purpose and
recommended by the concerned authority
c) In case of the students having overall attendance less than 65% after
condonation shall be declared detained and has to repeat semester
again
d) In case of the student having less than 65% of attendance in any of
the course during a particular semester, he/she is not permitted to
appear for that particular course in the semester end examinations. In
such cases, the students need to undergo extra classes during the
vacation or at convenient time to earn the shortage of attendance.
After completing the attendance requirements he/she may be
permitted to appear for the examination and it will be treated as a
second attempt
e) His / her academic progress and conduct have been satisfactory
xiii
7. Promotion Policies
 In four year B. Tech. Programme, a student shall be promoted from

2nd year to 3rd year only if s/he fulfills the academic requirements
and earning of minimum 50% of credits up to 2nd year
 In four year B. Tech. Programme, a student shall be promoted from
3rd year to 4th year only if s/he fulfills the academic requirements
and earning of minimum 50% credits up to 3rd year
 In three year lateral entry B. Tech. Programme, a student shall be
promoted from 3rd year to 4th year only if s/he fulfills the academic
requirements and earning of minimum 50% credits up to 3rd year
8. Graduation Requirements
a) The following academic requirements shall be met for the award of the B. Tech.
Degree
 Student shall secure 174 credits for regular B. Tech. Programme and 132
credits for the students who entered in second year through lateral
entry scheme. However, the CGPA obtained for the best 167 credits
(Excluding any one 3 credit course, CCEC and ES) and 125
credits(Excluding any one 3 credit course, CCEC and ES)respectively
shall be considered for the award of Grade/Class/Division
 A student of a regular Programme who fails to earn 174 credits within
eight consecutive academic years from the year of his/her admission
with a minimum CGPA of 4.0 shall forfeit his/her degree and his/her
admission stands cancelled
 A student of a lateral entry Programme who fails to earn 132 credits
within six consecutive academic years from the year of his/her
admission with a minimum CGPA of 4.0 shall forfeit his/her degree and
his/her admission stands cancelled
b) Award of degree
Classification of degree will be as follows:
i. CGPA ≥ 7.5 : Degree with Distinction

ii. CGPA ≥6.5 and < 7.5 : Degree with First Class
iii. CGPA ≥5.0 and < 6.5 : Degree with Second Class
iv. CGPA ≥4.0 and < 5.0 : Degree with Pass Class
 First Class with Distinction: A candidate who qualifies for the award
of the Degree (vide clause 8 (a) having passed all the courses of study
of all the eight semesters (six semesters for lateral entry candidates)
at the first opportunity, within eight consecutive semesters (six
consecutive semesters for lateral entry candidates) after the
commencement of his /her study and securing a CGPA of 7.5 and
above shall be declared to have passed in First Class with
Distinction. For this purpose the withdrawal from examination (vide
clause 9) will not be construed as an opportunity for appearance in
the examination
xiv
 First Class: A candidate who qualifies for the award of the Degree
(vide clause 8 (a) having passed all the courses of study of all the eight
semesters (six semesters for lateral entry candidates) within
maximum period of ten consecutive semesters (eight consecutive
semesters for lateral entry candidates) after the commencement of
his /her study and securing a CGPA of 6.5 and above shall be declared
to have passed in First Class
 Second Class : A candidate who qualifies for the award of the Degree (vide
clause 8
(a) having passed all the courses of study of all the eight semesters
(six semesters for lateral entry candidates) within maximum period of
ten consecutive semesters (eight consecutive semesters for lateral
entry candidates) after the commencement of his /her study and
securing a CGPA of 5.0 and above shall be declared to have passed in
Second Class
 Degree with Pass Mark : All other candidates who qualify for the
award of the degree shall be declared to have passed in Degree with
Pass Mark
c) Grafting
In order to extend the benefit to the students with one/ two backlogs after
either 6th semester or 8th semester, GRAFTING option is provided to the
students enabling their placements and fulfilling graduation requirements.
Following are the guidelines for the Grafting:
 Grafting will be done among the courses within the semester. Shall
draw a maximum of 7 marks from the any one of the cleared courses
in the semester and will be grafted to the failed course in the same
semester.
 Students shall be given a choice of grafting only once in the 4 years
Programme, either after 6th semester (Option#1) or after 8th semester
(Option#2)
 Option#1: Applicable to students who have maximum of TWO
theory courses in 5th and/or 6th semesters
 Option#2: Applicable to students who have maximum of TWO
theory courses in 7th and/or 8th semesters.
 Eligibility for grafting:
i. Prior to the conduct of the supplementary
examination after the declaration of the 6th or 8th
semester results.
ii. She/he must appear in all regular or supplementary
examinations as per the provisions laid down in
regulations for the courses s/he appeals for grafting.
iii. The marks obtained by her/him in latest attempt shall
be taken into account for grafting of marks in the failed
course(s).
d) Betterment chance
Student who clears all the subjects up to 6 th semester and wish to
improve their CGPA can register and appear for one betterment chance
for maximum of any five theory courses up to 6th semester. Betterment
chance can be availed along with 7th and 8th semester examinations
xv
e) Quick Supplementary Examination

Student who clears all the courses up to 7th semester shall have a chance to appear
for Quick Supplementary Examination to clear the failed courses of 8th semester
f) All the candidates who register for the semester end examination will be issued
memorandum of marks by the Institute. Apart from the semester wise marks
memos, the institute will issue the provisional certificate subject to the fulfillment
of all the academic requirements
9. Flexibility to Add or Drop Courses
a. It is mandatory that all the students need to earn the minimum number of credits
(as per clause 8) for the award of B. Tech. degree in their respective disciplines.
However a student can earn more number of credits if they wish, by registering one
additional course, from the list of courses available in the curriculum of all
disciplines, over and above to the existing courses from 4th semester to 6th semester
b. The students who are opting for full semester internship (FSI) in the 7 th or 8th
Semester, they are permitted to take the courses as listed in 7 th and 8th semester
of the curriculum are from the list of electives furnished in the curriculum
c. The students, who are in non FSI mode, shall register for the project work in the 8 th
semester only
d. The student shall be permitted to drop any SSC at any point of time
e. All the courses registered and cleared by a student in this mode will be mentioned in
the Cumulative Grade Memo (CGM) as additional acquired. However the CGPA is
calculated for the best 167/125 credits only (as mentioned in the clause 8)
10. Withdrawal from the Examination
a. A candidate may, for valid reasons, be granted permission by the Principal to

withdraw from appearing for the examination in any course or courses of only one
semester examination during the entire duration of the degree Programme. Also,
only ONE application for withdrawal is permitted for that semester examination in
which withdrawal is sought
b. Withdrawal application shall be valid only if the candidate is otherwise eligible to
write the examination and if it is made prior to the commencement of the
examination in that course or courses and also recommended by the Head of the
Department
c. Such Withdrawal from the examination shall be treated as absent for the 1st attempt
to the respective examination and will lose the eligibility for First Class with
Distinction
d. The student shall be allowed to drop FSI course either 7th or 8th semester within 4
weeks from the commencement of the FSI Programme due any uncertainty from
either side. In such case s/he will automatically entered into Non-FSI pattern of
curriculum, and s/he needs to register for respective courses in that semester and
appear for semester end examinations. In case if s/he has earned equivalent number
of credits or near to the equivalent number of credits with respect to clause 9, s/he
shall forbid the courses either partially or fully
xvi
e. If any student withdraws from FSI course after the stipulated period
mentioned in the clause 10.d, s/he will be considered as detained from the
semester. S/he needs to register for the semester in the next academic
year
General
a. s/he represents “she” and “he” both
b. Where the words ‘he’, ‘him’, ‘his’, occur, they imply ‘she’, ‘her’, ‘hers’ also
c. The academic regulations should be read as a whole for the purpose of any
interpretation
d. In the case of any doubt or ambiguity in the interpretation of the above rules,
the decision of the Chairman, Academic Council will be final
The college may change or amend the academic regulations or syllabi from time to
time and the changes or amendments made shall be applicable to all the students with
effect from the dates notified by the institute.
11. Curriculum: The curriculum of all the UG Programmes is given below
xvii
Department Vision
To be a nationally preferred department of learning for students and teachers alike,

with dual commitment to research and serving students in an atmosphere of
innovation and critical thinking.
Department Mission
1. To provide high-quality education in Engineering to prepare the graduates

for a rewarding career in Civil Engineering and related industries, in tune
with evolving needs of the industry
2. To prepare the students to become thinking professionals and good citizens
who would apply their knowledge critically and innovatively to solve
professional and social problems
Program Educational Objectives (PEOs)
PEO 1: Engage in ongoing learning and professional development

through self-study, continuing education in Civil Engineering and also in
other allied fields.
PEO 2: Apply their engineering skills, exhibiting critical thinking and problem solving
skills in professional engineering practices or tackle social, technical and
business challenges.
PEO 3: Demonstrate ethical attitude, soft skills, team spirit and leadership qualities.
xviii
Program Outcomes (POs):
Engineering graduate will be able to:

PO 1: Apply the knowledge of basic sciences and fundamental engineering concepts in
solving civil engineering problems (Engineering knowledge)
PO 2: Identify and define civil engineering problems and investigate to analyze and
interpret data to arrive at substantial conclusions. (Problem analysis)
PO 3: Propose appropriate solutions for engineering problems complying with
functional constraints such as economic, environmental, societal, ethical, safety and
sustainability in accordance with Indian standard codes of
practices.(Design/development of solutions)
PO 4: Perform investigations, design and conduct experiments, analyze and interpret the
results to provide valid conclusions. (Conduct investigations of complex problems)
PO 5: Select/develop and apply appropriate techniques and IT tools to analyze, design
and scheduling of activities with an understanding of the limitations. (Modern tool
usage)
PO 6: Give reasoning and assess societal, health, legal and cultural issues with
competency in professional engineering practice. (The engineer and society)
PO 7: Demonstrate professional skills and contextual reasoning to assess
environmental/societal issues for sustainable development. (Environment and
sustainability)
PO 8: Demonstrate Knowledge of professional and ethical practices. (Ethics)
PO 9: Function effectively as an individual, and as a member or leader in diverse teams,
and in multi-disciplinary situations. (Individual and team work)
PO 10: Communicate effectively with respect to oral, writtenand
graphical communication(Communication)
PO 11: Demonstrate and apply engineering & management principles in their own /
team projects in multidisciplinary environment. (Project management and finance)
PO 12: Recognize the need for, and have the ability to engage in independent and
lifelong learning. (Life-long learning)
PSO#1: Demonstrate the quality and suitability of construction materials

(Program Specific)
PSO#2: Understand the practical aspect of analysis, design and safe construction
practices (Program Specific)
xix
Department of Civil Engineering

[Minimum Credits to be earned: 174 (for regular students)/132(for lateral
entry students)]
First Semester
Course Periods
No
Code
Course POs
L T P C
1 16HSX01 English Communication Skills I 10 3 1 - 3
2 16MAX01 Engineering Mathematics I 1 3 1 - 3
3 16PYX01 Engineering Physics 1 3 1 - 3
4 16MEX01 Engineering Mechanics 1 3 1 - 3
5 16CSX01 Problem Solving using C 1 3 1 - 3
6 16PYX02 Engineering Physics Lab 4 - - 3 2
7 16CSX02 Problem solving using C Lab 4 - - 3 2
8 16MEX02 Engineering Drawing 1,10,5 - - 3 2
Total 15 5 9 21
Second Semester
1 16HSX03 English Communication Skills II 10 3 1 - 3
2 16MAX02 Engineering Mathematics II 1 3 1 - 3
3 16CYX01 Engineering Chemistry 1 3 1 - 3
4 16EEX01 Basic Electrical Engineering 1 3 1 - 3
5 16CHX01 Environmental Studies 1,7 3 1 - 3
6 16HSX02 English Communication Skills Lab 10 - - 3 2
7 16CYX02 Engineering Chemistry Lab 4 - - 3 2
8 16MEX03 Engineering Workshop 4 - - 3 2
Total 15 5 9 21
Third Semester
Course Periods
No Course POs
Code L T P C
1 16MA303 Engineering Mathematics III 1,12 3 - 2 4
2 16CE302 Surveying 1,12 3 1 - 3
3 16CE303 Strength of Materials I 1,12 3 1 - 3
4 16CE304 Building Materials and Construction PSO#1,12 3 1 - 3
5 16CE305 Fluid Mechanics 1,2,12 3 1 - 3
6 16CE306 Building Planning and Drawing 6,10,12 1 - 3 3
7 16CE307 Survey Practical 4,10 - - 3 2
8 16CE308 Strength of Materials Lab 4 - - 3 2
9 16CE309 Computer Aided Building Drawing Lab 5,10 - - 3 2
10 CC&EC Activities I - - 3 -
11 16ESX1A Employability Skills I - 2 - -
Total 16 6 15 25
Fourth Semester
1 16HSX04 Engineering Economics and Project
11,12 3 1 - 3
Management
2 16CE402 Strength of Materials II 2,12 3 1 - 3
3 16CE403 Engineering Geology 1,2,4,12,PSO#1 3 - 2 4
4 16CE404 Soil Mechanics 2,12,PSO#1 3 1 - 3
5 16CE405 Hydraulics and Hydraulic Machinery 2,3,12 3 1 - 3
6 16CE406 Transportation Engineering 3,12,14 3 1 - 3
7 16CE407 Soil Mechanics Lab 4,PSO#1 - - 3 2
8 16CE408 Fluid Mechanics and Hydraulic Machines Lab 4 - - 3 2
9 16CE409 Transportation Engineering Lab 4,PSO#1 - - 3 2
10 16HSX05 CC & EC Activities I - - 3 1
11 16ESX1B Employability Skills II - 2 - 1
Total 18 7 14 27
xx
Fifth Semester
Course Periods
No Course POs
Code L T P C
1 16CE501 Concrete Technology 4,12,PSO#1 3 - 2 4
2 16CE502 Structural Analysis I 2,12 3 1 - 3
3 16CE503 Foundation Engineering 2,3,12, PSO#2 3 1 - 3
4 16CE504 Design of Steel Structures 3,12,10, PSO#2 1 0 3 3
5 16CE505 Water Resources Engineering I 2,3,12 3 1 - 3
6 Elective I/CC 3 1 - 3
7 16CE507 Survey Camp 4,10 - - 3 2
8 16CE508/ Term Paper/ - - 3 2
1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,10,11,
16CE509 Mini Project
12,PSO#1, PSO#2
9 CC & EC Activity II - - 3 -
10 16ESX2A Employability Skills III - 2 - -
11 Summer Internship 9 - - - -
Total 18 7 11 23
Sixth Semester
1 16CE601 Structural Analysis II 2,12 3 1 - 3
2 16CE602 Design of RC Structures 3,10,12, PSO#2 3 1 - 3
3 16CE603 Environmental Engineering 3,6,12, PSO#2 3 1 - 3
4 16CE604 Water Resources Engineering II 2,3,4,10,12 3 - 2 4
5 Elective II/CC 3 1 - 3
6 Elective III (Open Elective) 3 1 - 3
7 16CE607 Environmental Engineering Lab 4 - - 3 2
8 16CE508/ Term Paper/ - - 3 2
1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,10,11,
16CE509 Mini Project
12,PSO#1, PSO#2
9 Audit Course 8 - - - -
10 16HSX06 CC & EC Activity II - - 3 1
11 16ESX2B Employability Skills IV - 2 - 1
Total 18 7 11 25
Seventh Semester
Course Periods
No Course POs
Code L T P C
1 16CE701 Geospatial Techniques 1,2,5,12 3 1 - 3
2 Elective IV/CC 3 1 - 3
3 Elective V/CC 3 1 - 3
4 16CE704 Structural Modeling and Design Lab 4,5,10 - - 3 2
5 16CE705 GIS Lab 4,5,10 - - 3 2
6 16CE706 Full Semester Internship1 9 - - - 16
Total 9 3 6 13/16
Eighth Semester
1 16CE801 Construction Costing and Management 8,11,12 3 1 - 3
2 16CE802 Professional Ethics in Civil Engineering 8 4 - - 3
3 Elective VI/CC 3 1 - 3
4 16CE804 Project2 1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,10, - - - 10
11,12,PSO#1,
PSO#2
5 16CE706 Full Semester Internship3 9 16
Total 10 2 - 19/16
1
Student who opt for FSI-16CE706 during 7th semester, have to register one more additional
elective and 16CE704 & 16CE705 as additional lab courses during 8th semester
2
Students are encouraged to do multidisciplinary projects
3
Student the who opt for FSI-16CE706 during 8th semester, have to register an additional course in
consultation with HoD during 7th semester
xxi
List of Electives
Elective I
Course Periods
No Course POs
Code L T P C
1 16CE001 Construction Technology 5,12 3 1 - 3
2 16CE002 Elements of Rock Mechanics 2,12 3 1 - 3
3 16CE003 Pavement Engineering 3,12, PSO#2 3 1 - 3
4 MOOCs - - - 3
Elective II
1 16CE004 Ground Water Hydrology 2,3,12 3 1 - 3
2 16CE005 Ground Improvement Techniques 3,5,12,PSO#1 3 1 - 3
3 16CE006 Traffic Engineering and Safety 3,12, PSO#2 3 1 - 3
4 MOOCs - - - 3
Elective III (Open Electives – Mathematics, Chemistry, Entrepreneurship Skills, Industrial Safety and
Engineering & Technology)
1 16CE007 Disaster Management 2,7,12 3 1 - 3
2 16EE004 Renewable Energy Sources 2,7,12 3 1 - 3
3 16ME009 Principles of Entrepreneurship 8,12 3 1 - 3
4 16EC004 Fundamentals of Global Positioning System 1,2,12 3 1 - 3
5 16CS006 Computational Intelligence 3,12 3 1 - 3
6 16CS007 IoT for Engineering Applications 1,3,12 3 1 - 3
7 16CH008 Industrial Safety and Hazard Management 3,8,12 3 1 - 3
8 16IT005 Fundamentals of Cloud Computing 2,3,5,12 3 1 - 3
9 16PE006 Smart Grid Technologies 3,12 3 1 - 3
10 16MA001 Computational Mathematics 3,12 3 1 - 3
11 16CY001 Nano Science & Technology 12 3 1 - 3
Elective IV
1 16CE008 Earthquake Resistant Design 2,3,12, PSO#2 3 1 - 3
2 16CE009 Environmental Pollution and Solid Waste 2,3,6,12 3 1 - 3
Management
3 16CE010 Repair and Rehabilitation of Structures 2,12,PSO#1 4 - - 3
4 16CE011 Water Resources Systems Planning and 3,12 3 1 - 3
Management
5 MOOCs - - - 3
Elective V
1 16CE012 Bridge Engineering 2,3,12, PSO#2 3 1 - 3
2 16CE013 Prestressed Concrete 2,3,12 3 1 - 3
3 16CE014 Watershed Management 6,7,12 3 1 - 3
4 16CE015 Urban Transportation Planning 2,3,12 3 1 - 3
5 MOOCs - - - 3
Elective VI
1 16CE016 Advanced Reinforced Concrete Design 2,3,10,12, 1 - 3 3
PSO#2
2 16CE017 Design and Drawing of Irrigation Structures 3,10,12 1 - 3 3
3 16CE018 Pavement Management Systems 3,5,12 3 1 - 3
4 16CE019 Soil Dynamics 1,3,12, PSO#2 3 1 - 3
5 16CE020 Project Management 11,12 4 - - 3
6 16CE021 Green Buildings 7,12 4 - - 3
7 MOOCs - - - 3
xxii
Contemporary Courses (CC)4

1 16CE022 Contracts and Arbitrations 6,12 4 - - 3
2 16CE023 Architecture and Urban Planning 6,12 4 - - 3
3 16CE024 Aviation Infrastructure and Planning 3,12, PSO#2 4 - - 3
4 16CE025 Design of Industrial Structures 3,12, PSO#2 4 - - 3
One Credit Course (s)3
1 16CEI01 Building Materials 1 0 0 1
2 16CEI02 Building Distress and Remedial Measures 1 0 0 1
3 16CEI03 Chemicals in Construction Industry 1 0 0 1
4 16CEI04 Construction Communication 1 0 0 1
Audit Courses
1 16AT001 Contemporary India: Economy, Polity and Society
(ME)
2 16AT002 Indian Heritage and Culture (EEE)
3 16AT003 Intellectual Property Rights and Patents (ECE)
4 16AT004 Introduction to Journalism (CSE)
-
5 16AT005 Professional Ethics and Morals (CE)
6 16AT006 Science, Technology and Development (Chem)
7 16AT007 Industrial sociology (PE)
8 16AT008 Organizational Behavior (IT)
9 16AT009 Communication Etiquette in workplaces (BS & H)
4Contemporary and One Credit Courses may vary from one Academic Year to another
academic year and depends on the recent trends in the industries
xxiii
CURRICULUM FEATURES
UNDER ACADEMIC REGULATION 2016
1. Choice based credit system
2. Types of learning strategies
Curriculum is designed and developed in such a way that it provides a high

degree of flexibility to promote a learner centric environment through different
types of learning strategies viz. Independent learning, collaborative learning and
interactive learning.
 Independent learning
o Self study elective courses
o Self study topics in each unit in all the courses
 Collaborative Learning
o Laboratory classes
o Mini projects in all laboratory courses
o Main project to demonstrate all the possible learning outcomes
 Interactive Learning
o Tutorial classes in all the courses wherever possible
3. Industry engagement
 Industry driven 3-credit elective courses
 Industry driven 1-credit courses from 3rd semester onwards
 Summer internship (One month duration) at the end of 2nd year during
the program of study
 Full semester internship (FSI) (Six month) during fourth year during the
program of study
4. Layered learning
5. Research oriented electives in the form of term paper
6. Credited courses for employability skills, extra- and co- curricular
activities
7. Assessment pattern for all courses in accordance with revised Bloom’s
taxonomy
8. Distribution of courses
xxiv
Department of Civil Engineering,GMRIT | Syllabi | Regulation 2016
16HSX01 ENGLISH COMMUNICATION SKILLS I

3103
Course Outcomes
COs – POs Mapping
COs PO10
CO1 3
CO2 3
CO3 3
CO4 3
CO5 3
CO6 3
3–Strongly linked | 2–Moderately linked | 1–Weakly linked
Unit I
In London by M. K. Gandhi
Using appropriate word/phrases, synonyms and antonyms, nouns, pronouns, paragraph writing, changing
autobiography into biography
Montgomery Bus Boycott
11+4 Hours
Unit II
Pecuniary Independence by P. T. Barnum
Using appropriate word/phrases, synonyms and antonyms, Adjectives, Adverbs, Note-making, Rewriting
sentences and Short talk
TED-Sashi Tharoor
12+3 Hours
Unit III
The Drunkard by W. H. Smith
Similes, Rhythmic expressions, One-word substitution, Describing people, Synonym and Antonyms, Tenses
(past and present), Gerund and Verbal Adjective, Summarizing, essay writing, writing paragraph
Essay writing tips
11+4 Hours
Unit IV
Three Days to see by Hellen Keller
Deriving words, adjective formation, Tenses (future), prefixes, ModalAuxiliary verbs, Dialogue writing,
Expressing opinions/ideas, collecting information
Famous Indians with disability
11+4 Hours
Total:45+15 Hours
Textbook (s)
1. M. S. Rama Murty and M. Hariprasad, Prose for Communication Skills, Ravindra Publishing House,
Hyderabad, 2012
1
Reference (s)
1. J. Seely, Oxford Guide to Effective Writing and Speaking, OUP, 2013
2. Quirk, Greenbaum, Leech and Svartvk, A Comprehensive Grammar of the English language, Pearson,
India, 2010
3. R. Murphy, English Grammar in Use, 4th Ed, CUP, Cambridge, 2012
4. https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Montgomery_Bus_Boycott
5. https://www.ted.com/talks/shashi_tharoor?language=en
6. http://www.internationalstudent.com/essay_writing/essay_tips
7. http://www.thebetterindia.com/16449/famous-indians-with-disability
SAMPLE QUESTION (S)

Internal Assessment Pattern
Cognitive Level Int. Test 1 (%) Int. Test 2 (%) Assignment Test 1 (%)
Remember 25 25 -
Understand 25 25 -
Apply 50 50 40
Analyze - - 30
Evaluate - - -
Create - - 30
Total (%) 100 100 100
REMEMBER
1. Find a synonym for each of the following words.
i. Emulate ii. Mend
2. Find an antonym for each of the following words
i. Intensive ii. Extravagance
UNDERSTAND
1. Sketch the personality of Edward Middleton as he emerges from the conversation in the play.
2. Summarize Gandhi’s attempts to model himself on the English gentleman and which circumstances
force him to realize that he has been pursuing a false idea?
APPLY
1. Construct a dialogue between students about organizing music club activities in their college.
2. Construct a dialogue between two friends about how they plan their own careers.
ANALYZE AND CREATE

1. Prepare an essay in about 300 words on ‘some concrete measures to combat pollution.
2. Create an imaginary conversation between a blind boy and his friend on their visit to a drama.
1
Assignment test should contain only questions related to Higher Order Thinking (HOT) Skills pertaining to this course
2
16MAX01 ENGINEERING MATHEMATICS I

3103
Course Outcomes
1. Classify and solve analytically a wide range of first and higher order ordinary differential equations
with constant coefficients
2. Apply the knowledge of Mean value theorems, Maxima and Minima of functions of several variables
3. Analyze the characteristics and trace the curve of an equation
4. Adapt methods for measuring lengths, volumes, surface area of an object and transformation of
coordinates in practical situations
5. Utilize basic knowledge of conservative field, potential function and work done in engineering
problems
6. Identify the relationships between line, surface and volume integrals
COs – POs Mapping

COs PO1
1 3
2 3
3 3
4 3
5 3
6 3
Unit I
Differential Equations
Differential equations of first order and first degree–exact, linear and Bernoulli Applications to Newton’s Law
of cooling, Law of natural growth and decay, orthogonal trajectories, Non-homogeneous linear differential
equations of second and higher order with constant coefficients with RHS term of the type e ax, Sin ax, cos ax,
polynomials in x, eaxV(x), xV(x)
Heat flow problems–Variation of parameters 11+4 Hours
Unit II
Mean Value Theroms and Functions of Several Variables
Generalized Mean Value theorem (All theorems without proof), Functions of several variables-Partial
differentiation, Functional dependence, Jacobian, Maxima and Minima of functions of two variables with
constraints and without constraints. Curve tracing-Cartesian-Polar and Parametric curves
Rolle’s, Lagrange’s and Cauchy’s mean value theorems–Generalized Mean Value theorem proofs
11+4 Hours
Unit III
Applications of Integration
Applications of Integration to Lengths, Volumes and Surface areas of revolution in Cartesian and Polar
Coordinates. Multiple integrals-double and triple integrals, change of variables (Cartesian and Polar
coordinates), Change of order of Integration
Applications of Integration–Centroid–Mass 12+3 Hours
Unit IV
Vector Calculus
Vector Differentiation-Gradient, Divergence, Curl and their related properties of sums-products,
Laplacianoperator, Vector Integration - Line integral, work done, Potential function, area, surface and volume
integrals, Vector integral theorems: Greens, Stokes and Gauss Divergence Theorems (All theorems without
proof) and related problems
Vector identities–Proof of Green’s theorem 11+4 Hours
Total:45+15 Hours
3
Textbook (s)
1. B. S. Grewal, Higher Engineering Mathematics, 42nd Ed., Khanna Publishers, New Delhi, 2012
2. E. Kreyszig, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, 9 th Ed., Wiley, 2012
3. R. K. Jain, S. R. K.Iyengar, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, 4 th Ed., NarosaPublishingHouse,
NewDelhi, 2014
Reference (s)
1. B. V. Ramana, Engineering Mathematics, 4th Ed., Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 2009
2. D. S. Chandrashekharaiah, Engineering Mathematics, Volume 1, Prism Publishers, 2010
3. T. K. V. Iyengar, B. Krishna Ghandhi, S. Ranganathan and M.V. S.S.N. Prasad, Engineering
Mathematics, Volume-I, 12th Ed., S. Chand Publishers, 2014
4. U. M. Swamy, P. VijayaLaxmi, K. L. Sai Prasad and M. Phani Krishna Kishore, A Text Book of
Engineering Mathematics–I, Excel Books, New Delhi, 2010
SAMPLE QUESTION (S)

Cognitive Level Int. Test 1 (%) Int. Test 2 (%) Assignment Test2 (%)
Remember 30 30 -
Understand 40 40 -
Apply 30 30 60
Analyze - - -
Evaluate -- - 30
Create -- - 10
Total (%) 100 100 100
REMEMBER
1. Find the Integrating factor of  x y  2xy  dx   x
2 2 3

 3x 2 y dy  0

2. Define solenoidal and irrotational for a Vector point function f .
3. Find the volume of solid generated by the revolution of the cardioid r = a(1+cos𝜃) about the initial line
𝜃=0
UNDERSTAND
1. Solve (D  4D  4) y  0
2
2
d y dy
2. Solve 2
 6  25y  e2 x Sin x
dx dx
3. Find the volume of the greatest rectangular parallelopiped that can be inscribed in the ellipsoid
x2 y2  z2

   
a2 b2 1
APPLY c2
1. A body originally at 80 0Ccools down to 60 oC in 20 minutes, the temperature of the air being
40oC.What will be the temperature of the body after 40 minutes from original?
∞ ∞ 𝑒−𝑦
𝑑y 𝑑x
2. Evaluate the integral by the change of order of integration ∫O∫s y
3. Show that the vector (x 2 − yz)t̅ + (y 2 − xz)y̅ + (z 2 − yx)𝑘̅ is irrotational and find its Scalar
potential
CREATE
1. Apipe 20 cm in diameter contains steam at 200 0C. It is covered by a layer of insulation 6cm thick and
thermal conductivity 0.0003. If the temperarature of the outer surface is 30 oC. Find the heat lose per
hour from 2 meter length of the pipe
2
4
16PYX01 ENGINEERING PHYSICS

3103
Course Outcomes
1. Illustrate the concepts of Interference, Diffraction, Polarization and their applications
2. Summarize the concepts of electric fields, magnetic fields and superconductivity and make out the
scope of applications in various engineering fields
3. Outline the quantum mechanics to infer conductivity nature of metals
4. Explain the properties and application of dielectric, magnetic and Nano-materials
5. Demonstrate the emission of laser light, optical fibers and their applications in various Engineering
fields
6. Analyze the engineering Applications based on Fundamental concepts
COs – POs Mapping
COs PO1
1 3
2 3
3 3
4 3
5 3
6 3
Unit I
Optics
Interference:Superposition of waves-Coherence-Young's double slit experiment-Interference in thin films by
reflection (Qualitative treatment)–Newton's rings.Diffraction: Fresnel and Fraunhoffer diffractions-Fraunhoffer
diffraction at a single slit-Diffraction grating-Grating spectrum, Polarization–Types of Polarization-Double
refraction-Nicol prism-Quarter and Half wave plate. Lasers: Characteristics of laser–Stimulated absorption–
Spontaneous emission-Stimulated emission–Population inversion–Pumping mechanism–Active medium–Laser
systems: Ruby laser-He-Ne laser–Semiconductor laser–Applications of Lasers
Wedge shaped film–Polarization–Holography
12+4 Hours
Unit II
Electrostatics and Electromagnetism
Gauss law in electricity and it’s applications: Coulomb’s law from Gauss law-spherically distributed charge-
Infinite line of charge-Infinite sheet of charges–Ampere's Law-Magnetic field due to current (Biot-Savart’s
Law)-B due to a current carrying wire and a circular loop,-Faraday’s law of induction-Lenz’s law-Induced
fields-Maxwell’s equations (Qualitative treatment)-Hall Effect-Electromagnetic Wave and poynting vector
(Qualitative treatment), Superconductivity–Superconductivity phenomenon-General properties-Meissner effect-
Penetration depth-Type I and type II superconductors-Flux quantization-DC and AC Josephson effect-
Applications of superconductors
Infinite line of charge–Infinite sheet of charges Quantum Interference (SQUID)
11+3 Hours
Unit III
Quantum Theory of Solids–Semiconductors–Optical Fiber
Quantum theory of solids: Dual nature of matter, properties of matter waves-Schrödinger’s wave equation–
Physical significance of wave function–Particle in a box (one dimensional)-Free electron theory of metals,
electrical conductivity-quantum free electron theory–Fermi Dirac Distribution-Kronig-Penney model
(qualitative)-Classification of materials into conductors-semi-conductors & insulators. Semiconductors: Carrier
Concentration (Intrinsic and Extrinsic, qualitative treatment only), Carrier drift, Carrier diffusion, Optical Fiber:
–principle and propagation of light in optical fibers–Numerical aperture and acceptance angle–types of optical
fibers–single and multimode, step index and graded index fibers–applications–fiber optic communication
system
5
Uncertainty principle–Intrinsic and Extrinsic Semiconductor–Fiberoptic sensors

12+4 Hours
Unit IV
Magnetic, Dielectric & Nanomaterials
Magnetic Materials: Origin of magnetic moment (Bohr Magneton)-Classification of Magnetic materials-Dia,
para, ferro, Anti-ferro and Ferri magnetism-Domain and Weiss field theory (qualitative treatment only)-
Hysteresis Curve-Soft and Hard magnetic materials-Applications of magnetic materials
Dielectric Materials: Dielectric Polarization-Electronic, ionic and orientation polarizations (Qualitative treatment)
-Dielectrics in alternating fields-frequency dependence of the Polarizability ((Qualitative treatment), Important
dielectric materials
Nanomaterials: Introduction to nano materials-Physical, mechanical-electrical and optical properties of nano
materials-Preparation techniques of nano materials (Sol-Gel, CVD, Ball Milling)-Nano tubes-Different methods
of preparation carbon nano tubes (CNT’s) (CVD)-Applications of Nanomaterials
Permeability–Magnetization–Dielectric constant–Ferro and Piezo electric effect and materials
10+4 Hours
Total:45+15 Hours
Textbook (s)
1. Halliday, Resnick and Krane, Physics Part-II, Wiley India Pvt. Ltd, 2012
2. S. O. Pillai, Solid State Physics, 6th Ed., Newage International Publishers, 2015
3. M. R. Srinivasan, Engineering Physics, 2 nd Ed., Newage International Publishers, 2014
4. A. S. Vasudeva, Modern Engineering Physics, S. Chand and Company, New Delhi, 2006
5. C. M. Srivastava and C.Srinivasan, Science of Engineering Materials, Wiley Eastern Pvt. Ltd, 1997
6. C. P. Poole and F. J. Owens, Introduction to Nanotechnology, Wiley, New Delhi, 2007
Reference (s)
1. R. K. Gour and S. L. Gupta, Engineering Physics, Dhanpathrai Publications, New Delhi, 2002
2. V. Rajendran, Engineering Physics, McGraw Hill Education (India) Private LTD, 2010
3. M. Armugam, Engineering Physics, Anuradha Agencies, 2007
Sample question (s)

Cognitive Level Int. Test 1 (%) Int. Test 2 (%) Assignment Test 3(%)
Remember 40 40 -
Understand 40 40 -
Apply 20 20 80
Analyze - - 20
Evaluate - - -
Create - - -
Total (%) 100 100 100
REMEMBER
1. Define Principle of Superposition?
2. State Faraday’s law of electromagnetic induction and Lenz’s law.
3. Summarize Meissenr’s effect of super conductors.
UNDERSTAND
1. Explain the construction and working principle of Nicole’s prism.
2. Construct Ruby laser and explain its working principle with energy level diagram.
3. Conclude the inferences from the M-H characteristics of Type-1 and Type-2 super conductors.
6
APPLY
1. List any four applications of lasers with reference to their characteristics.
2. Apply Biot-Savart’s law, and calculate the Magnetic field induction along the infinite length of a straight
conductor at points close to the conductor.
3. Calculate electric field intensity due to infinite line of charge by applying Gauss law.
ANALYZE
1. Compare Fraunhoffer’s diffraction and Fresnel’s diffractions.
2. Discuss the role of Meta stable states in lasing action.
3. Discuss the BCS theory of Superconductors.
3
7
16MEX01 ENGINEERING MECHANICS

3103
Course Outcomes
1. Draw the free body diagram of a given physical system and compute the resultant of a given coplanar
system of forces
2. Estimate the centroid of composite figures and bodies
3. Estimate area moment of inertia and mass moment of inertia of composite figures and bodies
4. Explain concepts of friction and principle of virtual work
5. Summarize power transmission through belts
6. Analyze plane truss (frame) by method of joints and method of sections
COs – POs Mapping
COs PO1
1 3
2 3
3 3
4 3
5 3
6 2
Unit I
System of forces-Equilibrium of system of forces
Types of Force systems-Coplanar Concurrent Forces–Resultant–Moment of a Force and its application–
Couples and Resultant of a Force System, Free body diagrams, equations of equilibrium of coplanar concurrent
and non-concurrent force systems, Lami’s theorem, resolution of a force into a force and a couple
Polygon law of forces for resultant
11+4 Hours
Unit II
Centroid-Centre of Gravity-Area Moments of Inertia-Mass Moment of Inertia
Centroids of simple figures (from basic principles)-Centroids of Composite Figures, Centre of gravity of simple
body (from basic principles), center of gravity of composite bodies, Definition–Moments of Inertia of simple
Figures, Polar Moment of Inertia, Transfer Theorem, Moments of Inertia of Composite Figures. Definition,
Moment of Inertia of simple bodies, Transfer Formula for Mass Moments of Inertia
Mass moment of inertia of composite bodies
12+4 Hours
Unit III
Friction-Power transmission through belts
Theory of friction–Angle of friction–Laws of friction-static friction–Kinetic friction, friction in bodies moving
up or down on an inclined plane-Introduction to belt and rope drives, types of belt drives, velocity ratio of belt
drives, slip of belt drives, tensions for flat belt drive, angle of contact, centrifugal tension, maximum tension of
belt
Condition for transmission of maximum power
11+4Hours
Unit IV
Analysis of perfect frames (Analytical Method)-Virtual Work
Types of Frames-Assumptions for forces in members of a perfect frame, Method of joints, Method of sections,
Force table, Cantilever Trusses, Structures with one end hinged and the other freely supported on rollers
carrying horizontal or inclined loads, Principle of Virtual Work-Application of the Principle of Virtual Work-
potential Energy and Equilibrium
Stable and Unstable Equilibrium 11+3 Hours
Total: 45+15 Hours
8
Textbook (s)
1. K. Vijay Kumar Reddy, J. Suresh Kumar, Singer's Engineering Mechanics Statics and Dynamics, BS
Publications, 3rd Edition, 2011
2. A. K. Tayal, Engineering Mechanics Statics and Dynamics, Umesh Publications, 14th Edition, 2011
3. S. S. Bhavikatti, Engineering Mechanics, New Age International, 2008
4. S. Timoshenko & D. H. Young, and JV Rao, Engineering Mechanics, 4th Ed., TMH Education, 2006
Reference (s)
1. Irving H. Shames and G. Krishna MohanaRao, Engineering Mechanics, 4 th Ed., Pearson, 2006
2. R. K. Bansal, Engineering Mechanics, Laxmi Publications, 3 rd Edition, 2004
SAMPLE QUESTION (S)
Cognitive Level Int. Test 1 (%) Int. Test 2 (%) Assignment Test4(%)
Remember 20 20 -
Understand 30 30 -
Apply 50 50 60
Analyze -- - 40
Evaluate -- - -
Create -- - -
Total (%) 100 100 100
REMEMBER
1. Define centroid
2. List the different types of belt drives
3. Define angle of repose
UNDERSTAND
1. Explain Lami’s theorem
2. Compare mass moment of inertia and area moment of inertia
3. Explain the difference between frame and truss
APPLY
1. Solve the resultant of three forces acting on a hook as shown in below figure
2. Identify the centroid of T-section shown in below figure
3. Solve to find the power transmitted by a belt running over a pulley of 600 mm diameter at 200 r.p.m.
The coefficient of friction between the belt and the pulley is 0.25, angle of lap 160° and maximum
tension in the belt is 2500 N
4
9
16CSX01 PROBLEM SOLVING USING C

3103
Course Outcomes
1. Develop the flow charts and algorithms, and then implement, compile and debug programs in C
language for solving a problem
2. Design programs involving decision structures, loops for problem solving
3. Design programs to develop applications using array data structure
4. Solve scientific problems using functions
5. Make use of pointers to design applications for efficient and dynamic memory allocation
6. Design programs to create/update basic data files
COs – POs Mapping
COs PO1
1 3
2 3
3 3
4 3
5 2
6 2
Unit I
Programming Basics
Introduction, Algorithm / pseudo code, flowchart, program development steps, structure of a C program, Types,
Operators, and Expressions: C-tokens, Variable Names, Data Types and Sizes, Constants, Declarations, C-
operators, Type Conversions, Precedence and Order of Evaluation
Control Flow: Statements and Blocks, If-Else, Else-If, Switch, Loops-While and For, Loops- Do-while, Break
and Continue
Comma and size of operators–Conditional Expressions–goto and Labels
12+3 Hours
Unit II
Arrays and Functions
Array concept, definition, declaration, accessing elements, storing elements, strings and string manipulations, 2-
D arrays, Multidimensional arrays, Array Applications
Basics of Functions, Functions Returning Non-integers, External Variables, Scope Rules, Static Variables,
Block Structure, Storage Classes, user defined functions, standard library functions, recursive functions, passing
Arrays to functions, Functions Applications
Arithmetic operations on string–nesting of functions–preprocessor commands
11+4 Hours
Unit III
Pointers and Structures
Pointer concepts, initialization of pointer variables, pointers and function arguments, passing by address,
dangling memory, address arithmetic, Character pointers and functions, pointers to pointers, dynamic memory
management functions
Basics of Structures, Structures and Functions, Arrays of Structures, Pointers to Structures, Self-referential
Structures, typedef, Unions
Programs on Dynamic memory management using functions–Table Lookup
11+4 Hours
Unit IV
File Structures
Standard Input and Output, Formatted Output-printf, Variable-length Argument Lists, Formatted Input-scanf,
File Access
Data Structures: Introduction to linear and non-linear data Structures, definition: stack, queue
Error Handling-stderr and exit–Introduction to Single Linked Lists
11+4 Hours
Total: 45+15 Hours
10
Textbook (s)
1. B. W. Kernighan, Dennis M. Ritchie, The C–Programming Language-, 2nd Ed., PHI, 1990
2. H. Sahni and A. Freed, Fundamentals of Data Structures in C, 2 nd Ed., Universities Press, 2008
Reference (s)
1. Y. Kanetkar, Let us C, 8th Ed., BPB Publication, 2004
2. F. E. V. Prasad, C Programming: A Problem-Solving Approach, Giliberg, Cengage, 2010
3. A. S. Tenenbaum, Y. Langsam and M. J. Augenstein,Data Structures using C, Pearson Education, 2009
SAMPLE QUESTION (S)

Remember 25 20 -
Understand 35 40 30
Apply 40 40 40
Analyze - - 30
Evaluate - - -
Create - - -
Total (%) 100 100 100
REMEMBER
1. Define computer
2. List out operators
3. What is dangling pointer
UNDERSTAND
1. Explain structure of a c program
2. Describe linear and nonlinear data structures
3. Explain multidimensional arrays
APPLY
1. Implement matrix multiplication using arrays
2. Draw flow chart of program development steps
3. Demonstrate pointe to pointer concept.
ANALYZE
1. Compare structure and union
2. Differentiate logical and relational operators
3. Classify linear and nonlinear data structures
5
11
16PYX02 ENGINEERING PHYSICS LAB

0032
Course Outcomes
1. Build the knowledge in the scientific methods and learn the process of measuring different physical
parameters
2. Develop the laboratory skills in handling of electrical and Optical instruments
3. Demonstrate the interference and diffraction phenomena of light
4. Inspect and experience physical principles of Magnetic fields and optical fiber communications
5. Apply the principles of physics and measure the solid state properties of materials
6. Design and analyze experiment based on physics concepts
COs – POs Mapping

COs PO4
1 3
2 3
3 3
4 3
5 3
6 3
List of Experiments
1. Variation of magnetic field along the axis of current-carrying circular coil-Stewart and Gee’s Method
2. Determination of wavelengths of spectral line of mercury spectrum using diffraction grating
3. Determination of radius of curvature of convex lens by forming Newton’s rings
4. LCR circuit- Study of parallel and series Resonance
5. Measurement of thickness of a thin paper using wedge method
6. Fiber optics-Numerical aperture of a given fiber and study of bendig losses
7. Meldie’s Experiment–Transverse and longitudinal modes
8. Determination of wave length of Laser by diffraction grating
9. Determination of Hall Coefficient and charge carrier density of semi-conductor
10. Determination of Band gap of a semiconductor
List of Augmented Experiments6

1. To study the magnetization (M) of a ferromagnetic material in the presence of a magnetic field B and to
plot the hysteresis curve (M vs. B)
2. Study theThermoemf of the thermo couple
3. LCR Series and Parallel–Design of circuit for various resonance frequencies
4. Determination of characteristics of Laser beam
5. Determination of Horizontal component of earth’s magnetic field
6. Study of double refraction in calcite crystals
7. Dispersive power of various liquids using spectrometer
8. Photo cell–Characteristics and determination of Planks constant
Reading Material (s)

1. Physics Lab manual–Department of Physics, BS & H, GMRIT, Rajam, 2015
2. Y. Aparna and K. Venkateswararao, Engineering Physics–I and II, VGS Techno series, 2010
3. S. Panigrahi and B. Mallick, Engineering Practical Physics, Cengage leaning, Delhi, 2015
6
Students shall opt any one of the Augmented Experiments in addition to the regular experiments
12
16CSX02 PROBLEM SOLVING USING C LAB

0032
Course Outcomes
1. Implement, compile and debug programs in C language for solving a problem
2. Design programs involving decision structures, loops for problem solving
3. Design programs to develop applications using array data structure
4. Apply functions to solve real world problems
5. Make use of pointers to design applications with efficientuse of memory
6. Design programs to create/update basic data files
COs – POs Mapping

COs PO4
1 3
2 3
3 3
4 3
5 3
6 3
List of Experiments
1. Algorithms and Flow charts design and evaluation (Minimum 2)
2. Write C Programs to demonstrate C-tokens and operators
3. Write C Programs to demonstrate Decision Making And Branching (Selection)
4. Write a C program to demonstrate different loops
5. Write a C program to demonstrate arrays
6. Write a C program to demonstrate functions
7. Write a C program to implement the following
A. To manipulate strings using string handling functions.
B. To manipulate strings without using string handling functions
8. Write a C program to demonstrate different library functions
9. Write a C program to implement the following
A. To exchange two values using call by value and reference
B. To multiply two matrices using pointers
10. Write a C program to demonstrate functions using pointers
11. Write a C program to implement the following operations using structure and functions:
i) Reading a complex number ii) Writing a complex number
12. Write a C program
A. To copy data from one file to another
B. To reverse the first n characters in a given file (Note: The file name and n are specified on the
command line)
1. Merging of two arrays
2. Arithmetic operations on two complex numbers
3. Employee's Management System
4. Library management
5. Department store system
6. Personal Dairy Management System
7. Telecom Billing Management System
8. Bank Management System
9. Contacts Management
10. Medical Store Management System

1. C Programming Lab manual–Department of CSE-GMRIT Rajam
7
13
16MEX02 ENGINEERING DRAWING

0032
Course Outcomes
1. Understand Principles of engineering drawing
2. Construct Conic sections using general methods and other methods
3. Construct Orthographic projections of Points, Lines and Planes
4. Construct Orthographic projections of Solids using basic drafting software
5. Construct Isometric projections using basic drafting software
6. Construct Orthographic projections from given isometric projections of an object and vice versa
COs – POs Mapping

COs PO1 PO5 PO10
1 2 3 3
2 3 3 3
3 3 3 3
4 3 3 3
5 3 3 3
6 3 3 3
List of Experiments
Unit I
Conic Sections-Introduction to Orthographic Projections
Construction of conics using general method and other special methods
Orthographic Projections of Points, Straight Lines parallel to both planes, parallel to one plane and inclined to
other plane
9 Hours
Unit II
Orthographic Projections of Straight Lines and Planes
Projections of Straight Lines inclined to both planes; Projections of Planes; Regular Planes Perpendicular
Parallel to one Reference Plane and inclined to other Reference Plane; inclined to both the Reference Planes
Practice the following topics by using any one 2D drafting software
9 Hours
Unit III
Projections of Solids &Isometric Projections
Projections of Prisms, Cylinders, Pyramids and Cones with the axis inclined to one Principal Plane and Parallel
to the other, Projections of Prisms, Cylinders, Pyramids and Cones inclined to both the Principal Planes
Introduction to Isometric Projections, Isometric axes, angles, Isometric views, Construction of Isometric views
of Simple planes and Solids in various positions
15 Hours
Unit IV
Conversion of Engineering Views
Conversion of Orthographic Views of Simple Solid objects into Isometric View, Conversion of Isometric View
of Simple Solid objects into Orthographic Views
9 Hours
Total: 42 Hours
List of Drawing Sheets
1. Conics by General Method
2. Conics by using Special Methods
3. Projections of Points and Straight lines in Simple Positions
4. Projections of Lines inclined to both planes
5. Projections of Planes in Simple positions
6. Projections of Planes inclined to both planes
14
7. Projections of Solids
8. Projections of Solids inclined to both planes
9. Isometric Projections
10. Conversion of Orthographic views into Isometric views
11. Conversion of Isometric views into Orthographic views

1. Draw the Knuckle Pin and fork end of the knuckle joint
2. Draw the Socket and spigot cotter joint
3. Draw the Tommy bar and body of the Screw jack
4. Draw the Cup and Big and Small screws of screw jack
5. Draw the Connecting rod of IC Engine using AutoCAD
6. Draw the Pipe spool with flanges and a valve
7. Draw a sample pipe line construction design in oil and gas industries using AutoCAD
8. Draw the Pipe truss design using AutoCAD
9. Draw a 3-D bolt and nut with Threads using AutoCAD
10. Draw a 3-D Cross head pattern using AutoCAD
11. Draw the sample Bridge using AutoCAD
12. Draw the pipe vice using AutoCAD
13. Draw the Ni-Cd Battery zapper circuit diagram using AutoCAD
14. Draw the circuit diagram of battery charger with automatic cutoff using AutoCAD
15. Draw the satellite dish and Antenna using AutoCAD

Textbook (s)
1. N.D. Bhatt, V. M. Panchal, Pramod R. Ingle, Engineering drawing, Charotar Publications, 54th Edition,
2014
2. D. M. Kulkarni, A.P. Rastogi, Ashoke K. Sarkar, Engineering Graphics with Auto CAD, Prentice Hall
of India, 2nd Edition, 2010
Reference (s)
1. K. C. John, Engineering Graphics for Degree, PHI Publications, 2nd Edition, 2009
2. M. B. Shah and B. C. Rana, Engineering Drawing, Pearson Publishers, 2nd Edition, 2009
3. D. A. Jolhe, Engineering Drawing, Tata McGraw-Hill Education, 1st Edition, 2008
8
15
16HSX03 ENGLISH COMMUNICATION SKILLS II

3103
Course Outcomes
1. Build new academic vocabulary & phrases and make use of them in different contexts
2. Construct clear, grammatically correct sentences using a variety of sentence structures
3. Analyze and Produce various types & formats of emails, letters in formal & informal ways to meet
particular purposes
4. Compose and present ideas logically in written form
5. Organize ideas effectively in spoken form
6. Discuss social issues with concern and imagine possible solutions
COs – POs Mapping
COs PO10
1 3
2 3
3 3
4 3
5 3
6 3
Unit I
The Knowledge Society by A. P. J. Abdul Kalam
Forming Negative words, Quantifiers, Letter Writing, Interviews, Scientific Terminology
Famous Indian Scientist Inventions
11+4 Hours
Unit II
Principles of Good Writing by L. A. Hill
Word definitions, Articles, e-mail writing, Debates, Noticing changes in English, Origin and meaning of
borrowed words
Effective writing tips
11+4 Hours
Unit III
Man’s Peril by Bertrand Russell
Deriving nouns, Prepositions, Phrasal verbs, Speeches, Report Writing, Problem solving
Bertrand Russell and Einstein Manifesto
12+3 Hours
Unit IV
Shooting an Elephant by George Orwell
Using an appropriate word, conjunctions, voices, Cover letters, Resume, Dialogue writing, Group Discussion
Abridged version of Animal Farm
11+4 Hours
Total :45+15Hours
Textbook (s)
1. M. S. Rama Murty and M. Hariprasad, Prose for Communication Skills, Ravindra Publishing House,
Hyderabad, 2012
16
Reference (s)
1. J. Seely, Oxford Guide to Effective Writing and Speaking, OUP, 2013
2. Quirk, Greenbaum, Leech and Svartvik, A Comprehensive Grammar of the English language, Pearson, India,
2010Raymond Murphy, English Grammar in Use, 4th Ed, CUP, Cambridge, 2012
3. http://www.famousscientists.org/15-famous-indian-scientists-inventions/
4. http://www.grammarbook.com/grammar/effWrite.asp
5. https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Russell%E2%80%93Einstein_Manifesto)
6. http://cbhs.portlandschools.org/UserFiles/Servers/Server_1098483/File/Migration/Animal-Farm-
Abridged.pdf
Sample question (s)

Remember 25 25 -
Understand 25 25 -
Apply 50 50 40
Analyze 30
Evaluate -- - -
Create -- - 30
Total (%) 100 100 100
REMEMBER
1. Write one synonym for each of the following words.
a) Generate (b) Vivid
2. Write an antonym for each of the following words.
a) Unique (b) Interesting
3. Fill in the blanks with some or any in the following sentences.
a) There isn’t milk here.
b) She has books and pens.
UNDERSTAND
1. Read the following passage
There is no dearth of fake patriotism in the world to disguise one’s weakness of failure in
administration and planning. It rather becomes an instrument in the hands of dictators and selfish rulers to keep
their position safe. One can hear the slogans of patriotism on both the sides of the line of demarcation in the
Indian sub-continent. When there is dissatisfaction among the masses these slogans would be raised—‘danger is
lurking on the borders’, ‘the enemy is making preparation to attack our country’. This is not patriotism but
perverse thinking for selfish motives. Patriotism does not require a whip to rouse the sentiments of the people—
if it is true patriotism. The unity achieved during war may be a result of apprehension of slavery, not necessarily
true emotion generated by patriotism. It is in the blood of the people to mould their life according to the needs of
the motherland. It is not in the expediency to create circumstances befitting one’s own interests. It is rather
regrettable that patriotism is the greatest casualty in almost all the fields in our country. Political expediency and
self-motives have become supreme, to the extent that even to talk of patriotism is labeled as puerile of
reactionary. Let us take inspiration from the young girl who wept and cried bitterly for she could not offer
flowers on the war memorial in London, for none of her forefathers had laid his life for the cause of the nation.
Let us inculcate this noble spirit among people if we have to bring back the glory that was India.
Answer the following question.
a) Show the effect of fake patriotism?
b) When are the slogans of patriotism raised?
c) Is this type of patriotism real patriotism? Whom does it benefit?
d) Is the unity during war real patriotism? Does true patriotism require any instigation?
e) What does the author regret?
f) Explain the result of political expediency and selfish motives?
g) Why did the little girl cry bitterly? Do we learn anything from her?
h) Locate the synonym of the word ‘conceal’ from the passage.
i) Find the antonym of the word ‘cheerful’ from the passage.
j) Suggest a suitable title to the passage.
9
17
2. Read the following passage and answer the questions on it:

Many matters, however, are less easily brought to the test of experience. If, like most of mankind, you have
passionate convictions on many such matters, there are ways in which you can make yourself aware of your own
bias. If an opinion contrary to your own makes you angry, that is a sign that you are subconsciously aware of
having no good reason for thinking as you do. If someone maintains that two and two are five, you feel pity
rather than anger, unless you know so little of arithmetic that his opinion shakes your own conviction. The most
savage controversies are those about matters as to which there is no good evidence either way. Persecution is
used in theology, not in arithmetic because in arithmetic there is knowledge, but in theology there is only
opinion. So, whenever you find yourself getting angry about your difference of opinion, be on your guard; you
will probably find, on examination, that your belief is going beyond what the evidence warrants.
Answer the following questions

a) Do you consider the content of the passage, legal or logical? Ans: logical
b) Is the author of the passage finally telling you about changing your opinion? Ans: No giving info.
c) According to the passage when do we feel pity? Ans: When someone knowledge so poorer then
minimum standards.
d) What is the meaning of the word ‘savage’ as used in the passage? Ans: uncivilized / unfair
e) What is the general reaction to an opinion contrary to your own? Ans: we get angry at first.
f) ‘In arithmetic there is no scope for opinion’-explain.
APPLY
1. Develop an essay on the theme of “Digital India and its consequences” in about 200 words.
2. Write a letter to your friend who is exclusively occupied with his studies. Advise him to take part in
games
ANALYZE
1. Discuss the chief components of knowledge society with reference to India according to Dr. A. P. J.
Abdul Kalam.
2. Analyze L. A. Hill’s principles of good writing in achieving ‘vivid expression, simple and
conversational tone’ to make the writing interesting to the readers.
3. Explain how L.A. Hill’s principles of good writing are helpful to become a successful writer. (in about
250 words)
CREATE
1. Imagine yourself to be the instructor of a course in which 75 students have registered. Draft an email to
all your students asking them to prepare a presentation on the topic of their choice.
2. Build a model essay on impact of social media on youth.
18
16MAX02 Engineering Mathematics II

3103
Course Outcomes
1. Apply matrix knowledge to Engineering problems
2. Solve problems related to engineering applications using integral transform techniques
3. Make use of Laplace transforms in solving the differential equations with the initial and boundary
conditions
4. Apply the concept of Fourier series of periodic functions and expand a function in sine and cosine
series
5. Solve problems related to basic linear and non-linear partial differential equations
6. Formulate and solve some of the physical problems of engineering using partial differential equations
COs – POs Mapping
COs PO1
1 3
2 3
3 3
4 3
5 3
6 3
Unit I
Matices
Linear systems of equations: Rank-Echelon form, Normal form–Solution of Linear Systems–Rank Method and
Gauss Seidal Method
Eigen values–Eigen vectors–Properties–Cayley-Hamilton Theorem (without proof)–Inverse and powers of a
matrix by using Cayley-Hamilton theorem, Quadratic forms-Reduction of quadratic form to canonical form–
Rank–Positive, negative, semi definite–index–signature
LU Decomposition Method
11+4 Hours
Unit II
Laplace Transforms
Laplace transforms of standard functions–Shifting Theorems, Transforms of derivatives and integrals–Unit step function–
Dirac delta function
Inverse Laplace transforms by Partial fractions–Convolution theorem (without proof)-Application of Laplace
transforms to ordinary differential equations with constant coefficients
Laplace Transform of Periodic Functions 11
11+4 Hours
Unit III
Fourier Series and Transformations
Fourier series–even and odd functions–Half-range sine and cosine series, Fourier integral theorem (without
proof)–Fourier transforms–sine and cosine transforms–properties–inverse transforms–Finite Fourier transforms
Fourier Transformof Convolution Products
12+3 Hours
Unit IV
Partial Differential Equations and Applications
Formation of partial differential equations-by elimination of arbitrary constants and arbitrary functions–
solutions of first order linear (Lagrange) equations and nonlinear equations (standard types)–Method of
Separation of Variables-Applications to wave equation, heat conduction equation in one dimension and
homogeneous Laplace equation in Cartesian coordinates in two dimensions
Charpits Method 11+4 Hours
Total:45+15 Hours
19
Textbook (s)
1. B. S. Grewal, Higher Engineering Mathematics, 42 nd Ed., Khanna Publishers, New Delhi, 2012
2. S. R. K. Iyengar, R. K. Jain, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, 4th Ed., Narosa Publishing House,
New Delhi, 2014
3. B. V. Ramana, Engineering Mathematics, 4th Ed., Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 2009
Reference (s)
1. T. K. V. Iyengar, B. Krishna Ghandhi, S. Ranganathan and M. V. S. S. N. Prasad, Engineering
Mathematics, 12th Ed.,Volume–I, S. Chand Publishers, 2014
2. U. M. Swamy, P. Vijaya Laxmi, K. L. Sai Prasad and M. Phani Krishna Kishore, A Text Book of
Engineering Mathematics–II, Excel Books, New Delhi, 2010
3. D. S. Chandrashekharaiah, Engineering Mathematics, Vol–1, Prism Publishers, 2010
4. Erwin Kreyszig, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, 9 th Ed., Wiley, 2012
SAMPLE QUESTION (S)

Remember 30 30 -
Understand 40 40 -
Apply 30 30 60
Analyze - - -
Evaluate -- -- 30
Create -- -- 10
Total (%) 100 100 100
REMEMBER
1. Define rank of the matrix
2. Define unit step function
3. Write the Fourier sine transform of 𝑓(x)
UNDERSTAND
1. If 𝑓(x) = x𝑛, 𝑛 ∈ ℕ in the interval[−𝜋, 𝜋], then for what values of 𝑛 the Fourier series of 𝑓(x)
contains only sine terms
2. Form the partial differential equation by eliminating arbitrary constantsa, b from
z  (x2  a)( y 2  b)
3. Evaluate L 2t 
APPLY
1.
Use Laplace transform technique to solve the differential equation y''  2y'  3y  sin t if
y(0)  0, y '(0)  0.
2.
Using Convolution theorem, find 𝐿−1[ 𝑠 ]
(2𝑠2+2𝑎 )
3.
A tightly stretched string with fixed end points x  0 and x  l is initially in a position given by
3 x
y  y0 Sin . If it is released from rest from this position, find the displacement y(x,t)
l
CREATE
1. Compare the direct and iterative methods in solving system of equations.
2. Identifying the method to solve sparse systems.
3. What is the advantage of Fourier series over the Taylor’s series in some real time problems?
10
20
16CYX01 ENGINEERING CHEMISTRY

3103
Course Outcomes
1. Outline the fundamental chemistry with an applied perspective as future engineers with a focus on
engineering and industry
2. Analyze the quality of water and its treatment methods for domestic and industrial applications
3. Utilize the polymers, plastics, elastomers and advanced materials (Nano materials) as engineering
materials and apply them in domestic and industrial life
4. Infer the concepts of renewable & non-renewable energy sources, quality of fuels and apply a suitable
fuel as an energy source
5. Outline the corrosion factors and implement the prevention measures
6. Interpret the Nernst equation for electrode potentials and construction and working of various types of
energy storage devices
COs – POs Mapping
COs PO1
1 3
2 3
3 3
4 3
5 3
6 3
Unit I
Water Technology & Advanced Materials
Water technology: sources of water–hardness of water–disadvantages of hard water–boiler troubles–internal
treatment methods, softening methods–lime soda, zeolite, ion exchange and reverse osmosis -specifications for
drinking water–BIS & WHO standards–municipal water treatment–analysis of water for hardness, chloride &
fluoride, numerical problems
Advanced materials–Nanomaterials–Introduction–Preparation by chemical methods–Characterization–SEM–
Applications in industry–solar, water purification and battery technology
Preparation of some important membranes for reverse osmosis process
12+3 Hours
Unit II
Polymers & Composites
Polymers: Introduction–Advantages of polymers over Metals and Alloys; Types of polymers–Types of
polymerization–Physical properties: viscosity, polydispersity, molecular weight distribution etc., and
mechanical properties–Plastics: Thermosetting & thermoplastics–Compounding of plastics–Moulding methods
(Compression, Injection, Transfer, Extrusion)–Preparation, Properties and Engineering applications of important
industrial polymers–Poly Ethylene, Poly Styrene, PVC, PTFE, Bakelite–Molecular Imprinting Polymers (MIP)
–Conducting Polymers–Biodegradable polymers-Fiber reinforced plastics-Glass fiber reinforced plastic–Bullet
Proof Plastics–Rubbers: processing of natural rubber–Vulcanization and compounding of rubber–Engineering
applications of rubber
Inorganic rubbers-silicone rubbers
11+4 Hours
Unit III
Fuels & Energy Resources
Fuels–Introduction-Calorific value–determination of calorific value–Bomb calorimeter and Junker’s
calorimeters-Classification of fuels–characteristics of a good fuel–classification and analysis of coal-Extraction
of Crude Oils–refining of crude oil–Cracking-Thermal and Catalytic cracking–Synthetic petrol–Polymerization,
Fischer Tropsch and Bergius processes–Knocking–Anti Knocking–Octane &Cetanenumber–ASTM standards of
fuels–Energy Resources: Energy scenario in India–working of thermal power plants–advantages and
21
disadvantages–non Renewable energy–solar energy–harnessing of solar energy–solar heaters–photo voltaic

cells–bio energy–biodiesel
Rocket fuels
11+4 Hours
Unit IV
Corrosion & Energy Systems
Introduction–process of corrosion–Dry corrosion–Wet corrosion–galvanic corrosion–concentration cell
corrosion–water line corrosion–pitting corrosion–stress corrosion–Factors influencing corrosion–Control of
corrosion–Proper designing–passivity–using alloys–modifying the environment–using corrosion inhibitors:
Inorganic and Organic inhibitors-Cathodic protection–Metallic coatings–galvanization and tinning-Industrial
examples of high corrosion
Electrochemical energy systems:Introduction–Electrode potential–Nernst equation–EMF of cell–Storage
devices–Batteries: primary cell–dry cell; secondary cells–Lead acid battery, Lithium ion battery, flow batteries–
H2–O2 fuel cell and Photo galvanic cell
Organic coatings
11+4 Hours
Total:45+15 Hours
Textbook (s)
1. P. C. Jain and Monica Jain, Engineering Chemistry, 16th Ed., Dhanpat Rai Publishing Company, New
Delhi, 2015
2. S. S. Dara, A Textbook of Engineering Chemistry, S. Chand and Company Limited, New Delhi, 1994
3. C. N. R. Rao, A. Muller and A. K. Cheetham, Nanomaterials Chemistry: Recent Developments and
New Directions, 2010
Reference (s)
1. S. Chawla, A Textbook of Engineering Chemistry, 3 rd Ed., Dhanpat Rai& Co (Pvt) Ltd, New Delhi,
2012
2. P. Murthy, C. V. Agarwal, A. Naidu, Textbook of Engineering Chemistry, B. S. Publications,
Hyderabad, 2006
3. T. Pradeep, Textbook of Nanoscience and Nanotechnology, McGraw Hill Education,India,
Pvt.Limited, 2013
Sample question (s)

Remember 30 30 -
Understand 40 40 -
Apply 30 30 80
Analyze - - 20
Evaluate -- - -
Create -- - -
Total (%) 100 100 100
REMEMBER
1. Define hardness. Which salts are responsible for different types of hard nesses?
2. Differentiate between polymer and plastic? List out the differences between thermoplastics and
thermosetting plastics?
3. Define calorific value, HCV and LCV
UNDERSTAND
1. What is meant by desalination? Explain the procedure for softening of water by Reverse osmosis
process?
2. What is compounding of plastics? Explain the role of Fillers and Stabilizers with examples
in compounding of plastics?
3. How a photo-voltaic cell constructed and what is is the working mechanism of it?
11
22
APPLY
1. Water contains the constituents like CO2 , HCO 3- , Mg(HCO 3) 2 , H+, CaSO 4 , NaCl and Na2SO4 and
this water is subjected to Lime and Soda softening, which type of chemical reactions are involved
between these constituents with Lime and Soda?
2. Which moulding technique is involved in making a plastic ball in toys industry? Explain the process in
detail with neat sketch?
3. By which methods, the underground pipelines are protected from corrosion? Explain the involved
mechanisms?
ANALYZE
1. The Boiler fed water contains the following compositions: CaSO4, CaCl2, MgCl2, SiO2 &
Na2CO3.Suggest the suitable methods and involved principle to prevent the formation of scale and
sludge by these constituents?
2. When a metal X (of reduction potential = 0.337V at 250C) is connected to another
metal Y (of reduction potential = -0.140V at 250C) and this structure is exposed
continuously to sea water, which type of corrosion would take place? Explain with
suitable mechanism.
3. Which type of corrosion is involved in the following jointed pipeline and why? Explain the involved
mechanism in detail
Iron pipe Copper pipe
Sea water inlet Sea water outlet
23
16EEX01 BASIC ELECTRICAL ENGINEERING

3103
Course Outcomes
1. Demonstrate the basic principles of electrical components
2. Outline electric circuits using network laws and reduction techniques
3. Illustrate the behavior of basic circuit elements for an AC excitation
4. Relate the laws of electro-magnetism and select a machine for practical applications
5. Outline the working principle and construction of the measuring instruments
6. Choose appropriate safety measures and wiring schemes
COs – POs Mapping
COs PO1
1 3
2 3
3 2
4 3
5 3
6 2
Unit I
Basic Electrical Components
Definition of charge, electric potential, electric field, voltage, current, power and energy, Ohm’s law, Faraday’s
Law of Electromagnetic Induction, Classification of network elements, Basic circuit elements–R, L and C,
Types of energy sources-Dependent and independent sources, Kirchhoff’s laws, Resistive, inductive and
capacitive networks–series, parallel circuits, Self Inductance, mutual inductance, Types of induced emfs, Dot
Convention, Coefficient of coupling
Types of resistors–inductors and capacitors
11+4 Hours
Unit II
Fundamentals of Electrical Circuits
DC Circuits:Voltage and current division rule, Source transformation, mesh and nodal analysis, Star-delta
transformation. AC Circuits:Generation of alternating current, periodic waveforms and basic definitions, RMS
and average values of periodic and non-periodic waveforms, form factor and peak factor, AC through pure R
and L, Phasor representation, J-operator, Power in ac circuits
AC through pure capacitor
12+4 Hours
Unit III
Electrical Machines & Measuring Instruments
Electrical Machines:Principle of operation, Construction and Applications-DC Machines, 1-phase Transformers,
1-Phase Induction Motors, Stepper motors. Measuring Instruments: Classification of Measuring Instruments,
Construction and basic working principle of Voltmeter, Ammeter, Wattmeter
Working principle of Energy meter
12+4 Hours
Unit IV
Electrical Safety, Wiring and Introduction to Power System
Indian electricity safety rules, Electric shock- effects, protective measures and first aid, Earthling-Basic
principles and types.Electrical wiring-wiring accessories, staircase, tube light.Single line diagram of power
system
Design of corridor wiring 10+3Hours
Total:45+15 Hours
24
Textbook (s)
1. D. P. Kothari and I. J. Nagrath, Theory and Problems of Basic Electrical Engineering, 4 th Ed., PHI
Learning Private limited, 2013
2. S. Ghosh, Fundamentals of Electrical & Electronics Engineering, 2nd Ed., PHI, 2010
3. V. K. Mehta and Rohit Mehta, Basic Electrical Engineering, S Chand and company Ltd, New Delhi,
India, Revised Edition, 2012
Reference (s)
1. K. Alice Mary, P.Ramana and Preethi Thekkath , Basics of Electrical Engineering, 1st Ed., S. Chand &
Company Ltd, 2016
2. J. B. Gupta, Basic Electrical and Electronics Engineering, 3rd Ed., S. K. Kataria & Sons, 2009
3. B. L. Theraja, Fundamentals of Electrical Engineering and Electronics, 5 th Ed., S. Chand & Company
Ltd, 2013
SAMPLE QUESTION (S)

Remember 40 40 -
Understand 60 60 -
Apply - - 50
Analyze - - 50
Evaluate - - -
Create - - -
Total (%) 100 100 100
REMEMBER
1. State Faradays laws of Electro-magnetic Induction.
2. Define
i. Charge ii. Power
iii. Energy iv. Potential
3. State any five Indian electricity safety rules
4. Define coefficient of coupling
UNDERSTAND
1. Explain the principle of operation of transformer.
2. Describe the working of DC generator.
3. Explain the construction and working of Wattmeter.
4. Illustrate the emf equation of a transformer
12
25
16CHX01 ENVIRONMENTAL STUDIES

3103
Course Outcomes
1. Translate the learner’s attitude to think globally and act locally
2. Motivate environmental organizaions to create a concern about our present state of Environment.
3. Find solutions for conservation of natural resources
4. Identify the benefits of ecosystem conservation, biodiversity protection, implement pollution
prevention and control measures
5. Illustrate social issues of environmental protection and adopt sustainable developmental practices
6. Perceives the basic structure of environmental policy and law pertaining to specific environmental
issues (water quality, air quality, biodiversity protection, Forest, etc.)
COs – POs Mapping
COs PO1 PO7
1 1 3
2 1 3
3 3 3
4 2 3
5 2 3
6 3 3
Unit I
Multidisciplinary Nature of Environmental Studies & Natural Resources
Definition, Scope and Importance, Multidisciplinary nature of Environmental Studies, Value of Nature-
Productive, Aesthetic/Recreation, Option, Need for Public Awareness, Institutions (BNHS, BVIEER, ZSI, BSI)
and People in Environment (MedhaPatkar, Sundarlal Bahuguna, Indira Gandhi, Rachael Carson)
Natural Resources: Renewable and Non–renewable resources–Importance, uses, overexploitation/threats, and
conservation of (i) forest (ii) water (iii) mineral (iv) food and (v) energy resources, role of an individual in
conservation of natural resources
Biotic and abiotic components–Case studies of forest-water-mineral-food-energy resources
12+4 Hours
Unit II
Ecosystem & Biodiversity
Ecosystems: Concept of an ecosystem, Structure and function of an ecosystem, Biogeological cycles (Energy
flow, Carbon and Nitrogen Cycles), Ecological succession, Food chains, food webs and ecological pyramids,
Introduction, types, characteristic features, structures and functions of the following ecosystems: a. Forest
Ecosystem b. Aquatic Ecosystem Biodiversity and its Conservation: Definition and levels of biodiversity, Bio–
geographical classification of India, hot spots of biodiversity–India as a mega diversity nation, Threats to
biodiversity, Endangered and endemic species of India, Conservation of biodiversity: In–situ and Ex–situ
conservation
Phosphorus cycle–Desert ecosystems–Grassland ecosystem–Case studies on conservation of biodiversity
12+4 Hours
Unit III
Environmental Pollution & Social Issues
Environmental Pollution: Definition, Cause, effects, control measures and case studies of: Air pollution b. Water
pollution c. Soil pollution Solid waste Management: Causes, effects and control measures of urban and
industrial wastes. Disaster management (floods and cyclones) Social Issues and the Environment: Sustainability,
Urban problems related to energy, Water conservation and watershed management, Resettlement and
rehabilitation of people; Environmental ethics: Issues and possible solutions, global warming, ozone layer
depletion, Consumerism and waste products
Noise pollution–Case studies on pollution–Wasteland reclamation 11+4 Hours
26
Unit IV
Human Population and the Environmental Acts
Human Population and the Environment: Population growth, Affluence, Technology and Environmental Impact
(Master Equation), Population explosion and Family Welfare Programme, Value Education, HIV/AIDS,
Women and Child Welfare, Role of information Technology in Environment and human health, Environment
Protection Acts: Air (Prevention and Control of Pollution) Act, Water (Prevention and control of Pollution) Act,
Wildlife Protection Act and Forest Conservation Act. Issues involved in enforcement of environmental
legislation
Human Rights–The environment (Protection) Act, 1986
10+3 Hours
Total:45+15 Hours
Textbook (s)
1. E. Bharucha, Textbook of Environmental Studies, 1 st Ed., University Press (India) Pvt. Ltd., 2005
Reference (s)
1. W. P. Cunningham, M. A. Cunningham, Principles of Environmental Science, 6 th Ed., Tata McGraw
Hill, 2008
2. A. Kaushik, C. P. Kaushik, Perspectives in Environmental Studies, 4th Ed., New Age International
Publishers, 2008
3. H. S. Peavy, D. R. Rowe, G. Tchobanoglous, Environmental Engineering, 1st Ed., McGrawHill, 1984
4. T. E. Graedel, B. R. Allenby, Industrial Ecology and Sustainable Engineering, 1st Ed., Pearson
Publications, 2009
Sample question (s)

Remember 40 35 15
Understand 45 50 50
Apply 15 15 35
Analyze -- -- --
Evaluate -- -- --
Create -- -- --
Total (%) 100 100 100
REMEMBER
1. List important natural resources & important institutions related to the environment.
2. Recall a simple food chain.
3. List important acts in environment.
UNDERSTAND
1. Money deposited in a bank- identify under which environment value.
2. Summarize the methods for creating public awareness regarding environment.
3. Explain the consequences of over utilization of water resources.
APPLY
1. Select the economic method of conservation of biodiversity and describe it.
2. Predict the effects and control methods of water pollution.
3. Find the urban problems related to energy and suggest suitable alternatives.
4. Assess why women and children need special care and what are all the supports that our Government is
extending to them?
13Assignment test should contain only questions related to Higher Order Thinking (HOT) Skills pertaining to this course
27
16HSX02 ENGLISH COMMUNICATION SKILLS LAB

0032
Course Outcomes
1. Develop the pronunciation ability by using their gained knowledge of the English sound system
2. Improve the articulation of sounds and pronunciation of words for intelligible English
3. Recognize the use of language in conversational style with focus on communication in English
4. Organize ideas effectively in spoken form
5. Discuss social issues with concern and imagine possible solutions
6. Develop the pronunciation abilityby using their gained knowledge of the English sound system
COs – POs Mapping
COs P010
1 3
2 3
3 3
4 3
5 3
6 3
List of Experiments
Module 1–Sounds of English-Consonants

Module 2–Interaction-1: Greeting and taking leave, introducing oneself to others.
Module 3–Sounds of English-Vowels
Module 4–Interaction-2: Making request and response to them ask for and give/refuse permission, Ask for and
give directions, thank and respond
Module 5–Some rules of Pronunciation
Module 6–Interaction-3: Invite, accept, and declining invitations, Make complaints and respond to them,
Express sympathy
Module 7–Word Stress and Sentence stress
Module 8–Interaction-4: Apologize and respond, advise and suggest, Telephone Skills
Module 9–Presentation Skills: Oral and PPT Presentations
Module 10 Group Discussion
Extra Module
Module 11–Debate

1. Common Errors in English
2. Listening Skills
3. Speaking Skills
4. Writing Skills
5. Presentation Skills–observations
6. Reading Skills
7. Public Speaking
8. Interview Skills
9. Office Communication
10. Telephone Skills
11. Report Writing
12. Vocabulary
13. Body Language
14. Resume Writing
15. Functional English
14
28

1. K. Nirupa Rani, Jayashree Mohanraj and B. Indira, Strengthen Your Steps-Maruthi publications, 2012
2. K. Nirupa Rani, Jayashree Mohan Raj, B. Indira, (Ed) Speak Well (C.D) Orient Black Swan Pvt Ltd,
Hyderabad, 2012
3. D. Jones, English Pronouncing Dictionary (Software)CUP, Ver.1.0, 2003
4. J. Sethi, S. Kamlesh, D. V. Jindal. A Practical Course in English Pronunciation, Prentice-hall of India,
New Delhi, 2007
5. T. Balasubramanian, A Textbook of English Phonetics for Indian students, McMillan, 1981
6. K. Mohan and M. Raman, Effective English Communication, 1 st Ed., Tata McGraHills, 2000
7. R. K. Bansal and J. B. Harrison, Spoken English, 3 rd Ed., Orient Black Swan, Hyderabad, 1983
29
16CYX02 ENGINEERING CHEMISTRY LAB

0032
Course Outcomes
1. Utilize different Analytical tools and develop the necessary skills in executing experiments involving
estimation of metals in alloys, raw materials, finished products and environmental samples etc.
2. Utilize modern instruments like flame photometer, ion analyzer, UV Vis spectrophotometer, Atomic
Absorption Spectrophotometer for characterization of materials used in industry & environmental
monitoring
3. Determine the amount of hardness, chloride, fluoride, nitrite, DO of water for its quality and know its
utility in domestic and industry
4. Summarize the characteristics of lubricants and able to choose/modify lubricants according to purpose
5. Compose some cross-linked polymers like Bakelite, Nylon etc.
6. Identify the adulteration of food items such as milk, honey, tea, coffee & fertility of soil to increase
crop production
COs – POs Mapping
COs PO4
CO1 3
CO2 3
CO3 3
CO4 3
CO5 3
CO6 3
List of Experiments
Introduction to Quantitative Analysis
1. Assessment of Quality of water
i) Hardness ii) Chloride iii) Fluoride iv) Dissolved Oxygen v) Nitrite
2. Testing quality of lubricants
i) Viscosity Index ii) Flash & Fire point iii) Acid Number
3. Quality Analysis of engineering materials
i) Cement ii) Al/Cu wire iii) Steel
4. Preparation of Engineering and Nano materials
i) Bakelite ii) Nylon iii) Silver nano particles
5. Estimation of Purity of Iron in Ingot
6. Analysis of fertility of soil
i) Sodium & Potassium ii) Micro Nutrients
7. Determination of acid strength (for a citrus fruit) by Conductometr
8. Detection of adulteration of Food in Honey/ Milk/ Tea
9. Estimation of heavy metals in fast food items by AAS.
10. Testing of corrosion of metal
Note: Student should perform minimum of 12 experiments at least one form each head.

1. Assessment of ground water quality of your village/Mandal
2. Preparation of desired Viscosity Index lubricating oil
3. Studies on the effect of various factors on corrosion
30

1. K. Gouru Naidu, Engineering Chemistry Lab Manual, 1 st Ed., 2014
2. G. Svehla, Vogel’s Qualitative Inorganic Analysis, 7th Ed., Pearson Education, New Delhi, 2003
3. Standard methods for the examination of water and waste waters, American Public Health Association,
21st Ed., EPA, Washington, 2005
4. Metcalf and Eddy, Waste Water Engineering Treatment and Reuse, 4 th Ed., Tata McGraw Hill, New
Delhi, 2003
5. D. Srinivasulu, Engineering Chemistry laboratory manual & Record, Parshva publications, 2010
15
31
16MEX03 ENGINEERING WORKSHOP

0032
Course Outcomes
1. Utilize basic carpentry tools for the preparation of wooden joints
2. Make use of basic hand tools for the preparation of mild steel joints
3. Build simple house hold items with GI sheet using tin smithy tools
4. Make use of house wiring accessories to build simple electrical circuits
5. Build simple components with hand tools for making experimental setups
6. Build simple components with hand tools as per the drawing specifications
COs - POs Mapping

COs PO4
1 3
2 3
3 3
4 3
5 3
6 3
List of experiments
Trades
Carpentry : 1. Cross Lap joint
2. T-Lap joint
3. Dovetail Joint
4. Mortise and Tennon Joint
Fitting : 1. Square Fit
2. V- Fit
3. Half Round Fit
4. Dovetail Fit
Tin Smithy : 1. Square Box without lid
2. Taper Tray
3. Open Scoop
4. Funnel
House Wiring : 1. Parallel/Series Connection of three bulbs
2. Florescent Lamp Wiring
3. Stair Case Wiring
4. Godown Wiring
Total: 45 Hours
1. Prepare Tee–bridle joint
2. Prepare Corner dovetail joint
3. Make Corner bridge joint
4. Make Dovetail lap joint
5. Prepare 900 round elbow pipe
6. Prepare Ellipse using GI sheet
7. Make cylindrical pipe
8. Make Round T-pipe
9. Prepare hexagonal fitting
10. Prepare diagonal dovetail fitting
11. Prepare universal fitting
12. Make square fitting
16
32
13. Set the general house wring

14. Set the dim & bright lighting
15. Set the test lamping

1. Engineering workshop Lab manual, Department of Mechanical Engineering, GMRIT Rajam
33
16MA303 ENGINEERING MATHEMATICS III

3024
Course Outcomes
1. Utilize numerical techniques to find approximate solutions of non-linear Algebraic equations
2. Understand the concepts of interpolation, extrapolation to estimate the unknown
functional values
3. Make use of method of least squares to fit a best curve for the given data
4. Find approximate values of derivatives and finite integrals using numerical techniques
5. Understand basic probability axioms and apply Baye’s theorem related to engineering problems
6. Identify the suitable distribution among Binomial, Poisson, normal to compute probabilities
COs–POs Mapping
COs PO1 PO12
1 3 1
2 3 1
3 2 1
4 2 1
5 3 1
6 3 1
Unit I
Solution of Algebraic and Transcendental Equations
Introduction , Bisection Method , Method of False Position, Newton-Raphson Method.
Curve fitting: Fitting a straight line , Second degree curve, exponential curve, power curve by method of least
squares.
Geometrical interpretation of Bisection Method, Method of False Position, Newton-Raphson Method.
Practical components
1. The Bisection method

2. Newton-Raphson Method
3. Linear Regression (Fitting of a straight line)
11 + 10 Hours
Unit II
Interpolation, Numerical Integration and Numerical solution of Ordinary differential equations
Introduction- Finite differences- Newton’s- forward Differences- Backward differences, Symbolic relations.
Numerical Integration: Trapezoidal rule, Simpson’s 1/3 Rule.
Numerical Solution of Ordinary Differential equations: Solution by Taylor’s series. Euler’s, Modified Euler’s
Method, Runge-Kutta Method
Predictor-Corrector Method-Milne’s Method.
1. Trapezoidal rule
2. Simpson’s 1/3 Rule
3. Solution of Initial Value Problem using Taylor’s series method
4. Solution of Initial Value Problem using Runge-Kutta Method of order four
12 + 10 Hours
Unit III
Probability and Random variable
Probability, The axioms of probability, Conditional probability, Baye’s theorem.
Random variables, Discrete and continuous Distributions and properties, Mathematical expectation, MGFs.
Addition, Multiplication theorems of probability.
1. Baye’s Rule
11 + 4 Hours
34
Unit IV
Probability Distributions, Correlation and Regression
Binomial, Poisson and Normal distribution – related properties.
Correlation, Pearson’s correlation coefficient and Spearman’s Rank correlation coefficient, linear Regression
(construction of Regression lines)
Correlation of grouped data, curvilinear regression.
1. Normal Distribution
2. Correlation related problems
11 + 6 Hours
Total: 45+30 Hours
Textbook (s)
1. B. S. Grewal, Higher Engineering Mathematics, 42 nd ed., Khanna Publishers, New Delhi, 2012
2. B.V.Ramana, Engineering Mathematics, 4th ed., Tata Mc Graw Hill, 2009
3. Engineering Mathematics-III lab manual-Mathematics Department(BS&H)-GMRIT, Rajam
4. Steven C.Chapra, Applied Numerical Methods with MATLAB,3 rd ed., McGH Publications,2012
Reference (s)
1. T.K.V Iyengar, S.Ranganatham, B.Krishna Gandhi, Mathematical Methods, 2nd ed., S.Chand Co.,
New Delhi, 2006
2. T.K.V Iyengar, K.B. Gandhi, Probability and Statistics, S.Chand Co., New Delhi, 2012
3. Ervin Kreyszig, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, 9 th ed., Wiley India Pvt. Ltd., 2012
4. S.S.Sastry, Introductory methods of Numerical Analysis, 4 th ed, Prentice Hall of India Pvt. Ltd., 2006
5. Wan Y.Yang, Wenwu Cao, Tae-Chang Chung and John Morris, Applied Numerical Methods using
MATLAB,2nd ed., Wiley Publ;ications,2005
SAMPLE QUESTION (S)

Assessment Pattern
Cognitive Level Int. Test 1 (%) Int. Test 2 (%) Lab Assessment1 (%)
Remember 25 25 --
Understand 45 45 --
Apply 30 30 100
Analyze -- -- --
Evaluate -- -- --
Create -- -- --
Total (%) 100 100 100
REMEMBER
1. List out the different methods to solve Algebraic and Transcendental Equations
2. List out the different methods for interpolation
3. Define axioms of probability
4. Write the importance of Normal distribution
5. Define Moment Generating function
UNDERSTAND
1. Explain the procedure involved in Newton’s forward and backward interpolation formulas to
interpolate the data.
2. Describe mathematical principle involved in Trapezoidal rule and Simpson’s 1/3 Rule.
3. Illustrate the difference between discrete and continuous distributions.
4. Compare Binomial, Poisson, Normal distributions
35
APPLY
1. Apply Newton’s iterative method find the real root of the equation 3x = cosx + 1
2. A solid of revolution is formed by rotating about the x-axis, the area between the x-axis, the lines x = 0
and x = 1 and a curve through the points with the following co-ordinates
x 0.00 0.25 0.5 0.75 1
y 1.0 0.9896 0.9589 0.9589 0.8415
Estimate the volume of the solid formed using Simson’s rule
3. If three cars are drawn from a lot of 6 cars containing 2 defective cars, find (i) the probability
distribution of the number of defective cars, (ii) the expected number of defective cars
4. Two machines A,B produces 60% and 40% of items from the total output. 6% and 8% are the defective
items produced by machines A and B respectively. An item is chosen from the total output and found
to be defective. Find the probability that the defective item is produced by machine A.
5. Write a MATLAB program for method of false position.
6. Write a MATLAB program for fitting a second degree curve.
1
Lab Assessment will be done based on day to day performance and internalexamination
36
16CE302 SURVEYING
Course Outcomes 3103
1. Explain the difference between planar and geodetic surveying
2. Infer various tools and methodologies in obtaining desirable results
3. Plan and organize a survey with least possible probable errors
4. Measure levels and draw contours
5. Assess areas of irregular boundaries, volumes of borrow pits, embankments and capacity of reservoirs
6. Make use of equipment viz., Compass, Level, Theodolite, Tacheometer and Total station that are used
in the construction industry
COs–POs Mapping
COs PO1 PO12

1 3 1
2 3 1
3 3 2
4 3 2
5 3 2
6 3 3
Unit I
Introduction, Distances and Direction
Overview of plane surveying (chain, compass and plane table), Objectives, Principles and classifications
Distance measurement conventions and methods; use of chain and tape, Electronic distance measurements,
Meridians, Azimuths and Bearings, declination, computation of angle
Corrections for Tape
10 + 3 Hours
Unit II
Leveling and Contouring, Computation of Areas and Volumes
Concept and Terminology, Temporary and permanent adjustments - method of leveling. Characteristics and
Uses of contours- methods of conducting contour surveys and their plotting
Computation of areas and volumes: Area from field notes, computation of areas along irregular boundaries and
area consisting of regular boundaries. Embankments and cutting for a level section and two level sections with
and without transverse slopes, determination of the capacity of reservoir, volume of barrow pits
Reciprocal Levelling
15 + 5 Hours
Unit III
Theodolite and Tacheometric Surveying
Theodolite- description, uses and adjustments – temporary and permanent, measurement of horizontal and
vertical angles. Principles of Electronic Theodolite, Trigonometric leveling, traversing
Tacheometric surveying: Stadia and tangential methods of Tachometry. Distance and Elevation formulae for
Staff vertical position
Distance and Elevation Formulae in Tacheometry When Staff is in Inclined Position
9 + 3 Hours
Unit IV
Curves and Advanced Surveying
Basic definitions, Types of curves, elements, setting out – simple and compound curves
Advanced surveying: Introduction to Geodetic surveying, Triangulation, signals & towers, satellite stations.
Survey operations using Total Station instrument and Global positioning system. Introduction to Geographic
information system (GIS)
Reverse Curve
11 + 4 Hours
Total: 45 + 15 Hours
Textbook(S)
1. B.C.Punmia, Ashok Kumar Jain and Arun Kumar Jain, Surveying (Vol–1), 18th Ed., Laxmi Publications
(P) Ltd., New Delhi, 2011
37
Reference (s)
1. Arthur R Benton and Philip J Taety, Elements of Plane Surveying, 8 th Ed., McGraw Hill, 2000
2. Chandra A M, Higher Surveying, 3rd Ed., New age International Pvt. Ltd., Publishers, New Delhi, 2015
3. Dr. K. R. Arora, Surveying (Vol-1), 11th Ed, Rajsons Publications Pvt. Ltd., 2010
Sample Question (S)

Remember 15 10 --
Understand 25 25 --
Apply 35 40 50
Analyze 10 10 30
Evaluate 10 10 10
Create 5 5 10
Total (%) 100 100 100
Remember
1. Define Surveying
2. List out all the fundamental lines of theodolite
3. Write an expression to calculate horizontal and vertical distances in tacheometry when the line of sight
is inclined
Understand
1. Explain the different classifications of surveying

2. Describe the principle involved in surveying
3. Compare the advantages and disadvantages of plane table surveying with those of chain surveying
Apply
1. Demonstrate how do you measure the horizontal angle by using the repetition method
2. The following are the bearings taken on a closed compass traverse. Compute the interior angles and
correct the for observational errors
Line Fore Bearing

AB 80o10’
BC 120o20’
CD 170o50’
DE 230o10’
EA 310o20’
Analyze
1. Compare and Contrast between prismatic compass and surveyors compass

2. Differentiate between plane and geodetic surveying
Evaluate
1. The chainage of the intersection point of two straights is 1060 m, and the angle of intersection is 120°.
If radius of a circular curve to be set out is 570 m, and peg interval is 30 m, determine the tangent
length, the length of the curve, the chainage at the beginning and end of the curve, the length of the
long chord, the lengths of the sub-chords, and the total number of chords.
Create
1. Derive an expression to calculate the horizontal and vertical distance using tacheometry when the staff
in vertical.
2
Assignment Test should contain only questions related to Higher Order Thinking (HOT) Skills
38
16CE303 STRENGTH OF MATERIALS I

3103
Course Outcomes
1. Contrast between normal, shear stresses and various elastic constants
2. Examine the variation of bending moment and shear force at every cross section of a beam under all
practical loading cases
3. Examine the variation of flexural /shear stresses for various cross sections of a beam along its depth,
under all practical loading cases
4. Select the diameter of the shaft subjected to pure torque
5. Analyse the perfect frames for their internal forces
6. Decide suitable method for calculating deflections in simply supported and cantilever beams
COs–POs Mapping
COs PO1 PO12
1 3 1
2 3 2
3 3 1
4 3 1
5 3 2
6 2 2
Unit I
Simple Stresses and Strains - Strain Energy
Elasticity and plasticity – Types of stresses and strains – Hooke’s law – stress – strain diagram for mild steel –
Working stress – Factor of safety – Lateral strain, Poisson’s ratio and volumetric strain – Elastic moduli and the
relationship between them – Bars of varying section – composite bars – Temperature stresses.
Resilience – Gradual, sudden, impact and shock loadings – simple applications
Strain energy applications
11 + 4 Hours
Unit II
Shear Force and Bending Moment – Flexural Stresses
Definition of beam – Types of beams – Concept of shear force and bending moment – S.F and B.M diagrams
for cantilver, simply supported and overhanging beams subjected to point loads, u.d.l., uniformly varying loads
and combination of these loads – Point of contraflexure – Relation between S.F., B.M and rate of loading at a
section of a beam
Theory of simple bending – Assumptions – Derivation of bending equation: M/I = f/y = E/R .Neutral axis –
Determination bending stresses – section modulus of rectangular and circular sections (Solid and Hollow),
I,T,Angle and Channel sections – Design of simple beam sections
Flexural stress in T and Channel section
12 + 4 Hours
Unit III
Shear Stresses –Torsion of Circular Shaft
Derivation of formula – Shear stress distribution across various beam sections like rectangular, circular,
triangular, I, T angle sections
Theory of pure torsion – Derivation of Torsion equations : T/J = /r = C/L – Assumptions made in the theory
of pure torsion – Torsional moment of resistance – Polar section modulus – Power transmitted by shafts –
Combined bending and torsion and end thrust
Shear stress in triangular and angle sections
11 + 4 Hours
Unit IV
Analysis of Pin-Jointed Plane Frames - Deflection of Beams
Determination of Forces in members of plane, pin-jointed by method of joints and method of sections. Analysis
of various types of cantilever and simply supported trusses by method of joints, method of sections for general
loading; Bending into a circular arc – slope, deflection and radius of curvature – Differential equation for the
elastic line of a beam – Double integration and Macaulay’s methods – Determination of slope and deflection for
cantilever and simply supported beams subjected to point loads, - U.D.L. Uniformly varying load.-Mohr’s
theorems – Moment area method – application to simple cases including overhanging beams
Conjugate Beam Method
11 + 3 Hours
39
Textbook (s)
1. R. Subramanian, Strength of Materials, 2nd Ed., Oxford University Press, New Delhi,2010
2. Ferdinand P Beer, E. Russell, Johnston, Jr, John T dewolf, Mechanics of Materials, 6 th Ed., Tata
McGraw-Hill Publications, 2012
3. Schaum’s Outline Series, Strength of Materials, 5th Ed, McGraw-Hill Professional Publication, 2011
Reference (s)
1. R.K.Rajput, Strength of Materials, 4th Ed, S.Chand & Co, New Delhi, 2007
2. U.C. Jindal, Introduction to Strength of Materials, 5 th Ed, Galgotia Publications, 2001
SAMPLE QUESTION (S)
Remember 15 15 --
Understand 15 15 --
Apply 40 40 30
Analyze 10 10 30
Evaluate 10 10 20
Create 10 10 20
Total (%) 100 100 100
REMEMBER
1. What is Hooke’s law?
2. List out all types of springs.
3. Define slenderness ratio of the column
UNDERSTAND
1. Illustrate various steps involved in constructing the shear force and bending moment diagrams using a
flow chart.
2. Contrast between open and closed coiled helical springs.
3. How does the temperature stress developed in a bar and the coefficient thermal expansion are related.
APPLY
1. Construct the shear force and bending moment diagram for the simply supported beam loaded as
shown in figure?
2. Construct the shear force and bending moment diagram for the cantilever beam loaded as shown in
figure?
3.
A rectangular steel bar, 15 mm wide by 30 mm high and 6 m long, is simply supported at its ends. If
the density of steel is 7850 kg/m3, determine the maximum bending stress caused by the weight of the
bar.
ANALYZE
1. Construct SFD and BMD and examine the constructed SFD and BMD of the below loading and
determine the maximum values of shear force and bending moment.
3
40
2. Analyse the truss for forces in members AB, BD, CD, FH, DF, and DG of the truss shown in Fig.
EVALUATE
1. If suppose you have been provided with the following cross sections and your structural member is
predominated by flexure. Which one of cross section you recommend for the construction and why?
Also give reasons for rejecting other cross sections.
CREATE
1. A square timber beam used as a railroad tie is supported by a uniformly distributed loads and carries
two uniformly distributed loads each totaling 48 kN as shown in Fig. Design the size of the section if
the maximum stress is limited to 8 MPa.
41
16CE304 BUILDING MATERIALS AND CONSTRUCTION

3103
Course Outcomes
1. Explain the sources, properties and applications of common building materials
2. Demonstrate how materials are manufactured and assembled into building component parts
3. Explain materials like lime, cement, wood, geo-synthetics, bricks and stone masonry in building
construction and also their importance
4. Outline structural components, including foundations, slabs-on-grade, frames and elevated slabs
5. Illustrate various building components and finishing’s in building construction
6. Illustrate the basic functions, options, and differences between building systems
COs – POs Mapping
COs PSO#1
1 3
2 3
3 3
4 3
5 3
6 3
Unit I
Stones and Clay Products
Geological Classification of rocks, Stone as building material, Criteria for selection, Tests on stones,
Deterioration and Preservation of stone work
Classification, Manufacturing of clay bricks, Tests on bricks, Bricks for special use - Refractory bricks, Cement
Concrete blocks - Lightweight concrete blocks, Tiles, terra cotta, stoneware, earthenware, porcelain, and clay
blocks their properties and uses
Vitrified Tiles- Cellular Light Weight Concrete Blocks
10 + 3 Hours
Unit II
Lime, Cement, Aggregates and Mortar
Constituents of lime stone, characteristics of lime, classification of lime and importance of each, slaking of lime.
Constituents of cement and significance of each, Manufacturing of Cement, Heat of hydration, various types of
cement and its importance in construction field
Types of aggregates, characteristics of aggregates, strength of aggregates. Types of mortar, cement mortar for
various works, mix proportions and compressive strength of mortars for masonry
Bouges Compounds- Impotance of Gypsum
10 + 4 Hours
Unit III
Masonry and Building Materials
Types of masonry, Rubble and Ashlar masonry, English and Flemish bonds, Cavity and Partition walls
Timber Structure, Defects in Timber, Requirements of a good Timber, Seasoning of Timber. Classification of
Timber used in buildings, Industrial Timber, Steel, Aluminium, Glass, Gypsum, Bitumen, Geosynthetics and
their applications
Veneers-Plywood
10 + 4 Hours
Unit IV
Basic Building Components and Building Finishings
Foundation - Types of foundations, importance of foundation and Plinth beam
Roofs And Floors - Simple configurations and details of various forms of roofs (flat, slope, pyramidal & dome),
Stair cases,Lintels, Arches and Chhajja. Different types of floors, and flooring materials (Ground floor and
upper floors).
Walls, Doors And Windows - Bricks and stone masonry construction, Construction details, types of doors and
windows and their relative advantages & disadvantages
Damp proof course, Plastering, pointing, white washing and distempering – Painting – Constituents of a paint –
Types of paints – Form work and scaffolding
Emulsions-Weather Proof Materials
15 + 4 Hours
42
Textbook (s)
1. S. K. Duggal, Building Materials, 4th Ed., New Age International Publishers, 2012
2. B. C. Punmia, Ashok Kumar Jain and Arun Kumar Jain, Building Construction, 11th Ed., Laxmi
Publications. (P) Ltd., New Delhi, 2016
Reference (s)
1. P.C. Varghese, Building Materials, 2nd Ed.,Prentice-Hall of India Private Ltd, New Delhi, 2007
2. R.Chudly, Construction Technology, Volumes I and II, 2nd Ed., Longman Scientific & Technical, UK,
1995
3. Arora and Bindra, Building Materials and Construction, 2nd Ed., Dhanpat Rai & Sons, New Delhi, 1997
SAMPLE QUESTION (S)

Remember 40 40
Understand 60 60 100
Apply -- -- --
Analyze -- -- --
Evaluate -- -- --
Create -- -- --
Total (%) 100 100 100
REMEMBER
1. What is the standard brick size?

2. List out all the types of cements.
3. Define the term paint.
UNDERSTAND
1. Explain the formation of metamorphic rocks.

2. Describe various functions of geosynthetics.
3. Illustrate the elements of a staircase.
4
43
16CE305 FLUID MECHANICS

3103
Course Outcomes
1. Explain the importance of fluid properties and their influence on fluid motion
2. Apply the principles of total pressure, center of pressure and buoyancy in the design ofdifferent
components in hydraulic structures
3. Utilize the principles of fluid kinematics and dynamics in different fluid flow problems
4. Explain the concepts of laminar flow, turbulent flow and boundary layer theory
5. Solve various problems related to fluid flow through pipes
6. Make use of fundamental principles of fluid motion in the measurement of flow
COs – POs Mapping
COs PO1 PO2 PO12

1 3 2 2
2 3 3 2
3 2 3 2
4 1 3 1
5 2 3 2
6 3 2 2
Unit I
Fluid Properties - Hydro Static Forces on Surfaces – Buoyancy and Floatation
Fluid Properties: Mass Density, Specific Weight, Specific Volume, Specific Gravity, Viscosity, Surface Tension
and Capillarity, Vapor Pressure and Cavitation, Pressure at a point, Pascal’s law, Hydrostatic law, Atmospheric,
Gauge and Vacuum pressure; Measurement of Pressure: Pressure Gauges and Manometers.
Hydrostatic forces on Surfaces: Derivations of Total and Centre of Pressure for Horizontal, Vertical, Inclined
and Curved surfaces
Buoyancy and Floatation: Centre of Buoyancy, Meta Centre and Metacentric Height, Stability of Submerged
and Floating bodies, Determination of Metacentric Height.
Metacentric Height for Floating bodies containing liquid, Time period of transverse oscillation of a floating
body
12 + 3 Hours
Unit II
Fluid Kinematics & Fluid Dynamics
Fluid Kinematics: Velocity of Fluid Particles, Types of Fluid Flow, Description of the Flow Pattern, Basic
Principles of Fluid Flow, Equation of Continuity, Acceleration of Fluid Particle, Rotational and Irrotational
Motions, Stream Function and Velocity Potential functions, Flow Net Analysis.
Fluid Dynamics: Forces acting on Fluid in Motion, Euler’s Equation of Motion and Bernoulli’s Equation,
Kinetic Energy Correction Factor, Impulse Momentum Equation and its Application in forces on pipe bend.
Angular Momentum Principle – Moment of Momentum Equation
11 + 4 Hours
Unit III
Laminar and Turbulent Flows & Boundary Layer Flow
Laminar Flow: Relation between Shear Pressure Gradients, Hagen- Poiseuille Law, Laminar Flow through
inclined pipes, Annulus, Laminar Flow between parallel plates-both plates at rest and moving, Stoke’s Law.
Turbulent Flow: Shear Stresses in Turbulent Flow, Formation of Boundary Layer in Pipes, Hydro dynamically
smooth and rough boundaries, Velocity distribution for Turbulent Flow in Pipes-Karman-Prandtl Velocity
Distribution Equation, Resistance to flow of fluid in smooth and rough pipes, Types of problems in pipeline
Designs. Boundary Layer: Thickness of Boundary Layer, Boundary Layer along a long thin plate and its
characteristics, Boundary Layer Equations, Momentum Integral Equation, Navier-Stoke’s Equation, Laminar
and Turbulent Boundary layer, Boundary Layer Rough Surfaces, Separation of Boundary Layer.
Methods of Controlling Boundary Layer, Friction in Non-Circular Conduits
11 + 4 Hours
44
Unit IV
Flow through Pipes & Measurement of Flow
Flow through Pipes: Reynold’s Friction, Laws of Fluid friction, Froud’s Experiments, Darcy – Weisbach
equation, Chezy’s Formaula, Mannin’s Formula, Hazen William’s Formula, Minor losses, Pipes in Series, Pipes
in Parallel, Total Energy Line and Hydraulic Gradient Line, Flow through long pipes, Pipe Network Problems,
Compound Pipe, Equivalent Pipe, Branched Pipe.
Measurement of Flow: Pitot-tube, Venturi Meter, Flow through Orifices and Mouthpieces, Flow over Notches
and Weirs.
Water Hammer in Pipes-Submerged Weirs
11 + 4 Hours
Total: 45+15 Hours
Textbook (s)
1. Modi and Seth, Hydraulics & Fluid Mechanics, 20 th Ed., Standard Book House, New Delhi, 2014
2. S.K.Som & G.Biswas, Introduction to Fluid Machines, 3rd Ed.,Tata McGraw-Hill Publishers Pvt. Ltd.,
2013
3. Edward J. Shaughnessy, Jr, Ira M. Katz and James, Introduction to Fluid Machines, P.Schaffer,Oxford
University Press, New Delhi, 2005
Refernce (s)
1. J.F.Douglas, J.M. Gaserek and J.A.Swaffirld, Fluid Mechanics, 6 th Ed., Longman Scientific &
Technical, New York, 2011
2. Frank.M. White, Fluid Mechanics, 5th Ed., Tata Mc.Grawhill Pvt. Ltd, 2003
3. A.K. Mohanty , Fluid Mehanics, 2nd Ed., Prentice Hall of India Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, 2006
4. R.K. Bansal , A Text of Fluid Mechanics and Hydraulic Machines, 9 th Ed., Laxmi Publications (P)
Ltd.,New Delhi, 2015
SAMPLE QUESTION (S)

Remember 10 10 --
Understand 30 30 --
Apply 60 60 100
Analyze -- -- --
Evaluate -- -- --
Create -- -- --
Total (%) 100 100 100
REMEMBER
1. Define total pressure.
2. What is Pitot tube?
3. Define hydraulic gradient line
4. Define the terms drag and lift
5. List out all the types of weirs and notches?
UNDERSTAND
1. Explain the terms: dynamic viscosity & kinematic viscosity. Give their dimensions.
2. Derive an expression for the depth of center of pressure from frees surface of liquid of an inclined
plane surface submerged in liquid.
3. Derive an expression for meta-centre height of floating body.
4. Derive an expression for Von Karman Momentum integral equation
5. Mention any four advantages of triangular notch or weir over rectangular notch or weir.
APPLY
1. Find the discharge over a triangular notch of angle 60° when the head over the V-notch is 0.3 in.
Assume Cd = 0.6.
2. A weir 36 meters long is divided into 12 equal bays by vertical posts, each 60 cm wide. Determine the
discharge over the weir if the head over the crest is 1.20 m and velocity of approach is 2 meters per
second.
3. Determine the rate of flow of water through a pipe of diameter 20 cm and length 50 m when one end of
the pipe is connected to a tank and other end of the pipe is open to the atmosphere. The pipe is
horizontal and the height of water in the tank is 4 m above the centre of the pipe. Consider all minor
losses and take f = 0.009 in the formula hf
45
4. A tank has two identical orifices on one of its vertical sides. The upper orifice is 3 m below the water
surface and lower one is 5 in below the water surface. If the value of Cv for each orifice is 0.96. Find
the point of intersection of the two jets.
5. A block of wood of specific gravity 0.8 floats in water. Determine meta-centric height of the block if
its size is 3m x 2m x 1m
5
46
16CE306 BUILDING PLANNING AND DRAWING

1033
Course Outcomes
1. Explain various building bye-Laws laid by town planning authorities and local regulatory bodies
2. Apply techniques for effective project planning and management
3. Plan the different types of residential buildings based on the minimum requirements
4. Plan various public buildings like educational, office buildings and hospital buildings
5. Develop the building drawing as per standards in various phases of a project
6. Outline the detailing in building construction
COs – POs Mapping
COs PO6 PO10 PO12
1 3 2 1
2 1 1 2
3 2 3 2
4 2 3 2
5 2 3 2
6 2 3 2
Unit I
Building Byelaws and Regulations & Planning of Construction Projects
Building byelaws and regulations: Introduction – Terminology – Objectives of building byelaws. Principles
underlying building byelaws. Classification of buildings. Floor Area Ratio (FAR). Floor Space Index (FSI).
Open space requirements. Built up area limitations. Height of Buildings. Wall thickness. Lighting and
ventilation requirement.
Planning of construction projects: Planning scheduling and monitoring of building construction projects, Bar
chart, CPM and PERT Network planning. Computation of times and floats – their significance.
Basic Definitions used in Building Planning-CPM and PERT Network Planning.
12 Hours
Unit II
Residential Buildings & Public Buildings
Residential buildings: Minimum standards for various parts of buildings. Requirements of different rooms and
their grouping. Characteristics of various types of residential buildings.
Public buildings: Planning of Educational institutions, hospitals, dispensaries, office buildings, banks, industrial
buildings, hotels and motels, buildings for recreation.
Requirements and Minimum Standards for Residential Buildings- Requirements and Minimum Standards for
various Public Buildings.
12 Hours
Unit III
Sign Conventions and Bonds & Doors Windows, Ventilators and Roofs
Sign conventions and bonds: Sign conventions for different materials used in civil engineering. Bonds: English
bond & Flemish bond odd & even courses for one, one and half, two and two and half brick walls in thickness at
the junction of a corner.
Doors windows, ventilators and roofs: Panelled Door – paneled and glazed door, glazed windows – paneled
windows – Swing ventilator – Fixed ventilator. Roofs and Trusses: Couple roof – Collar roof – Kind Post truss –
Queen post truss.
Different Sign Conventions used in Building Drawing-Different Components Of The Building used in Building
Drawing.
7 x 3 =21 Hours
Unit IV
Planning of Building
Given line diagram with specification to draw Plan, Section and Elevation of residential and public buildings.
Detailed drawing of the building including Plan- Section and Elevation.
5 x 3 =15 Hours
Total: 60 Hours
47
Textbook (s)
1. R.L. Peurifoyetal, Construction Planning, Equipment and Methods, 7th Ed., Tata Mc. Graw Hill
Publications, 2010.
2. B.C.Punmia & Khandelwal, Project Planning and Control with PERT and CPM, 4th Ed., Laxmi
publications, 2009.
3. ‘A’ Series & ‘B’ Series of JNTU Engineering College, Anantapur.
Reference (s)
1. Building Byelaws by State and Central Governments and Municipal Corporations.
2. Gurucharan Singh & Jagadish Singh, Building Planning, Designing and Scheduling, 5th Ed., Standard
Publishers Distributors, 2006.
SAMPLE QUESTION (S)

Cognitive Level Int. Test 1 (%) Int. Test 2 (%) Drawing Exercises6 (%)
Remember 50 60 --
Understand 50 40 --
Apply -- -- 100
Analyze -- --
Evaluate -- -- --
Create -- -- --
Total (%) 100 100 100
REMEMBER
1. What are the objectives of building Byelaws?
2. What are the planning factors to be considered in the design of educational institutions?
3. Define CPM and PERT. Explain the difference between both.
4. What are the components of a building used for recreation? Discuss briefly
5. Discuss the various requirements for
i) Living room ii) Bed Room
iii) Kitchen iv) Sanitary units of residential buildings
UNDERSTAND
1. Explain the FAR and also in what way it is use full to a Civil Engineer?
2. Classify the buildings based on the i) occupancy ii) Fire Resistance
3. Discuss the various requirements for designing
i) Verandah ii) Drawing room iii) Bed room and iv) Sanitary units of a
residential buildings
4. Explain the usefulness of specifying the minimum standards in buildings.
5. Explain the significance of Scheduling and monitoring of construction projects.
6. Explain the importance of recreation buildings?
7. What do mean by Bar charts and explain them briefly in connection with monitoring and scheduling?
8. What do you understand about the open space requirements and built up area limitations?
6
Assessment will be done based on the performance of drawing exercises
48
16CE307 SURVEY PRACTICAL

0032
Course Outcomes
1. Utilize conventional and modern survey equipment to measure angles and distances
2. Evaluate differences in elevation, draw and utilize contour plots, and calculate volumes for
earthwork
3. Take part in detailing of ground profiles for accurate and thorough note taking in field work to
serve as a legal record
4. Make use of theodolite to find heights and distances as well as conducting trigonometric surveying
5. Interpret the principles and operation of the Global Positioning System
6. Organize a team of surveyors to fix positioning and property lines in line with legal agreements
during setting out works
COs – POs Mapping
COs PO4 PO10

1 3 1
2 3 3
3 3 3
4 3 2
5 2 2
6 1 2
List of Experiments
1. Survey of an area by chain survey (Closed traverse) & Plotting
2. Surveying past obstacles using Chain and Prismatic Compass
3. Distance between inaccessible points using Prismatic Compass
4. Surveying of a given area by Prismatic compass (closed traverse) and plotting after adjustment.
5. Radiation method, intersection method of Plane Table survey
6. Fly leveling (differential leveling)
7. L/s and C/s and plotting.
8. Trigonometric Leveling - Heights and distance problem
9. Distance and elevation computations from tachometric surveying principles
10. Determination of area of ground using total station.
11. Determination of remote height using total station
12. Determination of Gradient of line between two inaccessible points using total station.
13. Traversing using total station
14. Exercise using Global positioning system / Differential GPS instrument

1. Plot the given area to a scale on the chart by plane table survey
2. Determination of horizontal distance between two inaccessible points using theodolite
3. Determination of area of irregular boundary by using planimeter
4. Determine the vertical profile of road surface – A case study
5. Draw the layout plan of the existing campus
6. Draw contour map of the give area
7. Three point problem using plane table survey
Reading Materials (s)

1. Survey Lab Manual – Civil Engineering - GMRIT Rajam
2. B.C.Punmia, Ashok Kumar Jain and Arun Kumar Jain, Surveying (Vol–1),18th Ed., Laxmi Publications
(P) ltd., New Delhi, 2011
7
49
16CE308 STRENGTH OF MATERIALS LAB

0032
Course Outcomes
1. Demonstrate the basic knowledge of the mechanical properties of materials
2. Estimate compressive strength of wood, concrete, brick materials and decide their suitability for the
construction purpose
3. Evaluate the tensile strength and comment on their usage in reinforced concrete structures
4. Determine the impact resistance of steel used in construction works
5. Estimate young’s modulus of wood/steel materials
6. Estimate rigidity modulus for a given spring
COs – POs Mapping

COs PO4
1 3
2 3
3 3
4 3
5 3
6 3
List of Experiments
1. Tension test
2. Bending test on (Steel / Wood) Cantilever beam.
3. Bending test on simple support beam.
4. Torsion test
5. Hardness test
6. Spring test
7. Compression test on wood / concrete/Brick
8. Impact test
9. Shear test
10. Verification of Maxwell’s Reciprocal theorem on beams.
11. Use of electrical resistance strain gauges
12. Continuous beam – deflection test

1. Determination of compressive strength of different wood and brick specimens which are locally
available
2. Determination of compressive strength of different grades of concrete
3. Determination of tensile strength on different grades of steel
4. Determination of hardness of different metals
5. Verify Maxwell’s Reciprocal theorem on a cantilever beam.
6. Determine the modulus of elasticity of reinforced concrete beam by bending test
7. Impact resistance of aluminium and wood
8. Determine the modulus of elasticity of plain concrete beam by bending test
9. Determine the rigidity modulus of open coil helical spring

1. Strength of Materials Lab Manual – Civil Engineering - GMRIT Rajam
2. U.C. Jindal, Introduction to Strength of Materials, Galgotia publications, 2010
3. R. Subramanian, Strength of Materials, 2nd Ed., Oxford university press, New Delhi, 2011
8
50
16CE309 COMPUTER AIDED BUILDING DRAWING LAB

0032
Course Outcomes
1. Create, display, and plot working drawings
2. Construct drawings using layer techniques
3. Construct technical drawings using a standard computer aided drafting program
4. Identify proper templates suitable for residential buildings as per IS specifications / byelaws.
5. Demonstrate proper detailing of RCC & electrical components of residential building
6. Construct drawings of plan, section and elevation of residential structures
COs – POs Mapping
COs PO5 PO10

1 3 3
2 3 3
3 3 3
4 2 2
5 2 3
6 3 3
List of Experiments
1. Draw conventional signs as per I.S. standards, symbols used in civil engineering drawing.
2. Draw the important building components like section of a load bearing wall foundation to parapet.
3. Draw the important joinery components of the building like elevation of fully panelled double leaf door
4. Elevation of partly glazed and partly panelled window.
5. Prepare the king post / Queen post truss and label the various parts.
6. Plan, Elevation, Section of residential building -One bed Room House or Two bed room House
7. Singly reinforced simply supported rectangular beam.
8. Lintel cum sunshade.
9. Continuous Beam.
10. Simply supported two way slabs.
11. Isolated Column with square footing.
12. Layouts of electrical lines in buildings.
List of Augmented Experimets9

1. Creation of Plan and section of residential building
2. Creation of Plan and section of office building
3. Creation of Plan and section of bank building
4. Creation of Plan and section of library building
5. Creation of Plan and section of function hall building
6. Creation of Plan and section of parking building
7. Creation of 3D view of residential building
8. Creation of 3D view of office building
9. Creation of 3D view of bank building
10. Creation of 3D view of library building
11. Creation of 3D view of function hall building
12. Creation of 3D view of parking building

1. Computer Aided Building Drawing Lab Manual – Civil Engineering - GMRIT Rajam
2. Gurucharan sign and Jagadish singh , Building Planning Designing and Scheduling, 5th Ed., Standard
Publishers Distributors, 2003
3. CADFolks , AutoCAD 2015 For Beginners, 2015
9
51
16HSX04 ENGINEERING ECONOMICS AND PROJECT MANAGEMENT

3103
Course Outcomes
1. Explain basic principles of engineering economics
2. Apply cost-volume-profit (CVP) analysis in their business decision making
3. Evaluate investment proposals through various capital budgeting methods
4. Apply the knowledge to prepare the simple financial statements for measuring performance ofbusiness
firm
5. Analyze key issues of organization, management and administration
6. Evaluate project for accurate cost estimates and plan future activities
COs – POs Mapping
COs PO11 PO12
1 2 2
2 3 1
3 3 2
4 3 1
5 1 2
6 3 2
Unit I
Introduction to Engineering Economics - Demand Forecasting & Cost Analysis
Concept of Engineering Economics – Types of efficiency – Managerial Economics Nature and Scope – Law of
Demand – Types of Elasticity of demand.
Demand Forecasting & Cost Analysis: Demand Forecasting: Meaning, Factors Governing Demand Forecasting,
Methods of Demand Forecasting (Survey and Statistical Methods) – Cost Analysis: Basic Cost Concepts, Break
Even Analysis.
Factors affecting the elasticity of demand – Supply and law of Supply. 10 + 3 Hours
Unit II
Investment Decisions & Market Structures - Financial Statements & Ratio Analysis
Time Value of Money – Capital Budgeting: Meaning, Need and Techniques of Capital Budgeting –Types of
Markets Structures – Features – Price Out-put determination under Perfect Competition and Monopoly.
Financial Statements & Ratio Analysis: Introduction to Financial Accounting – Double entry system – Journal –
Ledger – Trail Balance – Final Accounts (with simple adjustments) – Financial Analysis through Ratios:
Interpretation of Liquidity Ratios (Current Ratio and quick ratio), Activity Ratios (Inventory turnover ratio and
Debtor Turnover ratio, Creditors Turnover Ratio, Capital Turnover Ratio), Solvency Ratios (Debt- Equity ratio,
Interest Coverage ratio), and Profitability ratios (Gross Profit Ratio, Net Profit ratio, Operating Ratio, P/E Ratio
and EPS).
Price output determination under Monopolistic markets, Accounting concepts and conventions 11 + 6 Hours
Unit III
Introduction to Management - Strategic Management
Introduction to Management: Nature – Importance – Classical Theories of Management: F.W.Taylor’s and
Henri Fayol’s Theory – Functions and Levels of Management – Decision Making Process.
Methods of Production (Job, Batch and Mass Production) - Inventory Control, Objectives, Functions – Analysis
of Inventory – EOQ.
Maslow & Douglas Mc.Gregor theories of Management, ABC Analysis 12 + 2 Hours
Unit IV
Project Management
Introduction – Project Life Cycle and its Phases – Project Selection Methods and Criteria – Technical Feasibility
– Project Control and Scheduling through Networks – Probabilistic Models of Networks – Time-Cost
Relationship (Crashing) – Human Aspects in Project Management: Form of Project Organization – Role &
Traits of Project Manager.
Sources of Long-term and Short-term Project Finance 12 + 4 Hours
Total: 45+15Hours
52
Textbook (s)
1. Pravin Kumar, Fundamentals of Engineering Economics, Wiley India Pvt. Ltd. New Delhi, 2012
2. Rajeev M Gupta, Project Management, 2nd Ed., PHI Learning Pvt. Ltd. New Delhi, 2014
Reference (s)
1. Panneer Selvam. R, Engineering economics, 2 nd Ed.,, Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi, 2013
2. R.B.Khanna, Project Management, PHI Learning Pvt. Ltd. New Delhi, 2011
3. R. Panneer Selvam & P.Senthil Kumar, Project Management, PHI Learning Pvt. Ltd. New Delhi, 2010
4. A. Aryasri, Management Science, 4th Ed., Tata McGraw Hill, 2014
5. A. Aryasri, Managerial Economics and Financial Analysis, 4th Ed., Tata McGraw Hill, 2014
6. Koontz & Weihrich, Essentials of Management, 6 th Ed., TMH, 2010
7. Chuck Williams and Mukherjee, Principle of Management 7 th Ed., Cengage Learning, 2013
SAMPLE QUESTION (S)

Assessment Pattern
Remember 25 20 --
Understand 25 15 --
Apply 20 20 30
Analyze 10 15 30
Evaluate 20 20 20
Create - 10 20
Total (%) 100 100 100
REMEBER
1. Define Managerial Economics. Explain its nature and scope.
2. Explain the concept of efficiency? What are the serveral methods to enhacing the economic efficiency?
3. Define Production Function? What are the various types of production functions
4. What is meaning of productivity? Explain how productivity can be enhanced in the Indian industries.
5. How are projects “unique” and ‘temporary as defined by PMBOK?
UNDERSTAND
1. What do you understand by engineering economics? Discuss.
2. What is law of demand? Explain its exceptions.
3. Explain different elements of costs used in cost analysis
4. Illustrate the effect of price on demand and supply with the help of a diagram.
5. Compare and contrast long-run equilibrium under monopolistic competition with that under perfect
competition.
APPLY
1. Determine price elasticity of demand given that the quantity demand of a product is 1000 units when
the price is Rs.100 and when the price declines to Rs.70, demand increases to 1100 units.
2. Consider the following data of company for the year 2015
Sales = Rs.2,40.000/-
Fixed cost = Rs.50,000/-
Variable caost = Rs.75,000/-
Find our the followings
a) Contribution
b) Profit
c) BEP
d) Margin of safety
3. “Every debit must have a corresponding credit” Explain.
4. Identigy the factors that are to be diagnosed both in the external and the internal environment to make
enough ground for strategy formulation. Illustrate appropriately
5. “Poor technology selection can lead to total failure for a manufacturing firm”, Do you agree? Give
reasons in support of your answer with suitable examples.
ANALYSE
1. “Management is regarded as an art by some, science by othes”. In the light of this statement, explain
the exact nature of management.
2. Make a comparative analysis of the features of different methods of production.
10
53
3. Analyse the Discounted Cash Flow (DCF) technique for appraising large investment decisions.
4. Is there any lind between mission, goal, objective, strategy and programmes in an industrial
environment?
5. Compare and contrast the project evaluation and review technique (PERT) with the critical path
method (CPM).
EVALUATE
1. Evaluate survey based demand forecasting methods with appropriate examples.
2. The logical sequence of management functions cannot be subordinated even by one fuction. Do you
agree? Support your answer.
3. Can there be a strategy without a mission? Give a mission statement for following organization:
A) An internet servce provider
B) A large private hospital
C) State electricity board
4. From the following information calculate ARR of the project, with initial cost of Rs.2,00,000/- and
scrap value is Rs.10,000/.
Year Project
1 20000
2 50000
3 70000
4 60000
5 40000
5. Following data relates to a certain project.

Activity t0 tm tp
1-2 2 5 14
1-3 3 12 21
2-4 5 14 17
3-4 2 5 8
4-5 1 4 7
3-5 6 15 30
a) Construct the network b) Find the project duration
c) Identify the critical path
CREATE
1. Discuss the flow of goods, services, resources and money payments in a simple economy with the help
of a suitable diagram.
2. Sketch and explain the demand relationship in each of the following statements.
a. I would never buy a Britney Spears CD! You couldn’t even give me one for nothing.
b. I generally buy a bit more coffee as the price falls. But once the price falls to Rs.2/-, I’ll buy
out the entire stock of the supermarket.
c. I spend more on orange juice even as the price rises. (Does this mean that I must be violating
the law of demand?)
3. “Managerial Economics is the discipline which deals with application of economic theory to business
management”, Discuss.
4. How information technology has enabled the development of project management in recent times?
5. ‘GE Matrix is an extension of BCG Matrix’, Discuss.
54
16CE402 STRENGTH OF MATERIALS II
3103
Course Outcomes
1. Identify the orientation of principal planes and magnitude of principal stresses on an element under a
complex loading
2. Make use of different failure theories to assess the stresses at the probable failure stage
3. Evaluate the buckling loads of columns with axial and eccentric loading
4. Design the diameter of the helical springs subjected to axial pull, axial couple
5. Select the thickness of cylinder subjected to longitudinal, hoop and radial stresses in case of thin and
thick cylinders
6. Assess the resultant stresses in the case of chimneys, retaining walls and dams and checking their
stability
COs – POs Mapping

COs PO2 PO12
1 1 1
2 3 1
3 1 1
4 3 1
5 2 1
6 2 1
Unit I
Principal Stresses and Strains - Theories of Failures
Introduction – Stresses on an inclined section of a bar under axial loading – compound stresses – Normal and
tangential stresses on an inclined plane for bi-axial stresses – Two perpendicular normal stresses accompanied
by a state of simple shear – Mohr’s circle of stresses – Principal stresses and strains – Analytical and graphical
solutions
Introduction – Various Theories of failures like Maximum Principal stress theory – Maximum Principal strain
theory – Maximum shear stress theory – Maximum strain energy theory – Maximum shear strain energy theory
Strain Rosette 11 + 4 Hours
Unit II
Springs - Columns and Struts
Introduction – Types of springs – deflection of close and open coiled helical springs under axial pull and axial
couple – springs in series and parallel – Carriage or leaf springs
Introduction – Types of columns – Short, medium and long columns – Axially loaded compression members –
Crushing load – Euler’s theorem for long columns- assumptions- derivation of Euler’s critical load formulae for
various end conditions – Equivalent length of a column – slenderness ratio – Euler’s critical stress – Limitations
of Euler’s theory – Rankine – Gordon formula – Long columns subjected to eccentric loading – Secant formula
– Empirical formulae – Straight line formula – Prof. Perry’s formula
Empirical formulae 12 + 4 Hours
Unit III
Thin and Thick Cylinders
Thin seamless cylindrical shells – Derivation of formula for longitudinal and circumferential stresses – hoop,
longitudinal and Volumetric strains – changes in diameter, and volume of thin cylinders – Thin spherical shells
Introduction Lame’s theory for thick cylinders – Derivation of Lame’s formulae – distribution of hoop and
radial stresses across thickness – design of thick cylinders – compound cylinders – Necessary difference of radii
for shrinkage – Thick spherical shells
Spherical Shells 11 + 4 Hours
Unit IV
Direct and Bending Stresses - Unsymmetrical Bending
Stresses under the combined action of direct loading and B.M, Core of a section – determination of stresses in
the case of chimneys, retaining walls and dams – conditions for stability – stresses due to direct loading and
B.M. about both axis
55
Introduction – Centroidal principal axes of section – Moments of inertia referred to any set of rectangular axes –
Stresses in beams subjected to unsymmetrical bending – Principal axes – Resolution of bending moment into
two rectangular axes through the centroid – Location of neutral axis- Deflection of beams under unsymmetrical
bending
Shear Centre
11 + 3 Hours
Textbook (s)
1. R. Subramanian, Strength of Materials, 2nd Ed., Oxford University Press, New Delhi,2010
2. Ferdinand P Beer, E. Russell, Johnston, Jr, John T dewolf, Mechanics of Materials, 6 th Ed., Tata
McGraw-Hill Publications, 2012
3. Schaum’s Outline Series, Strength of Materials, 5th Ed., McGraw-Hill Professional Publications, 2011
Reference (s)
1. R.K.Rajput, Strength of Materials, 4th Ed., S.Chand & Co, New Delhi, 2007
2. U.C. Jindal, Introduction to Strength of Materials, 5 th Ed., Galgotia Publications, 2001
Sample Question (S)

Remember 15 15 --
Understand 15 15 --
Apply 40 40 30
Analyze 10 10 30
Evaluate 10 10 20
Create 10 10 20
Total (%) 100 100 100
Remember
1. What are principal stresses?

2. List out all the theories of failures
3. Define core of a section
Understand
1. Illustrate various steps involved in constructing the Mohr’s circle graphically when subjected to a bi-
axial state of stress
2. Differentiate between thin and thick cylinders
Apply
1. An element in plane stress is subjected to stresses as shown in fig.
Determine (a) The magnitude of principal stresses (b) Find the orientation of principal planes and sketch
the principal stresses on a properly oriented element. (c) Find the maximumshear stresses and sketch the
maximum shear stresses on a properly oriented element.
56
2. A cylindrical pressure vessel 2.5m in diameter and 5m long is made from 15mm thick steel plate having
a Young’s modulus of 207 GN/m2 and a Poisson’s ratio of 0.28. If strain gauges are fixed to the
cylinder, aligned circumferentially and longitudinally, what strains would they record when the cylinder
is subjected to an internal pressure of 3.2 Mpa?
Analyze
1. A steel machine part is statically loaded and has a yield strength of 320 MPa. For each of the following
stress states find the factor of safety using each of the three static failure theories. Analyze the results
and find the conservative theory among the three theories.
a) ox = 60 MPa oy = -30 MPa oz = -20 MPa ıxy = 40 MPa
b) ox = 70 MPa ıxy = 30 MPa
Evaluate
1. A trapezoidal dam having 4m top, width, 8m bottom width and 12m height retaining water up to a
height of 10m. The density of masonry is 2000kg/m3 . Coefficient of friction between the dam & the
soil is 0.55. The allowable compressive stress is 343350N/m2 . Check the safety of the dam.
2. A masonry dam, trapezoidal in cross section 4m high, 1m wide at its top and 3m wide at its bottom,
retains water on its vertical face to a maximum height of 3.5m from its base. Check the safety of the
dam, when the reservoir is full. Take the unit weight of masonry as 19.62 KN/m3
Create
1. A cylindrical steel pressure vessel 400 mm in diameter with a wall thickness of 20 mm, is subjected to
an internal pressure of 4.5 MN/m2. (a) To what value may the internal pressure be increased if the
stress in the steel is limited to 120 MN/m2? (b) If the internal pressure were increased until the vessel
burst, sketch the type of fracture that would occur.
11
57
16CE403 ENGINEERING GEOLOGY

3024
Course Outcomes
1. Explain the importance of subsurface and surface geological processes from civil engineering point of
view
2. Identify the different minerals and rocks using physical properties
3. Construct cross sections of geological maps showing tilted beds, faults, folds, joints and unconformities
4. Analyze the seismic hazard potential and practical implementation of earthquake response spectra
5. Assess the suitability of materials in the project site by interpreting data from different site
investigation techniques
6. Apply the investigation techniques to decide the suitability of project site for different structures
COs – POs Mapping
COs PO1 PO2 PO4 PSO#1

1 2 2 2 1
2 3 2 3 2
3 3 3 3 2
4 1 3 3 1
5 3 2 3 3
6 3 2 3 2
Unit I
Basic Geosciences and Physical Geology
Basic Geosciences: Definition of Geology and Engineering Geology, Main and applied branches of Geology,
Importance of Geology and its branches from Civil Engineering point of view, Brief study of case histories of
failure of some civil engineering constructions due to geological draw backs, Work-activities of Engineering
Geologist, Internal structure of the Earth and its composition, Elementary knowledge on isostasy, continental
drift, plate tectonics and sea floor spreading.
Physical Geology: Weathering, Effect of Weathering over the properties of rocks like ‘granite’, Importance of
Weathering with reference to civil engineering constructions like dams, reservoirs and tunnels; Soil formation,
Engineering classification and description of Indian soils, Hydrology and Geological work of Rivers,
Underground water in relation to Engineering Works, Geological work of Wind.
1. Physical Properties of Minerals: Megascopic Identification of
a) Rock Forming Minerals – Quartz group, Feldspar group, Garnet group, Mica group & Talc,
Chlorite, Olivine, Kyanite, Asbestos, Tourmelene, Calcite, Gypsum, etc…
b) Ore Forming Minerals – Magnetite, Hematite, Pyrite, Pyralusite, Graphite, Chromite, etc…
12+7 Hours
Unit II
Materials of the Earth’s Crust, Clay Mineralogy and Rock Structures
Crystallography: Introduction, Unit cell, Interfacial Angle, Crystallographic axes, Parameters, Crystallographic
notation, Forms, Symmetry elements, Different crystal systems.
Mineralogy: Definition of mineral, Importance of study of minerals, Different methods of study of minerals,
Advantages of study of minerals by physical properties, Role of study of physical properties in their
identification, Study of physical properties of different rock forming mineral groups.
Petrology: Definition of rock, Geological classification of rocks into igneous, sedimentary and metamorphic
rocks, Different methods of formation of igneous, sedimentary and metamorphic rocks, Common structures and
textures of igneous, sedimentary and metamorphic rocks, Study of physical properties of different types of
igneous, sedimentary and metamorphic rocks.
Clay Mineralogy: Introduction, Classification of Clay Minerals, Clay Mineral Groups, Crystal Structure of Clay
Minerals, Clay Mineral Properties, Thermal Methods, Base Exchange Capacity, Industrial Applications, Origin
of Clay, Clay Mineral Equilibria.
Rock Structures: Definition of Structural Geology, Outcrop, strike and dip; Study of common geological
structures associating with the rocks such as folds, faults, unconformities, and joints, potential problems from
rock structures in engineering constructions.
58
1. Megascopic Description and Identification of Rocks:
a) Igneous Rocks: Types of Granite, Pegmatite, Gabbro, Dolerite, Syenite, Granite Poryphery,
Basalt, etc…
b) Sedimentary Rocks: Sandstone, Ferrugineous Sandstone, Limestone, Shale, Laterite,
Conglomerate, etc…
c) Metamorphic Rocks: Biotite, Granite Gneiss, Slate, Muscovite &Biotite Schist, Marble,
Khondalite etc…
11 +7 Hours
Unit III
Natural Hazards and Engineering Seismology
Earth quakes: their causes and effects, shield areas and seismic belts. Seismic waves, Richter scale, precautions
to be taken for building construction in seismic areas; Landslides: their causes and effects; measures to be taken
to prevent their occurrence; Tsunamis: meaning of tsunami, causes of tsunami, destruction of tsunami and
tsunami disaster management.
Engineering Seismology: Effects of earthquakes on Built Environment: Strong Ground Shaking, Fault Rupture,
Geotechnical Deformations, Seismic Hazard Assessment: Introduction, Seismicity and Earthquake Recurrence
Models, Ground-Motion Prediction Equations, Probabilistic Seismic Hazard Analysis, Deterministic Seismic
Hazard Analysis, Uniform Hazard Spectrum, Basic Probability Concepts, Response of Simple Structures to
Earthquake Ground Motions
1. Interpretation and drawing of sections for geological maps showing tilted beds, faults, unconformities
etc.
11+8 Hours
Unit IV
Site Investigation and Geological Considerations
Site Investigation: Introduction, different stages of site investigation, Use of Aerial Photography and Satellite
Remote Sensing images in site investigation, Geophysical Exploration: Importance of Geophysical studies,
Principles of Gravity method, Magnetic method, Electrical methods, Seismic methods, Radio metric methods
and geothermal methods; Special importance of Electrical resistivity method and seismic refraction method,
Methods of subsoil exploration and sampling of soils, Water pumping tests- Approach and utility
Geological Considerations: Geological (Lithological, structural and groundwater) considerations in the selection
of suitable site for construction of following civil engineering projects: Dams, reservoirs, spillways, tunnels,
bridges, highways, canals, runways, powerhouses, Guidelines for writing an Engineering Geology report.
1. Simple Structural Geology problems.
2. Simple Problems on Electrical Resistivity and Seismic Refraction Prospecting.
11+8 Hours
Total: 45+30 Hours
Textbook (s)
1. Subinoy Gangopadhyay, Engineering Geology, 1 st Edition, Oxford University Press, New Delhi, 2013
2. A.Parthasaradhy, V.Panchapakesan, R.Nagarajan, Engineering Geology, 1 st Edition, Wiley Private
India Limited, New Delhi, 2013
Reference (s)
1. N Chenna Kesavalu, Text Book of Engineering Geology, 2 nd Edition, Trinity Press, Hyderabad, 2014.
2. HalukSucuoglu, SinanAkkar, Basic Earthquake Engineering, 1 st Edition, Springer International
Publishing, 2014.
3. David George Price, Engineering Geology: Principles and Practice, 2 nd Edition, Springer International
Publishing, 2009
4. Engineering Geology Lab Manual-Civil Engineering- GMRIT, Rajam
59
SAMPLE QUESTION (S)

Cognitive Level Int. Test 1 (%) Int. Test 2 (%) Lab Assessment12 (%)
Remember 15 15 --
Understand 15 15 --
Apply 40 40 100
Analyze 10 10 --
Evaluate 20 20 --
Create -- -- --
Total (%) 100 100 100
REMEMBER
1. Name the three major rock types of earth’s crust
2. Define a fault
3. Define geophysical anomaly
4. What is spillway and chute?
5. What kinds of environmental degradations are associated with creation of a reservoir?
UNDERSTAND
1. Discuss the methods of grouting of foundation of different types of dams and tunnel
2. Explain the method of determining the compressive strength of intact rock specimen using rebound
hammer
3. Explain porosity and permeability of unconsolidated materials and rocks
4. Give an outline of the engineering classification of soil
5. Describe with illustration the difference between recumbent fold and iso-clinical fold
APPLY
1. In a dam site, the abutment rocks are affected by a fault. The throw and heave of fault are measured to
be 10 m and 5 m respectively. Calculate the neat slip of the fault
2. Identify all the types of problems that are generally encountered in the tunnel construction.
3. Given the following observations of piezometric heads in three observation wells.
Well A B C
X-Coordinate (m) 0 300 0
Y-Coordinate (m) 0 0 200
Piezometric head 10 11.5 8.4
(m)
Assume all the wells measure a homogeneous, isotropic, confined aquifer with constant thickness b=20
m, effective porosity n=0.2, and hydraulic conductivity K=15m /day. Approximate the piezometric
surface between the wells as a plane.
I. Find the hydraulic gradient (magnitude and direction)
II. Find the total discharge in the aquifer per unit width
12
Assessment will be done based on the dat to day performance and internal examination
60
16CE404 SOIL MECHANICS

3103
Course Outcomes
1. Outline the significance of geotechnical engineering.
2. Examine and determine physical properties of soil.
3. Analyze the hydraulic conductivity in soils due to seepage.
4. Analyze the stress distribution due to different types of loading.
5. Determine one-dimensional consolidation characteristics of fine-grained soils under vertical load.
6. Determine the shear strength of soils and describe the differences between drained and undrained
shear strength.
COs – POs Mapping
COs PO2 PSO#1
1 2 1
2 2 3
3 3 2
4 3 2
5 2 2
6 3 2
Unit I
Soil Properties and Soil Classification
Soil Properties: Soil Structure, Basic definitions; Phase relations
Soil Classification: Index properties; Grain size distribution; Soil aggregate properties. Indian standard soil
classification system
Soil Formation- Unified Classification
10 + 4 Hours
Unit II
Principle of Effective Stress, Related Phenomena & Permeability and Seepage through Soils
Principle of effective stress and related phenomena: Principle of effective stress; Capillarity; Seepage force and
quicksand condition; Total, effective and neutral pressures
Permeability and seepage through soils: One-dimensional flow; Darcy’s law; Laboratory methods for
permeability determination; Field pumping tests for permeability determination; Permeability as a function of
soil type, permanent, void ratio, soil fabric, and effective stress; Two-dimensional flow; Flow nets and their
characteristics; Uplift pressure, exit gradient, and piping; Criteria for filters
Coefficient of Permeability by Indirect Tests
12 + 4 Hours
Unit III
Compaction & Stress Distribution in Soils
Compaction: Laboratory compaction tests; Factors affecting compaction; Structure and engineering behavior of
compacted cohesive soils; Field compaction; Compaction specifications and field control.
Stress distribution in Soils: Two to one method, Boussinesq’s theory for point, circular loads and Newmarks’
chart
Stress Distribution for Rectangular Line and Strip Loads
10 + 3 Hours
Unit IV
Compressibility, Consolidation Behavior & Shear Strength
Compressibility and consolidation behavior: Components of total settlement; Effects of soil type, stress history,
and effective stress on compressibility; Normally consolidated and over-consolidated soils; Terzaghi’s theory of
one dimensional consolidation; Time-rate of consolidation; Evaluation of compressibility and consolidation
parameters from consolidometer data.
Shear strength: Mohr’s stress circle; Mohr-Coulomb failure criterion; Laboratory tests for shear strength
determination; Effective and total stress shear strength parameters; Shear strength characteristics of clays and
sands
3D Consolidation
13 + 4 Hours
61
Textbook (s)
1. C.V.Ramaiah, A Text Book of Geotechnical Engineering, 3 rd Ed., New Age International Publishers,
2006
2. B.C.Punmia, Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering, 16 th Ed., Laxmi Publications, 2005
Reference (s)
1. Gopal Ranjan & ASR Rao, Basic and Applied Soil Mechanics, 3 rd Ed., New Age International Pvt.
Ltd, 2016
2. S. K.Gulhati & Manoj Datta, Geotechnical Engineering, 4th Ed., Tata Mc.Graw Hill Publishing
Company, New Delhi. 2005
SAMPLE QUESTION (S)

Remember 30 15 --
Understand 25 15 --
Apply 15 25 30
Analyze 20 35 60
Evaluate 10 10 10
Create -- -- --
Total (%) 100 100 100
REMEMBER
1. Define Surface Tension and Capillarity
2. State the meaning of the following symbols used in IS Classification of Soils
(i) CH
(ii) ML
(iii) CI
(iv) MH-OH
(v) SP
(vi) GW
(vii) SC
(viii) CL
3. Define and mention the formulae for the following terms
(i) Void ratio
(ii) Porosity
(iii) Degree of saturation
(iv) Percentage air voids
(v) Water content
(vi) Density index
(vii) Percentage of air voids
4. State all the assumptions of Terazaghis one dimensional theory of consolidation
5. Write the relationship between principal stresses at failure
6. State the characteristics and applications of flow net
7. What are two different methods of compaction adopted in the field?
8. What is liquefaction of sand?
UNDERSTAND
1. Explain in detail various factors affecting permeability
2. Prove the relation    d  (1 n) w
3. Explain all the factors affecting compaction
4. Explain in detail various factors affecting permeability in detail
5. Explain the affecting shear strength of soil
6. Derive the following relation with neat phase diagrams esr = WG
7. Explain how liquefaction of soil can be prevented?
8. Explain in detail about various soil types
13Assignment Test should contain only questions related to Higher Order Thinking (HOT) Skills
62
9. Explain in detail important features of Indian soil classification system

10. Explain the different properties of flow net
11. Explain standard compaction test with neat sketch
12. Briefly discuss the Mohr coulomb failure theory
13. Explain how soils formed
APPLY
1. An airport runway needs 500,000 m3 of soil compacted to a void ratio of 0.75. There are two borrow
pits A and B from where the required soil can be taken and transported to the site
Borrow pit In-situ void ratio Transportation cost
A 0.8 Rs. 10/m3
B 1.7 Rs. 5/m3
Which of the borrow pits would be more economical?
2. A very long embankment is to be built with a width of 10m and side slope of 1 ½. The height of the
embankment is 10m. Compute the vertical stress at a depth of 5m from the base at the followingpoints.
(i) Below the toe
(ii) Below the center line
(iii) Below a point on the slope.
Assume, = 21kN/m3.
3. A structure having rectangular area 3m x 1.5m is uniformly loaded with load intensity of 125 kN/m2 at
the ground surface. Calculate the vertical pressure at a point 4.5m below one of its corners
4. A circular ring foundation for an overhead tank transmits a contact pressure of 300kN/m 2. Its internal
diameter is 6m and external diameter 10m. Compute the vertical stress on the center line of the footing
due to the imposed load at a depth of 6.5m below the ground level. The footing is founded at a depth of
2.5m.
5. The four legs of a transmission tower form in plan a square of side 4m and together carry a total load of
300kN. Compute the increase in vertical stress data depth of 2m vertically below a leg and also at the
center of the plan at 2m depth. Use Bousnesq’s theory.
ANALYZE
1. Compute stresses due to load in soil for the given conditions as given below;
i) Below point load of 1000kN at depth of 5m
ii) Below circular load (diameter: 8m) of intensity 100kPa at depth 6m
2. A soil sample has a porosity of 40% .the specific gravity of solids 2.70, Calculate
(i) Void ratio
(ii) Dry density
(iii) Unit weight if the soil is 50% saturated
(iv) Unit weight if the soil is completely saturated
3. The void ratio of clay is 1.56 and its compression index is found to be 0.8 at the pressure 180kN/m 2.
What will be the void ratio if the pressure is increased to 240kN/m2
4. The water table in a certain area is at a depth of 4m below the ground surface. To a depth of 12m, the
soil consists of very fine sand having an average void ratio of 0.7. Above the water table the sand has
an average degree of saturation of 50%. Calculate the effective pressure on a horizontal plane at a
depth 10meters below the ground surface. What will be the increase in the effective pressure if the soil
gets saturated by capillarity up to a height of 1m above the water table? Assume G = 2.65
5. In a falling head permeameter test, the initial head (t = 0) is 40 cm. The head drops by 5 cm in 10
minutes. Calculate the time required to run the test for the final head to be at 20cm. If the sample is 6
cm is height and 50 cm2 in cross sectional area, calculate the coefficient of permeability, taking area of
stand pipe = 0.5 cm2
6. A sand deposit is 10m thick and overlies a bed of soft clay. The ground water table is 3m below the
ground surface. If the sand above the ground water table has a degree of saturation of 45%, plot the
diagram showing the variation of the total stress, pore water pressure and the effective stress. The void
ratio of the sand is 0.70. Take G=2.65
7. Calculate the void ratio, porosity and degree of saturation of a soil sample, if it has the wet density 2.0
g/cc and dry density 1.8 g/cc. Specific gravity of soil is 2.7.
8. A sieve analysis of a given sample of sand was carried out by making use of IS standard sieves. The
total weight of sand used for the analysis was 522 g. The following data were obtained
63
Size of the
4.75 2.0 1.0 0.6 0.425 0.3 0.15 0.075 Pan
sieve in mm
Weight of soil
25.75 61.75 67 126 57.75 78.75 36.75 36.75 31.5
retained (g)
Plot the grain size distribution curve on semi-log paper and compute the following: (i) Percent gravel
(ii) Percent of coarse, medium and fine sand (iii) Percent of silt and clay (iv) Uniformity coefficient
(v) Coefficient of curvature
9. The following test results are obtained from the direct shear test. Compute the shear strength
parameters. Dimensions of the sample are 6cm X 6cm X 2cm
Normal stress (kg/cm2) 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7
Shear Load (kg) 6.75 9.0 11.25 13.50 15.75
10. A concentrated load of 2000kN is applied at the ground surface. Determine the vertical stress at a point
“A” which is 6m directly below the load. Also calculate the vertical stress at a point “B” which is at a
depth of 6m and at a horizontal distance of 5m from the axis of the load
EVALUATE
1. Explain Westergaards theory for the determination of the vertical stress at a point. How is it different
from Boussinesqs solution?
2. How you will control the quality of compaction in the field?
64
16CE405 HYDRAULICS AND HYDRAULIC MACHINERY

3103
Course Outcomes
1. Explain the behavior of the flow in an open channels for different flow conditions
2. Develop empirical relationships among physical variables involved in flow phenomenon of model and
prototype
3. Determine the hydrodynamic forces exerted by the fluid jet on flat, inclined and curved vanes
4. Develop velocity triangles in understanding the functioning of various turbines and pumps
5. Design the turbines based on different hydraulic conditions.
6. Evaluate the performance characteristics of turbine and pump working under different working
conditions
COs – POs Mapping
COs PO2 PO3
1 3 2
2 3 3
3 3 3
4 3 3
5 3 3
6 3 3
Unit I
Open Channel Flow and Critical Flow
Uniform flow: Types of flows - Type of channels – Velocity distribution – Energy and momentum correction
factors – Chezy’s, Manning’s; and Bazin formulae for uniform flow – Most Economical sections. Critical flow:
Specific energy-critical depth – computation of critical depth – critical sub-critical and super critical flows
Non uniform flow: Dynamic equation for G.V.F., Mild, Critical, Steep, horizontal and adverse slopes-surface
profiles-direct step method- Rapidly varied flow, hydraulic jump, energydissipation.Condition for Max
Discharge for a Given Value of Specific Energy
Minimum Specific Energy in Terms of Critical Depth
12 + 3 Hours
Unit II
Hydraulic Similitude and Impact of Jets
Dimensional analysis-Rayleigh’s method and Buckingham’s pi theorem study of Hydraulic models –
Geometric, kinematic and dynamic similarities-dimensionless numbers – model and prototype relations
Impact of jets: Hydrodynamic force of jets on stationary and moving flat, inclined and curved vanes, jet striking
centrally and at tip, velocity triangles at inlet and outlet, expressions for work done and efficiency-Angular
momentum principle, Applications to radial flow turbines. Model Testing of Partially Submerged Bodies
Jet Propulsion
11 + 4 Hours
Unit III
Hydraulic Turbines
Layout of a typical Hydropower installation – Heads and efficiencies classification of turbines-pelton wheel-
Francis turbine-Kaplan turbine-working, working proportions, velocity diagram, work done and efficiency,
hydraulic design, draft tube – theory and function efficiency
Governing Equations of turbines-surge tanks-unit and specific turbines-unit speed unit quantity-unit power-
specific speed performance characteristics-geometric similarity-Cavitation. Outward Radial Flow Reaction
Turbines
The Hydraulic Lift 11 + 4 Hours
65
Unit IV
Centrifugal-Pumps and Hydropower Engineering
Pump installation details-classification-work done- Manometric head minimum starting speed-losses and
efficiencies-specific speed multistage pumps-pumps in parallel performance of pumps-characteristic curves-
NPSH-cavitations
Hydropower engineering: Classification of Hydropower plants – Definition of terms – load factor, utilization
factor, capacity factor, estimation of hydropower potential. Maximum Suction Lift-Model Testing of Centrifugal
Pumps
The Hydraulic Rams
11 + 4 Hours
Textbook (s)
1. K. Subramanya, Open Channel Flow, 3rd Ed., Tata Mc.Grawhill Publishers, New Delhi, 2009
2. P.N Modi and S.M Seth, Hydraulics & Fluid Mechanics, 20 th Ed., Standard Book House, New Delhi,
2013
3. R.K. Bansal, A Text of Fluid Mechanics and Hydraulic Machines, 9 th Ed., Laxmi Publications (P)
Ltd.,New Delhi, 2015
Reference (s)
1. R.K. Rajput, Fluid Mechanics and Fluid Machines, Revised 9th Ed., S. Chand &Co, 2015
2. V.T. Chow, Open Channel Flow, 7th Ed., Mc.Graw Hill Book Company, 2009
3. S.C Sharma, Fluid Mechanics & Hydraulic Machines, 8 th Ed., Khanna Publishers, New Delhi, 2009
4. D.S. Kumar, Fluid Mechanics & Fluid Power Engineering, 8th Ed., Kataria & Sons, 2013
SAMPLE QUESTION (S)

Remember 25 15 --
Understand 35 15 --
Apply 20 25 30
Analyze 20 25 30
Evaluate -- 10 20
Create -- 10 20
Total (%) 100 100 100
REMEMBER
1. List out all the types of open Channel Flows
2. Define Energy Correction Factor and Momentum Correction Factor for Open Channel flows.
3. List any two types of dimensionless numbers
UNDERSTAND
1. Explain about Most Economical sections
2. Discuss critical, sub critical and super critical flows in open channels.
3. Explain Chezy’s and Manning’s Formulae for open channel flows.
APPLY
1. Derive equation for Gradually Varied Flow from fundaments. Discuss the applications
2. Explain in detail about the hydraulic jump
3. Discuss different similarities between models and prototypes
4. Explain the working of reciprocating pump with neat sketches
ANALYZE
1. Water is to be pumped to a height of 90m. The pumps that run at a speed of 1000 rpm with rated
capacity of 200 liters per second are available. How many pumps are required to pump the water if
specific speed is 800?
2. A reaction turbine develops 7000kW under a head of 45m with a speed of 150 rpm. What is the
specific speed of the turbine? What will be the power and speed when the turbine works under a head
of 20m.
66
3. A cylindrical shaft of 90mm diameter rotates about a vertical axis inside a fixed cylindrical tube of
length 50 cm and 95 mm internal diameter. If the space between the tube andthe shaft is filled by a
lubricant of dynamic viscosity 2.0 pose, determine the power required to overcome viscous resistance
when the shaft is rotated at a speed of 240 rpm.
EVALUATE
1. Determine the number of the impellers required for a multistage centrifugal pump to deliver 3000 litres
per minute to a height of 200m at a speed of 800 rpm. The specific speed value is not to exceed 600.
2. How many impellers are required in a multistage pump to lift 5000 litres/minut against head of 200m,
at a speed of 800 rpm? The specific speed of the impeller is not to exceed700.
3. A reaction turbine develops 7000 kW under a head of 45m with a speed of 150 rpm what is the specific
speed of the turbine? What will be the power and speed when the turbine work sunders a head of 20m.
CREATE
1. Construct velocity triangle for velocity compounded impulse turbine and define each velocity
component
2. Construct velocity triangle for reaction turbine and define each angle of the velocity triangle
3. Design a steam nozzle for maximum discharge condition
4. Construct velocity triangle for following data of a parson’s reaction turbine, Outlet angle = 200 , Speed
ratio = 0.8, Speed of rotor = 3000 rpm, Diameter of rotor = 150cm
14
67
16CE406 TRANSPORTATION ENGINEERING

3103
Course Outcomes
1. Build the knowledge on road network in India and highway alignment
2. Design various road Geometric elements based on the geographic conditions
3. Identify traffic characteristics and build knowledge on design of Intersections
4. Build the knowledge on basics of railway engineering and airport engineering
5. Design various Railway track Geometric elements
6. Plan runway orientation and length
COs – POs Mapping
COs PO3 PSO#2
1 1 1
2 3 3
3 1 2
4 1 1
5 3 3
6 3 3
Unit I
Highway Alignment and Highway Geometric Design
Classification of Roads-Road Network Patterns–Highway Alignment-Factors affecting Alignment- Engineering
Surveys
Highway Geometric Design: Importance of Geometric Design- Design controls and Criteria- Highway Cross
Section Elements; Sight Distance Elements: Stopping sight Distance, Overtaking Sight Distance and
Intermediate Sight Distance; Design of Horizontal Alignment: Super elevation-Extra widening-Setback
Distance-Transition Curves; Vertical curves: Summit curves-valley curves
Highway Re-Alignment
11 + 4 Hours
Unit II
Traffic Engineering and Intersection Design
Traffic Characteristics: Volume, Speed and Density; Traffic Studies: Volume Studies-Speed studies-Parking
Studies; Road Accidents: Causes and Preventive measures; Traffic Signs and Road markings
Design of Traffic Signals: Webster Method– IRC Method; Intersections: Types of Intersections– Need for
channelization- Design of Rotary Intersection –Advantages and Disadvantages of Rotary Intersection
Speed and Delay Studies
11 + 4 Hours
Unit III
Introduction to Railway Engineering and Geometric Design of Railway Track
Permanent way components and their functions: Rails–Sleepers -Ballast-Creep of Rails –fixtures & Fastenings–
Points and Crossings
Geometric Design of Railway Track: Gradients-Grade Compensation- Cant and Negative Superelevation- Cant
Deficiency – Degree of Curve
Signals- Interlocking
12 + 3 Hours
Unit IV
Introduction to Airport Engineering
Airport site selection; Airports layout and its Components: Terminal building-Runway-Taxiway- Apron-
Hangar; Aircraft characteristics
Geometric Design of Runway: Computation of Runway length and corrections–Orientation of Runway :Wind
Rose Diagram
Failures and Maintenance of Airfield Pavements
11 + 4 Hours
68
Textbook (s)
1. S.K.Khanna & C.E.G.Justo, Highway Engineering, 7 th Ed., Nemchand & Bros., 2000
2. L.R.Kadiyali, Traffic Engineering and Transport Planning, 8 th Ed., Khanna publishers, Delhi, 2010
3. S.C Saxena and S.P. Arora, Railway Engineering, Dhanpat Rai Publications, Delhi, 2011
4. S.K.Khanna and M.G.Arora, Airport Planning and Design, 6 th Ed., Nemchand & Bros 2011
Reference (s)
1. L.R.Kadiyali and N.B.Lal, Principles and Practice of Highway Engineering, 5 th Ed., Khanna
Publications, 2005
2. S. C. Rangawala, Railway Engineering, 25th Ed., Charotar Publishing House Pvt. Ltd., 2015
SAMPLE QUESTION (S)
Remember 15 20 --
Understand 15 20 --
Apply 30 25 30
Analyze 20 25 30
Evaluate 10 10 20
Create 10 -- 20
Total (%) 100 100 100
REMEMBER
1. What are the requirements of ideal highway alignment?
2. List out all types of traffic signals.
3. List out three types of sleepers.
UNDERSTAND
1. Explain the various types of pavement markings.
2. Explain summit and valley curves and the various cases when these are formed while todifferent
gradients meet.
3. Illustrate why grade separated intersections are required?
APPLY
1. The On a BG route involving high speed, A 100 m transition curve has been provided and a
superelevation of 80mm has been managed. The degree of curve is 10 and the maximum sanctioned
speed for the curved section is 170 kmph. Determine maximum permissible speed on the curve.
2. Determine the maximum permissible speed on a curve of high speed B. G track having the following
particulars:
0
(i) Degree of curve =2
(ii) Amount of Superelevation = 75mm
(iii)Length of transition curve = 140 meters
(iv)Maximum speed of the section likely to be sanctioned = 153 kmph
3. Find out the number of sleepers required for construction of BG track 960 meters long, adopting the
sleeper density as N+6. Length of each rail is 13 m.
ANALYZE
1. Compare and classify the various types of road patterns.
2. Analyze different ways of increasing the efficiency of Traffic signals
3. Examine the suitability of roundabouts for urban area.
EVALUATE
1. Compare unchannelized and channelized intersections.
2. How do you assess the performance of roundabouts?
3. Traffic rotary eliminate the crossing of traffic. Is the above statement true or false? Justify your answer.
CREATE
1. The average Normal flow of traffic on cross roads A and B during the design period are 500 and 300
PCU/Hour. The saturation flow on these roads are estimated at 1250 and 1000 PCU/ Hour respectively.
The all red time required for pedestrian crossing is 12sec. Design two Phase traffic signal by Webster’s
method.
15
69
2. The design speed = 80Kmph, Length of wheel base = 6m, width of the pavement = 10.5m. A State
highway passing through a rolling terrain has horizontal curve of radius 325m.Rate of Introduction of
Superelevation 1 in N is 1 in 150. Design the following Geometric features:
i. Superelevation
ii. Extra widening of pavement
iii. Length of Transition curve
3. The Normal movements of traffic of four intersecting roads A, B, C and D for design period are given
below. (10M)
A B C D
B C D A C D A B D A B C
350 650 150 200 150 500 550 250 200 150 600 100
Time lapse for each phase is 2 sec, Inter Green time = 4sec and width of the pavement is 7m. Design 4
phase traffic signal as per Webster method. Assume Suitable data.
70
16CE407 SOIL MECHANICS LAB

0032
Course Outcomes
1. Organize specific field investigations including collection of soil samples for testing and observation of
soil behavior/ Building damage
2. Identify and classify soil based on standard geotechnical Engineering practice
3. Determine physical and engineering properties of soil samples by performing laboratory tests
4. Develop and implement laboratory procedures to test Geotechnical engineering concept(s)
5. Analyze the behavior of soil sample under different test conditions simulating field conditions
6. Compare the design parameters with those that comply with statutory regulations
COs – POs Mapping
COs PO4 PSO#1

1 3 1
2 3 2
3 3 3
4 3 1
5 3 3
6 3 2
List of Experiments
1. Determination of Consistency Limits (Liquid, plastic and Shrinkage limit) for soil.
2. Determination of Field density with Core cutter method & Sand replacement method.
3. Determination of particle size distribution through mechanical and hydrometer analysis.
4. Determination of Optimum Moisture content and Maximum Dry Density for given soil with Proctor
Compaction Tests.
5. Determination of coefficient Permeability of soil with constant head and variable head Tests.
6. Determination of strength parameters of given soil with Unconfined Compression strength (UCS) test.
7. Determination of Consolidation characteristics of given cohesive soil by performing consolidation test.
8. Determination of Free swell index for soil.
9. Determination of Strength parameters of given soil under different drainage conditions with Triaxial
Test.
10. Determination of strength parameter of given cohesion-less soil by performing Direct Shear Test.
11. Determination of C.B.R Value of given soil with Laboratory CBR Test. (Any eight shall be conducted)
1. Classification of fine soils from suitable tests.
2. Field density determination of soils based on the site conditions.
3. Classification of coarse soils from suitable tests.
4. Determination of OMC and MDD for given soil and mention the Zero air void line and 95% air void
line.
5. Permeability determination of soils based on the site conditions.
6. Determination of strength properties of the clayey soil at a depth of 1m.
7. Determination of strength properties of the clayey soil at a depth of 10m having water table at ground
level.
8. Preparation of remoulded sample with given field conditions and determination of strength properties
of cohesionless soils.
1. Soil Mechanics Lab Manual-Civil Engineering- GMRIT, Rajam
2. Gopal Ranjan and ASR Rao, Basic and Applied Soil Mechanics, 3rd Ed.,New Age International Pvt.
Ltd, 2016
3. C.V.Ramaiah, A Text Book of Geotechnical Engineering, 3 rd Ed., New Age International Publishers,
2006
4. B.C.Punmia, Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering, 16 th Ed., Laxmi Publications, 2005
5. S. K.Gulhati & ManojDatta, Geotechnical Engineering, 4 th Ed., Tata Mc.Graw Hill Publishing
16
71
16CE408 FLUID MECHANICS AND HYDRAULIC MACHINES LAB

0032
Course Outcomes
1. Demonstrate the calibration of different flow meters
2. Estimate the coefficient of discharge for different flow conditions
3. Estimate the energy equation to pipe flow problems
4. Apply Bernoulli’s equation and Momentum equation for real fluid flow problems
5. Select the required flow rate, pressure rise and the proper pump to optimize pumping
efficiency
6. Analyze a variety of practical fluid flow devices and utilize fluid mechanics principles
in design
COs – POs Mapping
COs PO4
1 3
2 3
3 3
4 3
5 3
6 3
List of Experiments
1. Calibration of Venturimeter & Orifice meter
2. Determination of Coefficient of discharge for a small orifice by a constant head method.
3. Determination of Coefficient of discharge for an external mouth piece by variable head method.
4. Calibration of contracted Rectangular Notch and /or Triangular Notch
5. Determination of Coefficient of loss of head in a sudden contraction and friction factor.
6. Verification of Bernoulli’s equation.
7. Impact of Jet on Vanes
8. Study of Hydraulic jump.
9. Performance test on Pelton wheel turbine
10. Performance test on Francis turbine.
11. Efficiency test on Centrifugal Pump.
12. Efficiency test on Reciprocating Pump

1. Determination of co-efficient of discharge for venturiflume
2. Determination of minor losses
3. Determination of Coefficient of discharge for an external mouth piece by variable head method
4. Determination of hydraulic coefficients of orifice
5. Performance test on Pelton Wheel Turbine
6. Performance test on Single Stage Centrifugal Pump
7. Determination of coefficient of loss of head due to pipe fittings
8. Determination of Coefficient of loss of head in a sudden contraction

1. Fluid Mechanics & Hydraulic Machinery Lab Manual – Civil Engineering - GMRIT Rajam
2. Banga and Sharma ,Hydraulic Machines, 8th Ed.,Khanna Publishers, New Delhi, 2003
3. D.S. Kumar, Fluid Mechanics & Fluid Power Engineering, 8th Ed., Kataria & Sons, Publisher Of
Engineering and Computer Books, New Delhi, 2013
17
72
16CE409 TRANSPORTATION ENGINEERING LAB

0032
Course Outcomes
1. Build knowledge on quality behavior of road aggregates
2. Develop Knowledge on types of bitumen and their quality behavior
3. Utilize aggregate and bitumen properties in pavement design
4. Examine the traffic characteristics
5. Inspect traffic capacity and safety
6. Utilize traffic characteristics in pavement design
COs – POs Mapping
COs PO4 PSO#1

1 3 2
2 3 3
3 3 3
4 3 2
5 3 1
6 3 1
List of Experiments
1. Aggregate Crushing Value
2. Aggregate Impact Value
3. Specific Gravity & Water Abortion
4. Deval’s Attrition Test
5. Los Angels Abrasion Test
6. Aggregate Shape Tests
7. Bitumen Penetration Test
8. Bitumen Ductility Test
9. Bitumen Softening Point Test
10. Flash And Fire Point
11. Spot Speed Studies
12. Parking Studies
13. Traffic Volume Studies on a straight road Stretch/midblock and at Intersection

1. Compare the properties of normal and treated aggregates
2. Compare the properties of 30/40,60/70,80/100 grades of bitumen and modified bitumen
3. Study of traffic volume of Intersection- A case study
4. Design of 4-phase traffic signal system -A case study
5. Design of pavement thickness by studying subgrade strength(CBR test) and traffic volume- A case
study
6. Study of parking facilities-A case study
7. Design of effective and economical parking system-A case study
8. Study of Engineering Properties of bituminous mixes using Marshall Stability Testing Machine

1. Transportation Lab Manual- Civil Engineering- GMRIT Rajam
2. Veeraragavan, S. K. Khanna & C.E.G Justo, Highway Materials and Pavement Testing, 5th Ed., Nem
Chand & Bros. Publisher, 2013
3. L.R. Kadiyali, Traffic Engineering and Transportation Planning, Khanna Publishers, 2011
18
73
16CEI01 BUILDING MATERIALS

(Hitech Concrete Solutions Chennai Pvt Ltd, Chennai)
1001
Course Outcomes
1. Understand the role of basic building materials
2. Apply field techniques related to quality and application of building materials
Functions of building – Role of Basic Building materials – Types and Properties: Natural and Man-made – Do’s
and Don’ts in usage of basic construction materials: Cement, Steel, Concrete – Merits and demerits of RMC.
Compliance to various Codes of Practices – Issues and economics of rectification practices in the field –
Construction Chemicals.
Case studies on Properties and Application failures of Building Materials – Limitations of materials / products –
basic approach to resolving issues.
15 Hours
1. S.K. Duggal, Building Materials, New Age International (P)Limited Publisher, New Delhi, 2009
2. IS 456-2000: Plain and Reinforced Concrete- Code of Practice
74
16CEI02 BUILDING DISTRESS AND REMEDIAL MEASURES

1001
Course Outcomes
1. Understand the basic engineering aspects of various types of distresses occurring during construction of
a building
2. Investigate systematically various distresses occurring in a building and suggest / take up suitablecost-
effective remedial measures then and there at site
MAINTENANCE AND REPAIR STRATEGIES: Maintenance, Repair and Rehabilitation, Facets of

Maintenance, importance of Maintenance, Various aspects of Inspection, Assessment procedure for evaluating a
damaged structure, causes of deterioration.
STRENGTH AND DURABILITY OF CONCRETE: Quality assurance for concrete – Strength, Durability and
Thermal properties, of concrete – Cracks, different types, causes – Effects due to climate, temperature,
Sustained elevated temperature, Corrosion – Effects of cover thickness.
SPECIAL CONCRETES: Polymer concrete, Sulphur infiltrated concrete, Fibre reinforced concrete, High
strength concrete, High performance concrete, Vacuum concrete, Self compacting concrete, Geopolymer
concrete, Reactive powder concrete, Concrete made with industrial wastes.
TECHNIQUES FOR REPAIR AND PROTECTION METHODS: Non-destructive Testing Techniques, Epoxy
injection, Shoring, Underpinning, Corrosion protection techniques – Corrosion inhibitors, Corrosion resistant
steels, Coatings to reinforcement, cathodic protection.
REPAIR, REHABILITATION AND RETROFITTING OF STRUCTURES: Strengthening of Structural

elements, Repair of structures distressed due to corrosion, fire, Leakage, earthquake – DEMOLITION
TECHNIQUES – Engineered demolition methods – Case studies.
15 Hours

1. Poonam I.Modi, Chirag N.Patel, Repair and Rehabilitation of Concrete Structures, PHI Learning
Publication, New Delhi, 2016
2. CPWD Hand Book on Repair and Rehabilitation of RCC Buildings – 1996
75
16ESX1A/1B EMPLOYABILITY SKILS

0201
Verbal Reasoning syllabus
S.No Topic
1 Number series
2 Direction test
3 Blood relations
4 Syllogisms
5 Seating arrangement
6 Permutations, combinations and Probability
7 Dice
8 Cube and Cuboid
9 Data sufficiency
10 Logical deductions
11 Analogies
12 Course of action
13 Cause and effect
14 Data interpretation
15 Puzzles
Quantitative Aptitude syllabus

S.No Topic
1 Problems on numbers
2 H.C.F and L.C.M
3 Problems on ages
4 Averages
5 Time and Work
6 Time & Distance
7 Percentages
8 Profit & loss
9 Ratio & Proportions
10 Partnership
11 Simple interest & Compound interest
12 Clocks
13 Calendars
14 Pipes and Cisterns
15 Mensuration
Communication & Soft Skills

Module II for II B.Tech:
Sl No. Topic & Content No. of Periods
PART-A for 3rd Semester (16 Sessions)
1. Communication Skills & Confidence: How Communication Skills affect 02
Confidence? How to communicate effectively.(with Examples)
2. Attitude & Confidence: Attitude Vs Skills Vs Knowledge, Attitude Vs 03
Behaviour, How to develop Positive Attitude? Confidence? Fear? Steps to
Overcoming the Fear of Public Speaking?
3. Goal Setting: Vision Vs Mission Vs Goals, Why Goal Setting? SMART 02
Technique to Goal Setting, Putting First things First and Time
Management.
4. JAM & J2M Sessions: Practice & Evaluation 05
5. Public Speaking: Presentations by Students on General Topics. 03
6. Recapitulation/ Section Specific Topic 01
PART-B for 4th Semester (16 Sessions)
1. Self Esteem: Definition? Types of Self Esteem, Causes of Low Self 02
Esteem, Merits of Positive Self Esteem and Steps to build a positive Self
Esteem.
2. JAM & J2M Sessions: Practice 02
76
3. Group Discussions (Practice): GD? GD Vs Debate, Overview of a GD , 07

Skills assessed in a GD, Dos & Don’ts, & Conducting practice sessions &
Evaluation (Simple Topics).
4. Motivational Talk on Team Work: Team Vs Group? Stages in Team 02
Building, Mistakes to avoid and Lessons to Learn (Through Stories)
5. Self Introspection: Analyzing oneself to identify the drawbacks, taking 02
steps to overcome them in stages, Fortifying the Strengths further (through
SWOT Analysis).
Total Periods 32
77
16CE501 CONCRETE TECHNOLOGY

3024
Course Outcomes
1. Demonstrate a comprehensive Overview and understanding of hydration mechanism in concrete
2. Distinguish on different types of Cements & concrete
3. Classification of the properties of cement, sand, coarse aggregate water & admixtures
4. Interpret & understand the main operations of concreting i.e. selection of materials
its mix Proportioning, mixing, placing, compaction, curing & finishing
5. Develop the skill of testing, supervision of concrete work & interpretation of tests results
6. Perceiving & broadening the knowledge of new concrete types and their design methods, testing
and applications.
COs–POs Mapping
COs PO4 PSO#1
1 2 1
2 3 2
3 2 2
4 2 3
5 3 3
6 3 3
Unit I
Cements and Admixtures
Cements: Different grades of cement, properties. Test on physical properties of cement as per bis specifications
structure of hydrated cement, setting and hydration of cement, physical and chemical properties, concept of
strength development. Bouges compounds
Admixtures:Mineral admixtures- fly ash, silica fume, ggbs and chemical admixtures- plasticizers, accelerators,
retarders .
Optimum quantity of Gypsum in Cement-Properties of Admixtures
Practical Components
1. Testing of Cement properties. mineral admixtures and their uses properties
10+9 Hours
Unit II
Aggregates and Fresh Concrete
Aggregates:Classification, properties, grading (Sieve analysis of Fine Aggregate & Grading coarse Aggregates),
requirements of aggregate for mortar and concrete, Particle shape & texture – Bond, strength & other
mechanical properties of aggregate. Deleterious substance in aggregate and its effect on strength of concrete –
Soundness of aggregate – Alkali aggregate reaction – Thermal properties. Maximum aggregate size.
Fresh Concrete: Workability – Factors affecting workability – Measurement of workability by different tests –
Setting times of concrete – Effect of time and temperature on workability – Problem of Segregation, bleeding
and Laittance. – Mixing and vibration of concrete – Steps in manufacture of concrete – Quality of mixing water.
Curing and its types.
Workability with Half Round Aggregate-Workabiity with Half Angular Aggregate
1. Testing of Aggregate properties. Workability tests, slump cone, compaction tests
10+9 Hours
Unit III
Hardened Concrete, Non-Destructive Testing, Elasticity, Creep & Shrinkage
Hardened Concrete, Non-Destructive Testing:Water / Cement ratio – Abram’s Law – Gel space ratio. Nature of
strength of concrete – Maturity concept – Strength in tension & compression. Compression and Tension tests.
Factors affecting strength of concrete– Flexure tests – Splitting tests – Relation between compression & tensile
strength.
Methods & Principles of NDT. Conventional vs. Non-Destructive Testing. Rebound hammer, ultrasonic pulse
velocity, pull out test, impact echo test. Elasticity, Creep & Shrinkage: Modulus of elasticity – Dynamic
modulus of elasticity – Posisson’s ratio .Creep of concrete – Factors influencing creep – Relation between creep
& time – Nature of creep – Effects of creep – Shrinkage – types of shrinkage.
Optimum Dosage of Plasticisers in Concrete-Halfcell Potentiometer
78
1. Testing of Hardened concrete properties. Split tensile test., flexure test
10+9 Hours
Unit IV
Concrete Mix Design and Special Concretes
Concrete Mix Design:Introduction, object of mix design, factors to be considered, statistical quality control.
Introduction to different methods of mix design. Concrete mix design by I.S. method.
Special Concretes: Light weight aggregate concrete – Cellular concrete – No-fines Concrete. High density
concrete, high performance concrete, Self consolidating concrete, SIFCON (Slurry Infiltrated fiber Concrete).
Fiber reinforced concrete – Different types of fibers – Factors affecting properties of F.R.C – Applications.
Polymer concrete – Types of Polymer concrete– Applications. PaperCrete concrete; under water concreting,
concreting in extreme weather Conditions.
Papercrete Concrete-Tremie Concrete
1. Concrete Mix Design by Indian Standard Method, Special concretes
15+3 Hours
Total:45+30Hours
Note: IS 10262-2009 is permitted in the examination.
Textbook (s)
1. A.M.Neville, Properties of Concrete, 4th Ed., Low Priced Edition, Prentice Hall Publishers, 2009
2. M.S.Shetty, Concrete Technology: Theroy and Practice, 13 th Ed., S.Chand & Co, 2004
3. IS 10262-2009. Concrete Mix Proportioning Guidelines.
Reference (s)
1. M.L.Gambhir, Concrete Technology, 5th Ed., Tata Mc.Graw Hill Publishers New Delhi, 2013
2. A.R. Santha Kumar, Concrete Technology by, 10 th Ed., Oxford University Press, New Delhi- -2014
3. A.M. Neville and J.J. Brooks, Concrete Technology, 10 th Ed., Pearson Publications, 2004
4. S.P. Shah, S.H. Ahmad and Edward Arnold, High Performance Concretes and Applications,5 thEd.,
Taylor and Francis Publishers, 2013
5. P.C.Aitcin, High-Performance Concrete, 1st Ed., E&FN Spon Publications, 1998
Sample Question (S)

Cognitive Level Int. Test 1 (%) Int. Test 2 (%) Lab Assessment 19(%)
Remember 50 50 --
Understand 25 10 --
Apply 25 15 50
Analyze -- 20 30
Evaluate -- 05 20
Create -- -- --
Total (%) 100 100 100
Remember
1. What is cement?
2. Why gypsum is added to the cement?
3. What are advantages of using Slag?
4. What are the major compounds in cement?
5. What is the most common pozzolona used in the cement?
6. List different tests performed on cement.
7. What is the test performed to know durability of cement?
79
Understand
1. Explain the consequences when cement added to high alumina cement.

2. Demonstrate the conditions should slag not be used in cement.
3. Explain the consequences of conversion of sulphate resisting cement.
4. Illustrate the expansive property of expansive cements.
5. Explain the procedure of specific gravity of cement.
6. Explain the procedure of tensile strength of the cement.
7. Explain the process of Hardening in cement.
8. Explain the uses of hardened cement.
Apply
1. Identify how shrinkage happens in concrete.

2. Identify different types of shrinkages in concrete.
3. Identify differences between gel pores and capillary pores.
Analyze
1. Examine the various tests to be done on Hardened concrete to find the quality assessment of concrete.
2. Inspect various factors influencing the strength results of hardened concrete.
Evaluate
1. Calculate the gel space ratio and the theoretical strength of a sample of concrete made with 500 gm of
cement with 0.45 water / cement ratio on full hydration and at 60% hydration.
19
Lab assessment will be done based on the day to day performance and internal examination
80
16CE502 STRUCTURAL ANALYSIS I

3103
Course Outcomes
1. Analyze cables subjected to uniformly distributed load and concentrated loads
2. Analyze the reactions at every cross section in propped cantilevers and fixed beams for all practical
loadings
3. Analyze the reactions at every cross section in a continuous beam for all practical loadings
4. Compute the deflections in a simply supported beams, and pin jointed trusses using Castigliano’s
theorem-I
5. Determine the Static and Kinematic indeterminacy in continuous beams and trusses
6. Model the determinate beams for practical moving load combinations to obtain design forces
COs–POs Mapping
COs PO1 PO2
1 3 2
2 2 3
3 2 3
4 3 2
5 3 1
6 2 3
Unit I
Cables & Suspension bridges and Propped Cantilevers
Cables and suspension bridges: General cable theorem-analysis of cables under concentrated and uniformly
distributed loads-Cables with ends at different levels- Forces on anchor cables-effect of temperature on cable-
Suspension bridges with stiffening girders(basic concepts only) - Propped Cantilevers: Indeterminate Structural
Analysis –Determination of static and kinematic indeterminate of beams-Analysis of propped cantilevers-shear
force and bending moment diagrams-Deflection of propped cantilevers.
Effect of temperature on cable,, Deflection of propped cantilevers
11+4 Hours
Unit II
Fixed beams and Continuous Beams
Fixed beams: Introduction to statically indeterminate beams with uniformly distributed load, central point load
and eccentric point load. Number of point loads, uniformly varying load, couple and combination of loads, shear
force and bending moment diagrams - Deflection of fixed beams, effect of sinking of support, effect of rotation
of a support - Continuous Beams: Introduction-Clapeyron’s theorem of three moments- Analysis of continuous
beams with constant moment of inertia with one or both ends fixed-continuous beams with overhang,
continuous beams with different moment of inertia for different spans-Effects of sinking of supports-shear force
and Bending moment diagrams.
Effect of sinking of support, Effect of rotation of a support
11+4 Hours
Unit III
Energy Theorems and Indeterminate Structural Analysis
Energy Theorems: Introduction-Strain energy in linear elastic system, expression of strain energy due to axial
load, bending moment and shear forces - Castigliano’s first theorem-Deflections of simple beams and pin
jointed trusses -Indeterminate Structural Analysis: Determination of static and kinematic indeterminacy of
frames and trusses –Solution of trusses up to two degrees of internal and external indeterminacies –Castigliano’s
theorem-II.
Deflections of pin jointed trusses, kinematic indeterminacy of frames and trusses
11+3 Hours
Unit IV
Influence Lines and Moving Loads
Influence Lines: Definition of influence line for SF, Influence line for BM- load position for maximum SF at a
section-Load position for maximum BM at a section single point load, uniformly distributed load longer than the
span, uniformly distributed load shorter than the span - Influence lines for forces in members of Pratt and
Warren trusses - Moving Loads: Introduction maximum SF and BM at a given section and absolute maximum
81
S.F. and B.M due to single concentrated load U.D load longer than the span, U.D load shorter than the span, two
point loads with fixed distance between them and several point loads-Equivalent uniformly distributed load.
Equivalent uniformly distributed load,Influence lines for forces in members of Warren trusses
12+4 Hours
Total:45+15 Hours
Textbook (s)
1. V.N. Vazirani, M.M Ratwani and S.K. Duggal, ‘Analysis of Structures-Vol I’, 17th Ed.,, Khanna
Publishers, New Delhi,2015
2. V.N. Vazirani, M.M Ratwani and S.K. Duggal, ‘Analysis of Structures-Vol II’, 16th Ed., Khanna
Publishers, New Delhi,2015
3. C.S. Reddy, Basic structural Analysis, 3rd Ed., Tata McGraw-Hill Education, New Delhi, 2011
Reference (s)
1. S.B.Junnarkar, Mechanics of Structures Vol.I, 31 st Ed., Charotar Publishing House, 2015.
2. S.B.Junnarkar, Mechanics of Structures Vol.II, 24th Ed., Charotar Publishing House, 2015
3. T.S. Thandavamoorthy, Analysis of Structures, 1 st Ed., Oxford University Press, New Delhi, 2011.
SAMPLE QUESTION (S)

Remember 10 10 --
Understand 10 10 --
Apply 30 30 30
Analyze 50 50 50
Evaluate -- -- --
Create -- -- 20
Total (%) 100 100 100
REMEMBER
1. State the Castigliano’s theorem-I and mention its application in trusses.
2. Define influence line.
3. Write down the equation for strain energy due to axial force.
4. Give the three moment equation for the analysis of continuous beam with and without settlement.
UNDERSTAND
1. What is the strain energy stored in the simply supported beam ‘L’ subjected to a U.D.L of intensity of
‘w’ kN/m ?
2. Show the reactions in a fixed beam of length ‘L’ subjected to a settlement of ‘’ at right support in a
downward direction?
3. Contrast between Statically determinate structures and Indeterminate structures?
4. Show the reactions in a fixed beam of length ‘L’ subjected to a rotation of ‘’ at right support in anti-
clockwise direction??
APPLY
1. Solve for the static indeterminacy of the frames / trusses shown below?
2. A continuous beam loaded as shown in figure determine the support moments. Take EI = Constant. E =
200 GPa, I = 8× 106 mm4. Solve for all the support moments
20
82
ANALYZE
1. A system of concentrated loads role a simply supported beam of span 10 m from left to right with10
KN load leading. Calculate the absolute maximum positive and negative shear in the beam. Also
Calculate the absolute max BM?
2. a) A live load of 15 kN/m, 5 m long moves on a girder simply supported on a span of 13 m. Find the
maximum shear force that can occur at a section 6 m from the left end.Also find the maximum bending
moment that can occur at a section 6 m from the left end.
3. Analyze the fixed-fixed beam which is loaded by a concentrated load of 20 kN at a point 5 m from the
left support. The span of the beam is 12 m. Use method of consistent deformations. EI is constant.
4. Examine for the horizontal deflection of joint C of truss ABCD loaded as shown in Fig. Assume that,
all members have the same axial rigidity.
83
16CE503 FOUNDATION ENGINEERING

3103
Course Outcomes
1. Define geotechnical engineering and the process of exploration for different type of geotechnical
engineering projects
2. Know the importance of soil properties and design requirements
3. Define the forces and activities that provoke slope failures and estimate the stability of slopes with
simple geometry and geological features
4. Explain and determine lateral earth pressures using Rankine’s and Coulomb’s methods
5. Illustrate the types of retaining walls and modes of failure
6. Find out the safe bearing capacity of soils
COs–POs Mapping
COs PO2 PO3 PSO#2
1 2 1 1
2 1 3 3
3 2 2 3
4 3 2 3
5 3 3 3
6 3 2 3
Unit I
Soil Exploration and Earth Slope Stability
Soil exploration: Methods of soil exploration – Boring and Sampling methods – Field tests – Penetration Tests –
Plate load test – planning of Programme- preparation of soil investigation report.
Earth slope stability: Infinite and finite earth slopes – types of failures – factor of safety of infinite slopes:
stability analysis- Bishop’s Simplified method – Taylor’s Stability Number- Stability of slopes of earth dams
under different conditions
Stability Analysis by Swedish Arc Method
12+4 Hours
Unit II
Earth Pressure Theories and Retaining Walls
Earth pressure theories: Rankine’s theory of earth pressure – earth pressures in layered soils – Coulomb’s earth
pressure theory – Culmann’s graphical method.
Retaining walls: Types of retaining walls – stability of retaining walls
Modes of Failures of Retaining Walls
10+3 Hours
Unit III
Shallow Foundations and Settlement Analysis
Shallow foundations: Types - choice of foundation – Location of depth – Safe Bearing Capacity – IS Methods.
Safe bearing pressure based on N- value
Settlement analysis: Allowable bearing pressure; safe bearing capacity and settlement from plate load test –
allowable settlements of structures
SBC- Mayerhoff Skempton Method
10+4 Hours
Unit IV
Pile Foundation and Well Foundations
Pile foundation: Types of piles – Load carrying capacity of piles based on static pile formulae –Pile load tests
- Load carrying capacity of pile groups.
Well foundations: Types – Different shapes of wells – Components of wells – functions- construction of well
foundations- Sinking of wells – Tilts and shifts
Dynamic pile formulae
13+4 Hours
Total: 45+15 Hours
84
Textbook (s)
1. Gopal Ranjan & ASR Rao, Basic and Applied Soil Mechanics, 3 rd Ed., New Age International Pvt. Ltd,
2016
2. K.R.Arora, Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering, 5 th Ed., Standard Publishers Distributors,
Delhi, 2000
Reference (s)
1. Das, B.M., Principles of Foundation Engineering, 7th Ed., Cengege Learning India Pvt. Ltd., 2014
2. Bowles, J.E., Foundation Analysis and Design, 4th Ed., McGraw-Hill Publishing Company, Newyork,
1988
3. S. K.Gulhati & Manoj Datta, Geotechnical Engineering, 4th Ed., Tata Mc.Graw Hill Publishing
4. B.C.Punmia, Ashok Kumar Jain and Arun Kumar Jain, Soil Mechanics and Foundations, 16th Ed.,
Laxmi Publications Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, 2005
SAMPLE QUESTION (S)

Remember 10 10 --
Understand 20 20 --
Apply 30 30 30
Analyze 40 30 50
Evaluate -- 10 20
Create -- -- --
Total (%) 100 100 100
REMEMBER
1. Differentiate Disturbed and Undisturbed soil samples in detail. Explain different procedures for
collection of UDS
2. Write a detailed note on “Geophysical Methods” used as part of Geotechnical investigations
3. State and explain the assumptions in Terazaghi’s Bearing Capacity Theory
4. Explain step by step procedure for sinking of a well foundation with a neat sketch
5. What are the functions of well foundations and explain in detailed?
6. Explain the pile load test with help of neat sketch and graph. What is the importance of this test in
connection with pile foundations
UNDERSTAND
1. Explain how stability of an earthen dam is affected under different seepage conditions, with the help of
neatly drawn sketches
2. For adsorption in dilute liquid solutions in stage wise counter current operation, where the Freundlich
equation describes the adsorption equilibrium, derive analytical expression in terms of n, m, Y0 and
YNp for the minimum adsorbent / solvent ratio when fresh adsorbent is used
3. Differentiate local stability with global stability of the retaining systems
4. What is “Negative skin friction” explain how the same is worked out and taken in to account in the
design of piles
APPLY
1. Describe how “Culmann’s Graphical method” is used for computation of active earth pressure
2. A batch of water containing the residual chlorine from a treating process, at a concentration 12 ppm, is
to be treated activated carbon at 25°C to reduce the chlorine concentration to 0.5 ppm. The equilibrium
distribution coefficient =C*/X=0.8(kg Cl2/m3 solution)/(kg Cl2/kg carbon). Calculate the minimum
mass of carbon/unit volume of water which can be used
3. The following date was obtained from a plate load test carried out on a 60cm square test plate at a
depth of 2m below ground surface on a sandy soil which extends up to a large depth. Determine the
settlement of a foundation 3.0m X 3.0m carrying a load of 100t and located at a depth of 3.0m below
ground surface. Water table is obtained at a large depth from the ground surface
21
85
Load intensity, t/m2 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40
Settlement, mm 2 4 7.5 11 16.3 23.5 34 45
4. Explain the different types of sampling methods. Mention the type of sample obtained in each and
explain the suitability depends on the type of soils
ANALYZE
1. It is proposed to construct a highway embankment using a c-Φ soil having c=20kPa ; Φ=10°, γ=17
kN/cum. Determine the critical height up to which the embankment can be built with an inclination of
29° with a factor of safety of 1.50. Given the Taylor’s stability number for the conditions as 0.0737
2. A 7m high retaining wall is supporting a back fill consisting of two types of soils. The water table is
located at a depth of 5m below the top. A capillary raise of 0.90m was found. The properties of soil
from 0 to 3m include c=0 kN/sqm ; Φ=18° ; γ=16.50 kN/cum and those for soil from 3m to 7m include
c=0 kN/sqm ; Φ=36° ; γ=18 kN/cum, γsub =20 kN/cum. A surcharge of 200 kPa is applied on the top
of backfill. Plot the distribution of active earth pressure and determine the magnitude and point of
application of total active earth pressure acting on the retaining wall
3. A gravity retaining wall of height 3m with uniform thickness (ie. rectangular in cross section) of 1.20m
is constructed in RRM with a unit weight of 24 kN/cum. The average properties of soil from top to
bottom of wall include c=0 kN/sqm ; Φ=30°. Subsequently, 1m high fill is placed on top of the existing
backfill after constructing a 0.60m thick wall above the existing wall matching with the backfill side
face of wall (ie., the offset is provided on the otherside of backfill) Analyse the stability of wall against
overturning before and after raising the height of backfill
4. A SPT was conducted at a depth of 3m below the GL. The observations were recorded as 14/18/24.
The correction for over burden was read as 1. Apply correction for dilatancy. If a 2m wide square
footing is proposed at this level, estimate the allowable bearing pressure for a permissible settlement of
40mm based on the penetration resistance (N” value) as per IS:6403-1981
EVALUATE
1. Evaluate the selection of foundation location based on soil condition
2. Evaluate the assumptions made in Coulomb’s Wedge theory
3. How do tension cracks influence the distribution of active earth pressure in pure cohesion?
4. What are the design criteria to be satisfied for the stability of a gravity retaining wall? Indicate briefly
how you ensure the same
86
16CE504 DESIGN OF STEEL STRUCTURES

1033
Course Outcomes
1. Apply the basic requirements of the IS design specifications
2. Choose the suitable I.S Rolled Steel Sections for design
3. Apply the concepts of strain compatibility and equilibrium concepts to determine the strength of
members made of steel
4. Design of Bolted & Welded connections between the steel members
5. Design of Steel Members subjected to Tension, Compression Flexure and combination of same
6. Design of Gantry Girders and Plate Girders subjected to Loadings
COs–POs Mapping
COs PO3 PO10 PSO#2
1 3 1 2
2 2 1 3
3 2 1 3
4 3 3 3
5 3 3 3
6 3 3 3
Unit I
Design of Welded Connections
Properties of Structural Steel, I. S. Rolled Sections, I. S. Specifications, Lap and Butt Connections, Eccentric
Connections.
Welded Connections: Advantages and disadvantages of welding- Strength of welds-Butt and fillet welds:
Permissible stresses – IS Code requirements. Design of welds fillet weld subjected to moment acting in the
plane and at right angles to the plane of the joints, beam to beam and beam to Column connections only.
Properties of British Standard Structural Sections- Design of Bolted Moment Connections
11 + 4 Hours
Unit II
Design of Tension Members and Compression Members
Introduction to different modes of failures – gross section yielding, Net Section rupture and block shear failure.
Determines the design strength due to yielding of gross section, rupture of critical section and block shear.
Design procedure of tension members.(simple problems)
Compression Members: Effective length of columns. Slenderness ratio – permissible stresses. Design procedure
of compression members - Design of built-up sections (Laced and Battened Columns)
Tension Member Subjected to UDL Along the Longitudinal Axis
11 + 4 Hours
Unit III
Beams and Foundations
Allowable stresses, design requirements as per IS Code-Design of simple and compound beams, check for
deflection, shear, buckling, check for bearing, laterally supported beams only.
Foundations: Column bases: Slab base, Gusset base.
Beam Subjected to Minor and Major Axis Loading
11 + 4 Hours
Unit IV
Plate Girder and Gantry Girder
Introduction, elements of plate girder, design steps of a plate girder, necessity of stiffeners in plate girder,
various types of stiffeners, web and flange splices (only introduction)
Gantry Girders: Introduction, various loads, specifications, design of gantry girder Gantry Girder Design
Temperature Effect on Plate Girder, Temperature Effect on Plate Girder
11 + 4 Hours
Total: 44+16 Hours
87
Note: All the designs should be taught in the limit state design method as per IS 800-2007.welding connections
to be used.
Drawings: 1. Detailing of Welded Connection In Plane And Perpendicular To plane.
2. Detailing of built up columns, laced and battened columns.
3. Detailing of Plate girder including curtailment, splicing and stiffeners.
4. Detailing of Gantry girder including curtailment, splicing and stiffeners.
5. Detailing of Slab Base, Gusseted Base.
Textbook (s)
1. N. Subramanian, Steel Structures (Design & Practice), Oxford University Press, 2011
2. S.K. Duggal, Design of Steel Structures, 2nd Ed., Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi, 2014
3. S.S. Bhavikatti, Design of Steel Structures by Limit State Method as per IS: 800-2007, 4th Ed., IK
International Publishing House, Bangalore, 2014
Reference (s)
1. V.L.Shah and Veena Gore, Limit State Design of steel structures as per IS: 800-2007, Structures
Publications, Pune, 2010
2. Sai Ram, Design of steel Structures, 2nd Ed., Pearson Publications, 2013
3. M.R Shiyekar, Limit State Design in Structural Steel,3rd Ed., PHI learning private limited, New Delhi,
2011
SAMPLE QUESTION (S)

Cognitive Level Int. Test 1 (%) Int. Test 2 (%) Assesment pattern for
drawing sheets
Remember - -
Understand - -
Apply 20 20 Based on submitted
Analyze 20 20 drawing sheets
Evaluate 60 60
Create -- --
Total (%) 100 100 --
APPLY
1) Design a hanger joint as shown in below fig to carry a factored load of 300 kN. Use an end plate of
size 250mm × 150mm and appropriate thickness of M24 HSFG bolts(2 nos) and Fe410 steel for
end plate (fy = 250 MPa)
2) Design a pin for the tension link shown in fig. Use plates of Fe410 (f y = 250 MPa)
Assesment Pattern is based on submitted drawing sheets
88
3) A member of truss consists of two angles 75 × 75 × 6 placed back to back. It carries an ultimate
tensile load of 150 kN and is connected to gusset plate 8-mm thick placed in between the two
connected legs. Determine the no of 16mm- diameter 4.6 grade ordinary bolts required for the
joint. Assume the fu of plate as 410 MPa.
4) The plates of a 6mm thick tank are connected by a single bolted lap joint with 20mm diameter
bolts are 60mm pitch. Calculate the efficiency of joint. Take fu of plate as 410 Mpa and assume 4.6
grade bolts.
ANALYZE
1) Design a lap joint between 2 plates as shown in fig so as to transmit a factored load of 70kN using
M16 bolts of grade 4.6 and grade 410 plates.
2) Calculate the efficiency of a zigzag double bolted lap joint as shown in fig. assume Fe410 grade
plate and grade 4.6 bolts of diameter 20mm and 8mm thick plates.
3) A single bolted double cover butt joint is used to connect two plates 6mm thick (See fig).
Assuming the bolts of 20mm diameter and 60mm pitch, calculate tha efficiency of joint. Use 410
Mpa plates and 4.6 grade bolts.
89
4) Two plates 10mm amd 18mm thick are to be jointed by a double cover butt joint. Assuming cover
plates of 8mm thickness, design the load to transmit a factored load of 500 kN. Assume Fe410
plate and grade 4.6 bolt.
EVALUATE
1) Design a butt joint to connect two plates 175 × 10mm (Fe410 grade) using M20 bolts. Arrange the
bolts to give maximum efficiency.
2) Determine the adequacy of the fasteners in fig when 20mm diameter grade 4.6 bolts are used.
Assume that the strength of column flange and structural T(ST) sections do not govern the design.
Neglect prying action
3) An ISMB 600 is connected to a column by web cleats with a single row of bolts. If the reactionis
350 kN and there are four 20mm diameter bolts through the web as shown in fig. check if the
section is adequate for block shear failure
4) Design a connection of truss joint as shown in fig. using M16 black bolts of property class 4.6 and
grade 410 steel. Assume that the members shown are capable of resisting the loads.
90
91
16CE505 WATER RESOURCES ENGINEERING I

3103
Course Outcomes
1. Identify the components of hydrological cycle
2. Estimate average rainfall, direct run off from total rain fall, groundwater flow and flood discharge in
the catchment area
3. Develop Hydrograph for a given catchment
4. Examine the aquifer properties and assess the yield of the aquifer
5. Estimate duty and delta, depth and frequency of irrigation to improve the irrigation efficiency
6. Design of irrigation canals suitable for different type of soils
COs–POs Mapping
COs PO2 PO3
1 1 3
2 2 2
3 3 3
4 1 3
5 2 3
6 3 3

Unit I
Precipitation and Abstractions
Engineering hydrology and its applications, Hydrologic cycle. Types and forms of precipitation, rainfall
measurement, types of rain gauges, rain gauge network, average rainfall over a basin, consistency of rainfall
data, frequency of rainfall, intensity duration-frequency curves, probable maximum precipitation, factors
affecting evaporation, measurement of evaporation, evaporation reduction, factors affecting evapotranspiration,
measurement of evapotranspiration, factors affecting infiltration, measurement of infiltration, infiltration
indices.
Double Ring Infiltrometer-Effects of Sea Water on Hydrological Cycle
11+3 Hours
Unit II
Runoff and Floods
Factors affecting runoff, components of runoff, computation of runoff-rational and SCS Methods, separation of
base flow, Stream gauging, direct and indirect methods, Causes and effects, definition of Unit Hydrograph,
assumptions, derivation of Unit Hydrograph, unit hydrographs of different durations, principle of superposition
and S-hydrograph methods, limitations and applications of UH, Synthetic Unit Hydrograph, flood frequency
analysis-Gumbel’s method, log Pearson type III method, flood control methods
Effects of Impervious Cover on Groundwater Recharge- Hydrograph Analysis
11 + 3 Hours
Unit III
Ground Water and Irrigation
Ground Water : Occurrence, types of aquifers, aquifer parameters, porosity, specific yield, Permeability,
transmissivity and storage coefficient, types of wells, Darcy’s law, Dupuit’s equation steady Radial flow to
wells in confined and unconfined aquifers, yield of an open well-recuperation test; Irrigation : Necessity and
Importance of Irrigation, advantages and ill effects of Irrigation, types of Irrigation, methods of application of
Irrigation water, water logging and drainage, standards of quality for Irrigation water, principal crops and crop
seasons, crop rotation.
Pumping Test- Modern Irrigation Techniques
11 + 3 Hours
92
Unit IV
Soil-Water-Plant Relationship and Design of Canals
Vertical distribution of soil moisture, soil moisture tension, Consumptive use, estimation of consumptive use,
factors affecting duty, depth and frequency of Irrigation, irrigation efficiencies. Classification of canals, design
of canals by Kennedy’s and Lacey’s theories, balancing depth of cutting, canal lining, design of lined canal,
economics of canal lining.
Advantages of Longitudinal Slope of the Canal- Necessity of Irrigation in India
12 + 6 Hours
Total:45+15 Hours
Textbook (s)
1. K. Subramanya, Engineering Hydrology, 4 th Ed., Tata McGraw-Hill Education Private Limited, 2013
2. P.N.Modi, Irrigation Water Resources & Water Power,9 th Ed., Standard Book House, 2014
3. K.R.Arora, Irrigation, Water Power and Water Resources Engineering, 4 th Revised Ed., Standard
Publishers, New Delhi, 2014
Reference (s)
1. VenTe Chow, Hand Book of Applied Hydrology,4th Ed.,Tata-McGraw Hill, 1988
2. P. Jayarami Reddy, A Text Book of Hydrology, 3 rd Ed., Laxmi publications pvt. Ltd., New Delhi,2016
3. H.M Raghunath, Hydrology : Principles, Analysis & Design,3rd Ed., New Age International Publishers,
2014
4. S.K Garg,Irrigation and Hydraulic structures, 31 st Ed., Khanna Publishers, 2016
5. B.C. Punmia & Lal, Irrigation and Water Power engineering, Revised 16 th Ed., Laxmi publications
Pvt.Ltd.,New Delhi, 2016
SAMPLE QUESTION (S)

Remember 10 10 10
Understand 20 20 10
Apply 30 30 30
Analyze 30 30 30
Evaluate 10 10 20
Create -- -- --
Total (%) 100 100 100
REMEMBER
1. Define unit hydrograph.
2. What are the different Types and forms of precipitation?
3. Write importance of the synthetic unit hydrograph
4. Define confined and unconfined aquifers.
5. Define evaporation and evapotranspiration.
6. What is meant by stream gauging?
7. What is the importance of the irrigation?
UNDERSTAND
1. Briefly explain the significant features of global water balance studies, also discuss the hydrologic
cycle with neat sketch.
2. Explain the rational method for determination of peak of a catchment. Write its advantages and
disadvantages. Enumerate its limitations.
3. Differentiate between the Unit hydrograph and Synthetic Unit Hydrograph. Give its limitations and
applications.
4. Compare advantages of the kenndey’s theory over the lacey’s theory in canal designs.
5. Derive the equation for steady state flow of water in a homogeneous and isotropic condition.
93
APPLY
1. What is the actual velocity in the aquifer, if the elevation of water table in an unconfined aquifer at two
location separated by a distance of 100 m is 1026.2 m and 1025.0 m respectively? If the permeability
of the aquifer is 12 m/day and porosity is 15 percent.
2. A catchment has five rain-gauge stations and the annual precipitations are 900, 1100, 1750, 950, and
1250 mm respectively. Find the extra number required or not if error in estimation is limited to 10
percent.
3. Find the delta for a crop if the duty for a base period of 110 days is 80 acres/cusecs and 1400
hectares/cumecs.
4. A channel section has discharge Q = 30cumecs, Silt Factor f= 1.00, Side slopes = ½:1 then find also the
longitudinal slope.
ANALYZE
1. In a watershed, the expected one-hour rainfall intensity is 6.25 cm, the watershed area is 50 ha, of
which 30 ha is pasture on 7% slope and 20 ha is cultivated on 3% slope, and the length of run is 720 m
on a 4% slope. Determine the peak runoff rate for a 10-year recurrence interval, when the type of soil
for cultivated crops is silt clay and for pasture it is clay and silt loam. Assuming the value of C for
respective soils for cultivated crops on 3% slope is 0.5 and for pasture land on 77% slope is 0.36
2. The shape of a catchment is in the form of a pentagon ABCDE. There are 4 rain gauge stations P, Q, R
& S inside the catchment. The position coordinates in km are (0,0), B(50,75), C(100,70), D(150,0),
E(75,-50), P(50,25), Q(100,25), R(100,-25) & S(50,-25). If the rainfalls recorded at P, Q, R & S are 88,
102, 112, 116mm respectively, determine the average depth of rainfall over the catchment using
Thiessen polygon method.
3. Given below are the observed flows a storm of 6 hour duration on a stream with a catchment of 600
km2. Derive the ordinates of a 6 hour unit hydrograph. Assume the base flow as zero.
TIME (min) 0 6 12 18 24 30 36 42 48 54 60
DISCHARGE(m3/sec) 0 100 200 150 90 60 30 15 10 5 0
4. The elevation of water table in an unconfined aquifer at two location separated by a distance of 100 m
is 1026.2 m and 1025.0 m respectively. If the permeability of the aquifer is 12 m/day and porosity is 15
percent, What is the actual velocity in the aquifer?
5. The shape of a catchment is in the form of a pentagon ABCDE. There are 4 rain gauge stations P, Q, R
& S inside the catchment. The position coordinates in km are (0,0), B(50,75), C(100,70), D(150,0),
E(75,-50), P(50,25), Q(100,25), R(100,-25) & S(50,-25). If the rainfalls recorded at P, Q, R & S are 88,
102, 112, 116mm respectively, determine the average depth of rainfall over the catchment using
Thiessen polygon method.
EVALUATE
1. Evaluate a 3hours unit hydrograph for an ungauged basin from the following data. L= 32 km Lc =
25km. Area of catchment A = 325KM2.Assume Ct = 0.90 and Cp 1.80.
2. A Culvert is proposed across a stream draining an area of 185 hectares. The catchment area has a
slope of 0.004 and the length of travelling for water is 1150m. Evaluate the 25 years flood if the rain
fall is given by
a. Ri = 1000Tr 0.2/ (t+20)0.7
b. Where Ri is mm/h, Tr is in years is in minutes. Assume a runoff coefficient I =0.35
23
Assignment Test should contain only questions related to Higher Order Thinking (HOT) Skill
94
16CE001 CONSTRUCTION TECHNOLOGY (ELECTIVE I)

3103
Course Outcomes
1. Outline the knowledge of construction of substructures and superstructures
2. Analyze the techniques of Erection of Construction units
3. Demonstrate basic knowledge about Construction equipment and machinery
4. Discuss about hauling and conveying equipment
5. Demonstrate the ability to identify and manage with respect to time and their motion with respect to
their movements
6. Agree the importance of mechanization of construction
COs–POs Mapping
COs PO5
1 1
2 2
3 3
4 2
5 3
6 1
Unit I
Substructure and Superstructure
Digging and excavation of trenches– Grading– Special earth work excavation– Drilling and blasting techniques.
Pile driving techniques– sinking wells.
Concrete and reinforced concrete works– form work– reinforcement– concreting– mechanized methods of
errection of Buildings and installations. Cast-in-situ and pre-cast concrete, Concreting below G.L. – wall in situ
method for cast in situ and precast concrete.
Well Caissons- Pre Engineered Buildings
12 + 4 Hours
Unit II
Erection of Construction Units, Construction Equipment and Machinery
Different types– scaffolding, Erection of steel structures– Tunneling techniques. Precast and prefabricated
construction – need and advantages
Earthmoving Equipment Power shovels, Back hoe, Dragline, Clam shell; Tunneling machine – types, Hoisting
equipment – such as hoist winch, hoisting chains, and hooks and slings, various types of cranes –tower crane,
mobile crane and derrick crane. Their characteristics, performance and safety in operation.
Form work- Hauling Equipment
12 + 4 Hours
Unit III
Concrete Mixers
Concrete mixers, truck mixers, pneumatic concrete placer, concrete vibrators. Pile Driving Equipment -
Tunneling and rock drilling equipment – Pumps and dewatering equipment.
Ready Mix Concrete- Rock Bolting
10 + 3 Hours
Unit IV
Time and Motion Studies, Management of Construction Equipment
Process charts – application of queuing or wait line models management of construction equipment
Need for mechanization of construction – planning and financing construction plant and equipment – Owning
and operating equipment versus hiring – planning for infrastructure mechanization equipment management –
equipment maintenance and repair.
Layouts- Optimization of Machinery Utilization
95
Textbook (s)
1. Robert L.P and J.S.Clifford, Construction Planning Equipment Methods. 2nd Ed., Tata Mc Graw Hill,
2003.
2. S.Seetharaman, Construction Engineering and Management, 4th Ed., Umesh publications, New Delhi,
1999.
3. Mahesh varma, Construction Equipment and its Palnning and Applications, 5th Ed., Metroplolitan
Book Co. Publishers, 2005.
Reference (s)
1. Sengupta and Guha, Construction Management and Planning, 2nd Ed., Tata Mc Graw Hill, 2002.
2. Rangwala, S.C., Construction of Structures and Management of Works, 5 th Ed., (Charotar publishers),
2005.
3. Srivatsava, U.K., Construction Planning and Management, 1st Ed., Galgotia Publications Pvt. Ltd.,
1999.
4. Peurifoy, R.L., Construction Planning, Equipment and Methods, 2nd Ed., Tata McGraw-Hill
Education, 1996.
SAMPLE QUESTION (S)

Remember 30 -- --
Understand 50 10 --
Apply 20 30 30
Analyze -- 30 40
Evaluate -- 30 30
Create -- -- --
Total (%) 100 100 100
REMEMBER
1. What do you mean by grading?
2. What do you mean by design mix?
UNDERSTAND
1. Explain the pile driving technique.
2. Distinguish between precast and cast in-situ construction.
APPLY
1. Application of queuing or wait line models.
2. Applications of Time and Motion Study.
ANALYZE
1. Examine the procedure for concrete mix design.
2. Analyze the time period of dump trucks for soil excavation (Problems).
24
11 + 4 Hours
Total:45+15 Hours
96
16CE002 ELEMENTS OF ROCK MECHANICS (ELECTIVE I)

3103
Course Outcomes
1. Summarize the different properties of rocks
2. Estimate the different types of strengths of rock materials
3. Explain the different aspects of wave propagation in rock bodies
4. Discuss the Stress- Strain relationships in rocks and deformability of rocks
5. Demonstrate the importance of grouting from rock mechanics point of view
6. Apply the principles of rock mechanics to solve engineering problems
COs–POs Mapping
COs PO2
1 2
2 3
3 2
4 3
5 3
6 3
Unit I
Index Properties of Rocks
Introduction – Physical and Mechanical Properties of Rocks – Elastic Parameters of Rocks – Dynamic Property
of Rocks – Static and Dynamic Module.
Plasticity and Yield-Creep
11 + 4 Hours
Unit II
Rock Strength
Types of Waves – Theory of Wave Propagation – Factors influencing Wave Velocity in Rock Mass – Modest
of Rock Failure – Strength of Rock – Shear – Tensile – Compressive – Measurements.
Transient Waves-Effects of Fluid Saturation
11+4 Hours
Unit III
Deformability of Rocks and Stress
Stress-Strain Behaviour – Initial Stress – Influence of Joints – Distribution of Stresses – Measurements of Initial
Stresses.
Stresses and Strain in Polar and Cylindrical Coordinates
11+4 Hours
Unit IV
Rock Grouting and Introduction to Rock Engineering
Introduction – Grouting – Types of Grouting – Rock Bolt – Types – Systems – Testing of Rock Bolts.
Rock Engineering:Introduction – Application – Merits and Demerits – Tunneling – Rock Openings – Rocks for
Mining Subsidence, Dam, Road Cuts, Slabs and Foundations.
Rock Support and Reinfrocement
11+4 Hours
Total: 44+16 Hours
Text Book (s):
1. Jaeger .C, Rock Mechanics and Engineering, 2 nd Ed., Cambridge University Press, 2011.
2. Verma .B.P, Rock Mechanics for Engineers, 3 rd Ed., Khanna Publication, 1997.
Reference (s):
1. Goodman .P.E, Introduction of Rock Mechanics, 2nd Ed., John Wiley and Sons, 1989.
2. Stillburg, Professional User Handbook for Rock Bolting, Tran Tech Publications, 1989.
3. Brow .E.T, Rock Characterisation, Testing and Monitoring, Pergman Press, 1981.
4. Hock and Bray.J, Rock Slope Engineering, Institute of Mining and Metallurgy, 1981.
97
SAMPLE QUESTION (S)

Remember 20 -- --
Understand 30 20 --
Apply 50 80 100
Analyze -- -- --
Evaluate -- -- --
Create -- -- --
Total (%) 100 100 100
REMEMBER
1. Define Hardness of Rocks.
2. Define Creep in rocks.
3. Define porosity and permeability of rocks.
4. Write Tergaghi’s Rockmass Classification.
UNDERSTAND
1. Explain about the use of information on elasticity and plasticity of a rcokmass help in designing
structures over them.
2. Discuss Mohr’s Scale of Hardness.
3. Explain the factors that are responsible for rock strength.
4. Expalin static and dynamic moduli of elasticity.
5. Explain swelling and anisotropy in rocks.
6. Explain the cable jacking test.
APPLY
1. The rectangular plate shown in the figure below has the given loads uniformly distributed over the
edges. The plate is 50 mm thick, AB is 500 mm and BC is 400 mm.
(a) Determine the shear forces which must operate on the edges BC, DA, to maintain the equilibrium of
the plate.
(b) Relative to the x, y reference axes, determine the state of stress at any point P in the interior of the
plate.
(c) For the l, m axes oriented as shown, determine the stress components oll , omm, olm.
(d) Determine the magnitudes of the principal stresses, and the orientation of the major principal stress
axis to the x axis.
(e) For the surface GH, whose outward normal is inclined at θ◦ to the x axis determine expressions for
the component tractions, tx , ty , operating on it as a function of o xx , o yy, o xy and θ. Determine values of
tx , ty for θ = 0◦ , 60◦ , 90◦ respectively. Determine the resultant stress on the plane for which θ = 60◦.
25
98
16CE003 PAVEMENT ENGINEERING (ELECTIVE I)

3103
Course utcomes
1. Assess types of stresses in flexible and rigid pavements
2. Design flexible Pavement for high and low volume roads
3. Design Rigid Pavement for high and low volume roads
4. Build knowledge on construction methods of pavements
5. Decide types of highway drainage systems
6. Interpret types of failures in flexible and rigid pavements
COs–POs Mapping
COs PO3 PSO#2
1 3 2
2 3 3
3 3 3
4 2 2
5 2 2
6 2 2
Unit I
Types of Pavements and Stress in Pavements
Objects and requirements of pavements-Types of Pavements-Stresses in flexible pavements: layered system
concepts, stress solution for one, two and three layered systems, fundamental design concepts. Stresses in rigid
pavements: Westergaard’s theory and assumptions, stresses due to curling, stresses due to loading, frictional
stresses, stresses in dowel bars and tie bars.
Effect of superior materials in Total thickness of flexible pavements
11+4 Hours
Unit II
Design of Flexible Pavements
Functions of pavement components- Factors affection design and performance of Flexible pavements: wheel
load, subgrade soil, climatic factors, pavement component materials, Drainage and Environmental Factors.
Design methods: CBR method-IRC method- Burmister method -IRC Method for low volume Flexible
Pavements.
ESAL - AASHTO Method
11+4 Hours
Unit III
Design of Rigid Pavements
Functions of pavement components- types of joints and their functions-Factors affecting design and
performance of Rigid Pavements: wheel load, Temperature variations, types of joints and spacing, subgrade.
Design of slabs, joints by IRC method- IRC method for low volume roads.
Continuously Reinforced Concrete Pavements
11+4 Hours
Unit IV
Highway Construction
Types of highway construction: Bituminous pavement types-surface dressing, penetration macadam, built up
spray grout, bitumen bound macadam, bituminous carpet, bituminous concrete, Cement concrete pavements.
Highway Drainage: surface and subsurface drainage system.
Pavement distresses: Flexible and rigid pavements failures and their maintenance.
Equipment for Compaction of soils and Excavation of Earth
12+3 Hours
Total: 45+15 Hours
99
Textbook (s)
1. Khanna, S.K., Justo C.E.G. and Veeraragavan. A., Highway Engineering, Nem Chand and Brothers,
10th Ed., 2014.
2. Yoder, E.J., and Witczak, M.W., Principles of Pavement Design, 2nd Ed., John Wiley and Sons, 2015
3. Yang. H. Huang, “Pavement Analysis and Design”, 2nd Ed., Prentice Hall Inc., 2003
Reference (s)
1. L. R. Kadiyali and N. B. Lal, “Principles and Practice of Highway Engineering”, 5 th Ed., Khanna
Publications, 2005.
2. IRC: 37& 58 Codes for Flexible and Rigid Pavements Design.
3. IRC: SP: 72 & 62 Codes for Design of Low volume Flexible and Rigid Pavements.
4. IRC: 101 Code for design of Continuously Reinforced Concrete Pavements.
SAMPLE QUESTION (S)

Remember 10 10 --
Understand 20 20 --
Apply 10 10 10
Analyze 20 20 20
Evaluate 10 10 20
Create 30 30 50
Total (%) 100 100 100
REMEMBER
1. List the variable considered in flexible pavement design.
2. What is effect of temperature differential in design of slab thickness?
3. What are methods of flexile pavements construction?
4. List the various maintenance works of bituminous surfaces.
UNDERSTAND
1. Outline the importance of rigid pavements over Flexible pavements.
2. Explain ESWL and the concept in the determination of the equivalent wheel load.
3. Explain the factors governing the design of concrete pavements for low volume roads.
4. Classify different types of joints in cc Pavements of a rigid pavement and mention the objects of each.
APPLY
1. A circular load of radius 16cm with uniform contact pressure of 7.5 kg/cm2 is applied onthe surface of
a homogeneous elastics mass. Determine the vertical stress under the center of the load at a depth of
48cm from the surface using stress distribution chart for single layer.
2. Determine the EWLF or VDF value of the following two axle loads in terms of the standard axle load
of 8.16 t (a) LCV with rear axle load of 1.8t (b) HCV with rear axle load of 16.0 t
3. Determine the total thickness of flexible pavement assuming single layer elastic theory and using the
following data: Design wheel load = 5100kg, p=7 kg/cm2, E=180 kg/cm2, permissible deflection =
0.25 cm.
4. Determine the spacing between contraction joints for 3.5 meters slab width having thickness =22cm
and f=1.5, for the following two cases
For plain cement concrete, allowable Sc = 0.8 kg/cm2
For reinforced cement concrete, 2.0 cm dia. Bars at 0.4m spacing
ANALYZE
1. Discuss the Westergaard’s concept and assumptions for wheel load and temperature stresses.
2. Plate bearing test conducted with 30 cm diameter plate on a subgrade sustained a load of 1500 kg at
0.25 deflection. The test when carried out on a base course of thickness 18 cm sustained a load of 5500
kg at 0.25 cm deflection. Determine the thickness of pavement section for a wheel load of 5500 kg with
tyre pressure of 7.5 kg/cm2 using Burmister’s approach.
3. Calculate the spacing of expansion joint from the following data
Maximum joint width = 2cm
26
100
Temperature of laying concrete= 20oC

Maximum slab temperature expected = 55oC
Coefficient of thermal expansion=10 x 10-6 per oC
EVALUATE
1. The CBR value of subgrade soil is 8 percent. Calculate the total thickness of flexible pavement using
(i) Design curve developed by California State Highway Department (ii) Design chart recommended by
I.R.C (iii) design formula developed by the U.S. Corps of Engineers
Assume light traffic or 3175 kg wheel load and tyre pressure of 5 kg/cm 2
2. Explain the I.R.C recommendations for determining the thickness of cement concrete pavement.
3. Determine the CC pavement thickness, spacing of expansion and contraction joints, dowel bars and tie
bars for a wheel load of 5100 kg. Assume all suitable data.
CREATE
1. Design the pavement for construction of a Bituminous pavement with (a) Granular base and sub-base
(b) Cemented base and sub-base with SAMI layer over CT-Base course
Data:
1. 4-lane divided carriageway
2. Initial traffic in each direction in the year
completion of construction = 5500 CV/day
3. Design life = 15 years
4. Design CBR of subgrade soil = 5%
5. Traffic growth rate = 5%
6. Vehicle damage factor = 4.5
2. Design the spacing and length of tie bars for the following data:
Slab thickness= 28 cm
Lane width=3.5cm
f=1.5
Density of concrete, kg/m3=2400
Allowable tensile stress in plain bars, kg/cm2=1250
Allowable tensile stress in deformed bars, kg/cm2=2000
Allowable bond stress for plain bars, kg/cm2=17.5
Allowable bond stress for deformed bars, kg/cm2=24.6
Diameter of tie bars(d)=16mm
3. Design Dowel bars for the following data:
Design wheel load = 5000 kg
Slab thickness = 32 cm
Joint Width = 2.0 cm
Radius of relative stiffness, l= 103.53 cm
Characteristic strength, fck= 400 kg/cm2
Assume all suitable data
101
16CE507 SURVEY CAMP

0032
Course Outcomes
1. Justify methods and equipment to suit purpose of survey
2. Take part in preparing site maps of the objects in the area under consideration with contours.
3. Organize a team of surveyors to fix positioning and property lines in line with legal agreements during
setting out works
4. Measure the horizontal angles and vertical angles (Base Line measurement) for Triangulation work
5. Determine the area by triangulation using theodolite
6. Measure and draw the Longitudinal sectioning and cross sectioning of a topography
COs–POs Mapping
COs PO4 PO10

1 1 1
2 3 3
3 3 2
4 3 2
5 3 2
6 3 3
List of Experiments
1. Plane Table traversing
2. Preparation of contour profiles of ground using Block Contouring
3. Preparation of contour profiles of ground using Radial contouring
4. Theodolite traverse
5. Triangulation
6. Astronomical Survey
7. Setting of simple Curve – Rankine’s method
8. Profile Survey of Highway project
9. Surveying using total station
10. Exercise using Global positioning system / Differential GPS instrument

1. Geodesy Lab Manual – Civil Engineering - GMRIT Rajam
2. B.C.Punmia, Ashok Kumar Jain and Arun Kumar Jain, Surveying (Vol–1),18th Ed., Laxmi Publications
(P) ltd., New Delhi, 2011
102
16CE601 STRUCTURAL ANALYSIS II

3103
Course Outcomes
1. Analyze three /two hinged arches and obtain internal forces at any cross section
2. Evaluate design forces in arches subjected to concentrated, distributed and varying loads
3. Evaluate the forces in indeterminate frames subjected to lateral loads by using approximate methods of
analysis
4. Analyze statically indeterminate beams and frames using classical methods
5. Evaluate the suitability of classical methods for a given structure and loading
6. Evaluate statically determinate beams using matrix methods
COs–POs Mapping
COs PO2
1 3
2 3
3 3
4 3
5 3
6 3
Unit I
Three Hinged Arches and Two Hinged Arches
Three Hinged Arches:Elastic theory of arches – Eddy’s theorem – Determination of horizontal thrust, bending
moment, normal thrust and radial shear – effect of temperature.
Two Hinged Arches: Determination of horizontal thrust bending moment, normal thrust and radial shear – Rib
shortening and temperature stresses
Three hinged arches, Eddy's theorem ,Rib shortening and Temperature Stresses
11+4 Hours
Unit II
Approximate Method of Structural Analysis and Slope Deflection Method
Approximate Method Of Structural Analysis: Application to building frames. (i) Portal method (ii) Cantilever
method.
Slope Deflection Method: Derivation of slope deflection equation of supports application to continuous beams
including settlement of supports.
Portal method, Cantilever method, Approximate Method of Structural Analysis
11+4 Hours
Unit III
Moment Distribution Method and Kani’s Method
Moment Distribution Method:Stiffness and carry over factors – Distribution factors – Analysis of
continuous beams with and without sinking of supports – storey portal frames – including Sway.
Kani’s Method: Including settlement of supports and single bay portal frames with side sway by Kani’s method.
Stiffness and carry over factors,single bay portal frames
13+4 Hours
Unit IV
Flexibility Method and Stiffness Method
Flexibility Method: Introduction, application to continuous beams including support settlements (maximum of
two unknowns)
Stiffness Method: Introduction, application to continuous beams including support settlements. (maximum of
two unknowns)
Flexibility matrix, Stiffness matrix
12+3 Hours
Total:45+15 Hours
103
Textbook (s)
1. S.S. Bhavikatti, Structural Analysis II, 5th Ed.,Vikas Publishing House Pvt Ltd, 2013
2. Pundit and Gupta, Structural Analysis (Matrix Approach), 15 th Ed., Tata Mc.Graw Hill Publishers,
2010
Reference (s)
1. B.C. Punmia, Strength of Materials and Mechanics of Solids,5 th Ed., Vol-2Laxmi Publications, New
Delhi, 2010
2. C.S. Reddy, Structural Analysis, 11th Ed.,Tata McGhill Publications, New Delhi, 2013
3. Ramamuratam and R Narayan, Theory of Structures, 17th th Ed., Dhanpat Rai Publishing Company,
2006
4. Vazrani and Ratwani, Analysis of Structures Vol. I and Vol 2, 13 th Ed., Khanna Publications, 2013
Sample Question (S)

Remember 10 10 --
Understand 20 20 --
Apply 30 20 50
Analyze 40 40 30
Evaluate -- 10 20
Create -- -- --
Total (%) 100 100 100
Remember
1. State the limitations of slope deflection method.

2. Why slope-deflection method is called a ‘displacement method’?
3. Define degrees of freedom.
4. Define: Continuous beam.
5. In a member AB, if a moment of –10 KNm is applied at A, what is the moment carried over to B?
6. Define flexibility influence coefficient (fij).
7. What are the basic unknowns in stiffness matrix method?
8. What is the equilibrium condition used in the stiffness method?
9. Which Mechanism in plastic analysis of frames causes a partial collapse?
10. List the basic methods used in the plastic analysis of structures.
Understand
1 Determine the moments at each joint and support using Slope Deflection Method. The connections
at B and C are rigid fixed. The supports at A and D are fixed. EI is constant.
(OR)
104
2. Draw the shear force and bending moment diagrams for the beam shown solve using Slope Deflection
method. EI is constant.
3. Analyse the Beam shown Below using Moment Distribution Method.
4. Analyse the Beam shown Below using Moment Distribution Method.
ANALYZE
1 Analyze the Portal Frame ABCD shown in the figure below by Flexibility Method.EI is constant.
OR
2 Analyze the Continuous Beam ABCD shown in the figure below by Stiffness Method.EI is constant.
105
APPLY
1 Write a Short note on the different methods of Plastic Analysis.
2 Calculate Plastic Section modulus for the beam AB shown below using Plastic Theory assuming
yield strength=250N/mm2
27
Assignment Test should contain only questions related to Higher Order Thinking (HOT) Skills .
106
16CE602 DESIGN OF RC STRUCTURES

3103
Course Outcomes
1. Design a singly reinforced concrete beam of rectangular cross section by using Working Stress Design
philosophy
2. Design a singly, doubly reinforced beams of rectangular, T and L cross sections using Limit State
Design philosophy of IS: 456-2000 codal provisions
3. Apply IS: 456-2000, codal requirements of limit state philosophy related to shear bond, torsion.
4. Design long and short rectangular and circular columns subjected to axial load, uniaxial and biaxial
moments as per IS: 456-2000
5. Design the isolated square, rectangular, circular footing subjected to axial load, axial load and
moment as per IS: 456-2000
6. Design one way and two way slabs as per IS: 456-2000 and checking the serviceability conditions
COs–POs Mapping
COs PO3 PO10 PSO#2
1 3 2 3
2 3 2 3
3 3 1 3
4 3 2 3
5 3 2 3
6 2 2 2
Unit I
Working Stress Design and Introduction of Limit State Design
Working Stress Design: Introduction- Materials, recommendation of IS 456 – 2000, elastic theory, design
constants; singly reinforced beam-Introduction of Limit State Design: Concepts of limit state design – Basic
statistical principles – Characteristic loads –Characteristic strength – Partial load and safety factors –
representative stress-strain curves for cold worked deformed bars and mild steel bars. Assumptions in limit state
design – stress - block parameters – limiting moment of Resistance
Basic statistical principles , representative stress-strain curves for cold worked deformed bars
8+2 Hours
Unit II
Beams and Shear, Torsion & Bond
Beams: Limit state analysis and design of singly reinforced, doubly reinforced, T and L beam sections,
Continuous Beams - Shear, Torsion and Bond: Limit state analysis and design of section for shear and torsion –
concept of bond, anchorage and development length, I.S. code provisions.
Anchorage and development length, I.S. code provisions
12+5 Hours
Unit III
Columns and Footings
Columns: Short and Long columns – under axial loads, uniaxial bending and biaxial bending – I S Code
provisions-Footings: Different types of footings – Design of isolated, square, rectangular and circular footings.
Different types of footings , Braced and un-braced columns – I S Code provisions
13+5 Hours
Unit IV
Slabs and Limit State Design for Serviceability
Slabs: Design of Two-way slabs, one way slab, Continuous slabs - Limit State Design for Serviceability:
Deflection, cracking and codal provision.
Cracking and codal provision
12+3 Hours
Total:45+15 Hours
107
NOTE
All the designs to be taught in Limit State Method. Following plates should be prepared by the students.
1. Reinforcement particulars of simply supported, cantilever-beams.
2. Reinforcement detailing of T and L-beams
3. Reinforcement particulars of columns and footings.

4. Detailing of one way, two way slabs
Textbook (s)
1. S.Unnikrishna Pillai & Devdas Menon, Reinforced Concrete Design, 3rd Ed., Tata Mc.Graw Hill
Publishers, 2010
2. B.C.Punmia, Ashok Kumar Jain and Arun Kumar Jain, Reinforced Concrete Structures Vol.1’, 7th Ed.,
Laxmi Publications Pvt.Ltd., 1992
Reference (s)
1. N. Krishna Raju and R.N. Pranesh, ‘Reinforced concrete design’, 1st edition, New age International
Publishres, 2009.
SAMPLE QUESTION (S)
Remember 5 5 --
Understand 10 10 --
Apply 10 10 10
Analyze 20 20 10
Evaluate -- -- --
Create 55 55 60
Total (%) 100 100 100
REMEMBER
1. What are the permissible effective span to effective depth ratio values in case of cantilever and simply
supported beams according to IS:456-2000
2. Define effective length and slenderness ratio of a compression member
3. Write the specifications for the minimum spacing of shear reinforcement in beams as per IS:456-2000
4. What are the main requirements of the footing of a structure
5. What is the magnitude of crack width allowed in concrete structures
UNDERSTAND
1. Why it is essential to provide corner reinforcement in two way rectangular slabs.
2. Explain the terms ‘characteristic loads’ and ‘factored loads’ .
3. Why it is necessary to provide transverse steel in one way slab?
4. Distinguish between flexural bond and anchorage bond.
5. Differentiate between the terms Factor of safety and partial safety factors for material strength.
6. Explain the failure patterns of a short and slender column
7. Explain with sketches the different types of footings.
8. Explain the utility of bent up bars in reinforced concrete beam in resisting Shear
9. Explain the difference in the behavior of one way and two way slabs.
APPLY
1. What are the techniques to be applied in site to prevent deflections?
2. Under what circumstances the doubly reinforced beams are preferred.
3. From first principles solve for the moment of resistance and percentage of steel in a singly reinforced
rectangular section of breadth ‘b’ and depth ‘d’for a balanced design. Assume the stresses in concrete
and steel as 5N/mm2 and 140N/mm2
ANALYZE
1. Examine the limiting moment carrying capacity of a doubly reinforced beam if it is reinforced with 3
no.s of 20mm diameter mild steel bars in compression and 4no.s of 25mm diameter mild steel bars in
tension. The size of the beam is 300mm x600mm and the effective covers to compression and tension
reinforcement are 30mm and 50mm respectively. Use M-20 grade concrete.
108
2. A simply supported reinforced concrete beam of size 250mmx400mm effective depth is reinforced
with 4 no.s of 20 mm diameter bars in tension zone and 2no.s of 16mm diameter bars in compression
zone. The span of the beam is 6.5m. Examine the adequacy of the designed section with respect to limit
state of deflection if the concrete used is M-20 grade
3. Examine the deflection requirement of a tee-beam continuous over 10m span if the flange
width=1200mm, web width=250mm and effective depth=400mm.The area of Tension
reinforcement=1500sq.mm and compression reinforcement = 960 mm 2 Adopt fe-415 grade HYSD
bars.
CREATE
1. A simply supported one way slab with a clear span of 3.0m is resting on masonry walls of thickness
350mm.Design the slab with a Live load of 2kn/m2 . Assume M-20 grade concrete and Fe415 HYSD
bars.
2. Design a square footing for a reinforced concrete column of size 400mm x 400mm subjected to an
axial service load of 1000kN. The safe bearing capacity of the soil is 200kN per sq.m. Use M-20 grade
concrete and Fe-415 HYSD bars.
3. Design the reinforcements in a column of size 400mm x 600mm subjected to an axial load of 2000kN.
The column has an unsupported length of 3m and is braced against side sway in both directions. Adopt
M-20 grade concrete and Fe-415 HYSD bars
4. Design the tension reinforcement for a T-beam section subjected to a factored moment of 300kNm.
Given width of flange=750mm, width of web=300mm, thickness of flange=120mm, overall depth =
600mm. Use M-20 grade concrete and Fe-415 HYSD bars.
28
109
16CE603 ENVIRONMENTAL ENGINEERING

3103
Course Outcomes
1. List the factors affecting water supply and wastewater
2. Explain the various types of water and wastewater characteristics
3. Adapt a water treatment facility within a water supply system
4. Demonstrate the common physical, chemical and biological unit operations encountered in treatment
processes
5. Identify various treatment techniques for water, wastewater and recycled water
6. Analyze available disposal options and their practical implications
COs–POs Mapping
COs PO3 PO6 PSO#2

1 1 2 1
2 1 1 1
3 2 1 3
4 1 2 1
5 3 3 3
6 3 3 3
Unit I
Water Demand and Quality
Population forecasts, design period – water demand – factors affecting – fluctuations – fire demand – storage
capacity
Waterborne diseases – protected water supply – water quality and testing – drinking water standards.
Comparison from quality and quantity and other considerations– Intakes
Springs- Wells
11+4 Hours
Unit II
Design of Water Treatment Units
Layout and general outline of water treatment units – sedimentation – principles – design factors – coagulation-
flocculation, clarifier design – coagulants – feeding arrangements
Filtration – theory – working of slow and rapid gravity filters – multimedia filters – design of filters – troubles
in operation, comparison of filters – disinfection – theory of chlorination, chlorine demand, other disinfection
practices- Miscellaneous treatment methods-water softening.
Ultra Filtration- Reverse Osmosis
12+4 Hours
Unit III
Sewage Quality and Design of Sewage Treatment Units
Conservancy and water carriage systems–Hardy Cross Method, characteristics of sewage– B.O.D. – C.O.D.
equations. Dilution -Self-purification of rivers - Layout and general outline of various units in a waste water
treatment plant
Primary treatment design of screens – grit chambers – skimming tanks – sedimentation tanks – principles of
design – biological treatment – trickling filters – standard and high rate
Rotating Biological Reactors- Sewer Apparatus
13+4 Hours
Unit IV
Design of Ponds and Sludge Disposal
Concept of ponds-Construction and design of anaerobic and oxidation ponds - Sludge digestion – factors
effecting – design of Digestion tank
Sludge disposal by drying – Other options-septic tanks working principles and design – soak pits. Ultimate
disposal of sewage.
Cess Pool- Seepage Pit
9+3 Hours
Total: 45+15 Hours
110
Textbook (s)
1. B.C. Punmia, Ashok Jain &Arun Jain, Water Supply Engineering, Vol. 1, Wastewater Engineering,
Vol. II, 2nd Ed., Laxmi Publications Pvt. Ltd, New Delhi, 2016
2. G.S. Birdi, Water supply and Sanitary Engineering, Revised Ed., DhanpatRai & Sons Publishers, 2015
3. K.N. Duggal, Elements of Environmental Engineering, 3rd Ed., S. Chand Publishers, 2010
Reference (s)
1. Mark J Hammer and Mark J. Hammer Jr., Water and Waste Water Technology, 7th Ed., Pearson, 2012
2. G.L. Karia and R.A. Christian, Waste water treatment- concepts and design approach, 2nd Ed.,
Prentice Hall of India, 2013
3. R. Elangovan and M.K. Saseetharan, Unit operations in Environmental Engineering, 5th Ed., New age
India Publishing, 2008
SAMPLE QUESTION (S)
Remember 40 -- --
Understand 40 20 30
Apply 20 30 30
Analyze -- 30 20
Evaluate -- 20 20
Create -- -- --
Total (%) 100 100 100
REMEMBER
1. Enumerate the components of a water supply scheme.
2. Define coagulation.
UNDERSTAND
1. Explain the need for supplying protected water supply.
2. Differentiate between slow and rapid sand filter with respect to (a). Rate of filtration. (b). loss of head.
APPLY
1. Describe the step involved in the design of septic tank .And also explain the working of a trickling
filter with neat sketch.
2. Determine the size of a high rate trickling filter for the following data
Sewage flow= 4.5 million litres per day
Recirculation ratio = 1.5
BOD for raw sewage = 230 mg/l
BOD removal in PST = 30%
BOD of treated effluent required = 25 mg/l.
ANALYZE
1. The population of 5 decades from 1930 to 1970 is given below in the table. Find out the population of
1, 2, 3 decade beyond the last known decade by using arithmetic increase method.
YEAR 1930 1940 1950 1960 1970
POPULATION 25000 28000 34000 42000 47000
2. If 2% solution of a sewage sample is incubated for 5 days at 20°C and depletion of oxygen was found
to be 5 ppm. Determine the B.O.D. of the sewage.
EVALUATE
1. Design a rectangular sedimentation tank for treating 4.5 million litres per day adopting L : B ratio as 2,
overflow rate 20 m3 /d.m2 and detention time of 3 hours.
2. Design a septic tank for 100 users. Assume necessary data
29
111
16CE604 WATER RESOURCES ENGINEERING II

3024
Course Outcomes
1. Discuss component parts of diversion head works and its design
2. Explain about types of dams and factors affecting selection of dams
3. Analyze the causes of failures of the dams and its design
4. Explain about types of falls and spillways and its design principles
5. Explain about the types of canal regulators, cross drainage works and their applications
6. Develop the design principles of canal regulators and cross drainage works
COs–POs Mapping
COs PO2 PO3 PO4 PO10
1 2 2 3 1
2 1 1 3 1
3 3 3 3 2
4 3 3 3 2
5 3 1 3 2
6 3 3 3 2
Unit I
Diversion Head Works and Introduction to Dams
Types of Diversion head works-diversion and storage head works, weirs and barrages, layout of diversion head
works, components. Causes and failure of hydraulic structures on permeable foundations, Bligh’s creep theory,
Khosla’s theory, determination of uplift pressure, impervious floors using Bligh’s and Khosla’s theory, exit
gradient, functions of U/s and d/s sheet piles. Types of dams, merits and demerits, factors affecting selection of
type of dam, factors governing selecting site for dam, types of reservoirs, selection of site for reservoir, zones of
storage of a reservoir, reservoir yield, estimation of capacity of reservoir using mass curve.
Levels of Under Sluice and Overhead Tank- Advantages of the Estimation of Reservoir Capacity
1. Draw the diversion head works with components parts
2. Draw the cross section of essential features of hydraulic structure such as hydraulic gradient, up lift
pressure and Thickness of the floor
10+8 Hours
Unit II
Earth Dams and Gravity Dams
Types of Earth dams, causes of failure of earth dam, criteria for safe design of earth dam, seepage through earth
dam-graphical method, measures for control of seepage. Forces acting on a gravity dam, causes of failure of a
gravity dam, elementary profile and practical profile of a gravity dam, limiting height of a low gravity dam,
stability analysis, drainage galleries.
.
Major Earth Dams and Gravity Dams in India- Importance of Stability of Gravity Dams
1. Draw and design of earth dam with main features.
2. Draw and design the gravity dam with all important features
10+8 Hours
Unit III
Spillways and Canal Falls
Types of spillways, design principles of Ogee spillways, types of spillway gates. Types of falls and their
location, design principles of Sarda type fall, trapezoidal notch fall and straight glacis fall.
Ogee Spillways in India and Examples
1. Draw the longitude section and cross section of spillway.
10+7 Hours
112
Unit IV
Canal Regulation Works and Cross-Drainage Works
Head regulator and cross regulator, design principles of Cross regulator and head regulators, canal outlets, types
of canal modules, proportionality, sensitivity and flexibility. Types, selection of site, design principles of
aqueduct, siphon aqueduct and super passage.
Cross Regulators Constructed just below the Head Regulator- Under Tunnel
1. Draw the layout of cross regulator and head regulator with parent channel
2. Draw the cross section and longitudinal section of super passage.
15+7 Hours
Total:45+30 Hours
Textbook (s)
1. S.K Garg, Irrigation Engineering and Hydraulic Structures, 31st Ed., Khanna publishers.
2. K.R.Arora , Irrigation Engineering, 4th Revised Ed., Standard Publications, New Delhi
3. R.K. Sharma and T.K. Sharma, Irrigation Engineering,1 st Ed., S. Chand Publishers, 2002
Reference (s)
1. G.L. Asawa, Irrigation and Water Resources Rngineering, 1 st Revised Ed., New Age International
Publishers, 2016
2. Varshney, Gupta & Gupta, Theory and Design of Hydraulic Structures, 4 th Ed.,Nem Chand & Bros,
1979.
3. Satyanarayana Murthy. Challa, Water Resources Engineering, 2nd Ed., New Age International
Publishers,2006
SAMPLE QUESTION (S)

Cognitive Level Int. Test 1 (%) Int. Test 2 (%) Drawing Exercises 30(%)
Remember 15 15 --
Understand 20 30 --
Apply 40 30 50
Analyze 25 25 50
Evaluate -- -- --
Create -- -- --
Total (%) 100 100 100
REMEMBER
1. Name the components parts of diversion head works.
2. Label the functions of diversion head works.
3. Select suitable site for diversion head work.
4. Define piping.
5. Write Procedure for design of gravity dams
6. Recall the Component Parts Of Trapezoidal Notch Falls
7. Identify the Simple Vertical Drop Type And Sarda Type Falls
UNDERSTAND
1. Explain Typical Cross-section of gravity dam.
2. Explain Forces Acting on Gravity Dam.
3. Indicate Classification based on purpose.
4. Indicate Classification based on control.
5. Indicate Classification based on prominent feature.
6. Classify the component parts of Ogee-Shaped.
7. Explain the profile of Overflow of Spillway.
113
APPLY
1. Relate Construction of Galleries in Gravity Dams.
2. Examine Gravity Method or Two Dimensional Stability Analysis
3. Relate Functions and Types of Galleries in Dams.
ANALYZE
1. Analyze overturning (or rotation) about the toe.
2. Analyze crushing and development of tension in gravity dams
3. Analyze shear failure called sliding in gravity dams
30
Assessment will be done based on the performance of drawing exercises
114
16CE004 GROUND WATER HYDROLOGY (ELECTIVE II)

3103
Course Outcomes
1. Explain the geological occurrence and movement of ground water in the earth’s subsurface
2. Apply the principles of fluid mechanics to understand well behavior in different conditions
3. Apply suitable surface and subsurface investigation techniques for the exploration of ground water
4. Demonstrate the concepts of artificial recharge and quality analysis of ground water
5. Apply the different principles to calculate the interface between saline water and fresh water in coastal
aquifers
6. Recommend the various mathematical modeling techniques for effective management of ground
water resources and for contaminant transport modeling
COs–POs Mapping
COs PO2 PO3
1 2 1
2 3 2
3 3 3
4 3 3
5 3 3
6 3 3
Unit I
Ground Water Occurrence and Movement of Ground Water
Ground water in hydrologic cycle, Characteristics of ground water, Role of groundwater in water resources
system and their management. Origin & age of ground water, rock properties affecting groundwater,
groundwater column, zones of aeration & saturation, aquifers and their characteristics/classification,
groundwater basins & springs, Darcy’s Law, permeability & its determination, Dupuit assumptions,
heterogeneity &anisotropy, Ground water flow rates & flow directions, Hydraulic conductivity, Aquifer
transmissivity and storativity, Storage coefficient - Specific yield, Direct and indirect methods for estimation of
aquifer parameters.
Governing equation for flow through porous medium - Steady and unsteady state flow - Initial and boundary
conditions, solution of flow equations.
11 + 3 Hours
Unit II
Well Hydraulics and Quality Analysis of Ground Water
Steady, unsteady, uniform,radial flow to a well in a confined,unconfined ,leaky aquifer, well flow near aquifer
boundaries for special conditions, partially penetrating, horizontal wells & multiple well systems, well
completion, development, protection, rehabilitation, testing for yield, Wells near aquifer boundaries - Hydraulics
of recharge wells. Municipal, Industrial, Agricultural and Miscellaneous sources & causes of pollution,
attenuation, underground distribution, potential evaluation of pollution, physical, chemical, biological analysis
of ground water quality, criteria & measures of ground water quality, ground water salinity & samples.
Graphical representations of ground water quality
11 + 3 Hours
Unit III
Exploration of Ground Water and Artificial Recharge of Ground Water
Geological Exploration, Geophysical Exploration, Remote Sensing, Electric Resistivity, Seismic Refraction
based methods for surface investigation of ground water, test drilling & ground water level measurement, sub-
surface ground water investigation through geophysical, Resistivity, Spontaneous Potential, Radiation,
Temperature, Caliper, Fluid Conductivity, Fluid Velocity and miscellaneous logging. Concept & methods of
artificial ground water recharge, recharge mounds & induced recharge, wastewater recharge for reuse, water
spreading.
Application of RS and GIS techniques in site identification for Artificial Recharge of Ground Water
11 + 3 Hours
115
Unit IV
Ground Water Transport Process and Ground Water Modeling
Hydrodynamic dispersion - occurrence of dispersion phenomena, coefficient of dispersion - Aquifer advection
dispersion equation and parameters - initial and boundary conditions - method of solutions, solution of
advection dispersion equation. Ghyben-Herzberg relation between fresh & saline waters, shape & structure of
the fresh & saline water interface, upcoming of saline water, , saline water intrusion control. Ground water
modeling through porous media ,analog, electric analog and digital computer models.
Fresh-saline water relations on oceanic islands, seawater intrusion in Karst terrains
12 + 6 Hours
Total:45+15 Hours
Textbook (s)
1. Todd D.K., Ground Water Hydrology,3rd Ed., John Wiley and Sons, 2005.
2. Raghunath H.M., Ground Water Hydrology, Wiley Eastern Ltd., 2 nd Ed., reprint, 2000.
3. K. R. Karanth, Hydrogeology, TataMcGraw Hill Publishing Company, 1989
4. A.K.Rasthogi, Numerical Ground Water Hydrology,1 st Ed., Penram Publications, 2007
Refernce (s)
1. Driscoll F.G, Groundwater and Wells, 2nd Ed.,St. Paul, Minnesota, 1986.
2. Willis, R. and W.W.G. Yeh, Groundwater Systems Planning and Management, Prentice-Hall, 1987.
3. O.D.L. Strack, Groundwater Mechanics, Prentice Hall, 1989.
4. S.P. Garg, Groundwater and Tube Wells, Oxford & IBH Publishing Co., 1993.
5. Bear J., Hydraulics of Groundwater, 1st Ed., McGrow-Hill International, 1979.
6. Bear J., Dynamics of fluids in porous media, American Elsevier publishing co. inc, 1972
7. C. Walton, Groundwater Resources Evaluation, 1 st Ed., McGraw Hill, 1970.
SAMPLE QUESTION (S)

Remember 10 10 --
Understand 45 45 --
Apply 45 45 100
Analyze -- -- --
Evaluate -- -- --
Create -- -- --
Total (%) 100 100 100
REMEMBER
1. What are the different types of geological formations?
2. What are the differences between confined and unconfined aquifers?
3. Define Porosity and Permeability.
4. Write the differences in sounding and profiling methods in the electrical resistivity technique of
groundwater exploration.
5. Define Hydraulic Gradient, Storage Coeffiecient, Transmissibility.
6. What are the different types of wells.
UNDERSTAND
1. Explain the Dupuit- Frochheimer assumptions and their limitations in steady unidirectional flow in an
unconfined aquifer without recharge between two water bodies with vertical boundaries.
2. Explain the different sources and causes of groundwater contamination.
3. Explain the differences between diffusion and dispersion.
4. Derive the govering equation of groundwater contamination.
5. If the laboratory coefficient of permeability of a sample of soil is 3.2 × 10 2 lpd/m2 at 200C, what would
be the permeability value at 300 C?
6. Using the appropriate govering equation and boundary conditions for the steady state flow in a
homogeneous isotropic confined aquifer, derive the discharge drawdown equation for a well.
31
116
APPLY
1. In a seismic refraction investigation to locate an aquifer, the critical angle of incidence for the refracted
wave is 15o and the slope for the time–distance line passing through the origin is 0.0025 s/m. Compute
the intercept time on the time axis and the 2 slope of the next segment of time–distance graph if the
expected depth to the aquifer is 11 m. What are the cross-over and critical distances for the seismic
setup used. Explain what these distances represent and draw a neat explanatory sketch of the seismic
setup.
2. A reverse seismic refraction investigation indicated velocities for two layers as 1.2 and 4.5 km/s, and
1.2 and 5.75 km/s, respectively, when the position of the shot and the last geophone were exchanged.
Compute the slope of the aquifer and the correct seismic velocity for the underlying impervious
formation. Also compute the changes in velocities if the slope of the aquifer bottom is increased by
1.8o.
3. Write the appropriate governing equations and boundary conditions for the aquifer systems shown in
Fig. 4.1 (A, B1, B2, C and D). What is the data requirement to model these systems? Give the complete
information of the aquifer systems shown in Fig. 4.1 (A, B1, B2, C and D) to study the time variant
influence of input and output on the behaviour of the groundwater head.
117
16CE005 GROUND IMPROVEMENT TECHNIQUES (ELECTIVE II)

3103
Course Outcomes
1. Interpret the concepts behind a range of ground improvement and soil remediationtechniques
2. Find out the advantages, disadvantages, limitations for each ground improvement method discussed
3. Choose appropriate techniques for a range of ground and site conditions
4. Identify criteria to determine the applicability of each ground improvement method for a specific
project and soil condition under consideration
5. Design a reinforced earth wall
6. Classify different geosynthetics and understand their field applications
COs–POs Mapping
COs PO 3 PO5 PSO#1
1 2 1 1
2 3 2 2
3 3 3 3
4 3 3 3
5 3 2 1
6 2 3 3
Unit I
Dewatering and Grouting
Methods of de-watering - sumps and interceptor ditches- single, multi stage well points - vacuum well points-
Horizontal wells-foundation drains-blanket drains- criteria for selection of fill material around drains - Electro-
osmosis
Grouting: Objectives of grouting- grouts and their properties- grouting methods - ascending, descending and
stage grouting- hydraulic fracturing in soils and rocks- post grout test
Applications of Grouting – Design Steps for Dewatering Systems
12+3 Hours
Unit II
In Situ Densification Methods in Cohesion less and Cohesive Soils
Vibration at the ground surface, Impact at the Ground Surface, Vibration at depth, Impact at depth.
Preloading or dewatering, Vertical drains - Sand Drains, Sand wick geodrains - Stone and lime columns -
thermal methods
Compaction Quality Control- Selection of Field Compaction Procedure
11+4 Hours
Unit III
Stabilization and Expansive Soils
Methods of stabilization mechanical cement lime bituminous - chemical stabilization with calcium chloride
sodium silicate and gypsum
Expansive Soils: Problems of expansive soils - tests for identification - methods of determination of swell
pressure - Improvement of expansive soils. Foundation techniques in expansive soils - under reamed piles.
Chemical Stabilization Using Natural and Synthetic Polymers
11+4 Hours
Unit IV
Geosynthetics and Reinforced Earth
Geotextiles- Types, Functions and applications - geogrids and geomembranes - functions and applications.
Reinforced Earth: Principles - Components of reinforced earth - factors governing design of reinforced earth
walls - design principles of reinforced earth walls.
Properties of Geosynthetics
11+4 Hours
Total:45+15 Hours
Textbook (s)
1. Hausmann M.R. , Engineering Principles of Ground Modification, McGraw-Hill International
Edition,1990
2. Purushotham Raj, Ground Improvement Techniques, 1st Ed., Laxmi Publications, New Delhi, 1999
118
Reference (S)
1. Moseley M.P, Ground Improvement, 1st Ed., Blackie Academic and Professional, Boca Taton, Florida,
USA,1993
2. Xanthakos P.P, Abramson, L.W and Brucwe, D.A , Ground Control and Improvement, John Wiley and
Sons, New York, USA, 1994
SAMPLE QUESTION (S)

Remember 30 30 --
Understand 50 50 --
Apply -- -- 50
Analyze 20 20 50
Evaluate -- -- --
Create -- -- --
Total (%) 100 100 100
REMEMBER
1. What do you mean by grouting?
2. List out the methods of ground improvement.
3. What is an expansive soil? Give one example.
4. What are the requirements of soil stabilization?
5. Define swell pressure.
UNDERSTAND
1. Write the sequence to be followed in jet grouting with neat sketch.
2. Explain briefly the role of geosynthetics as a separator with the help of neat sketches.
3. Explain how the stone columns are installed using vibro-flotation technique with the help of neat
sketch and also write the uses of stone columns.
4. Discuss the components of the reinforced earth wall with the help of a neat sketch
ANALYZE
1. Illustrate any two methods of in-situ densification for cohesion less soils.
2. List out the various dewatering methods. What are the dewatering methods available for fine grained
soils and explain any one of the method with a neat sketch.
32
119
16CE006 TRAFFIC ENGINEERING AND SAFETY (ELECTIVE II)

3103
Course Outcomes
1. Identify traffic stream characteristics and studies
2. Build knowledge on traffic capacity and level of service
3. Discover parking problems and manage traffic regulations
4. Design traffic signal cycle and Rotary Island capacity
5. Build knowledge on measures for Road safety
6. Discover traffic-environment problems
COs–POs Mapping
COs PO3 PSO#2
1 3 2
2 3 2
3 2 3
4 3 3
5 3 2
6 2 2
Unit I
Traffic Characteristics and Traffic Measurement
Basic characteristics of Traffic-Volume, Speed and Density- Relationship among Traffic parameters.
Traffic Measurement: Traffic Volume Studies-Objectives- Types of Volume Studies –Concept of PCU- Data
Collection and Presentation – Speed Studies – Types of Speeds- Objectives of Speed Studies- Methods of
Conducting speed studies- Data collection and Presentation- Statistical Methods for Analysis of Speed Data-
Origin and Destination studies.
Traffic studies-passenger car unit (PSU)-speed stdies-analysis of speed data-orgin and destination studies (O-D
studies)
11+ 4 Hours
Unit II
Highway Capacity and Parking Studies
Importance of capacity – Factors affecting Capacity- Concept of Level of Service- Different Levels of Service-
Concept of Service Volume- Peak Hour Factor.
Parking Studies: Types of parking facilities – Onstreet and Off Street Parking Facilities- Parking Studies-
Parking Inventory Study – Parking Survey by Patrolling Method- Analysis of Parking Data and parking
characteristics-Multi Story Car Parking Facility-Design standards.
Highway capacity-level of service-peak hour factor-onstreet and off street parking facilities-parking inventory-
multistory car parking
12 + 4 Hours
Unit III
Traffic Signs, Road Markings, Traffic Control and Regulation
Types of Traffic Signs- cautionary, Regulatory and Informative Signs- Specifications- Pavement markings-
Types of Markings – Lane markings and Object markings- Standards and Specifications for Road Markings.
Traffic Control & Regulation: Traffic Problems in Urban areas- Importance of Traffic Control and regulation-
Traffic Regulatory Measures- Channelisation-Traffic Signals- Saturation Flow – Signal systems-Signal Design
by Webster Method – Signal Phasing and Timing Diagrams- Rotary Design.
Traffic signs-pavement markings-traffic regulation measures-traffic signals- Webster method of signal design -
rotary interection
12+ 4 Hours
120
Unit IV
Highway Safety, Traffic and Environment
Problem of Highway Safety – Types of Road accidents- Causes – Engineering Measures to reduce Accidents-
Enforcement Measures – Educational Measures- Road Safety Audit- Principles of Road Safety Audit.
Traffic & Environment: Detrimental effect of traffic on environment – Air Pollution – Pollutants due to Traffic
– Measures to reduce Air Pollution due to Traffic- Noise Pollution – Measures to reduce Noise Pollution.
Highway safety-engineering measures- road safety audit-effect of traffic on environment-air pollution-noise
pollution
10 + 3 Hours
Total: 45+15 Hours
Textbook (s)
1. L. R. Kadiyali , Traffic Engineering and Transport Planning , 7 th Ed., Khanna publishers, New Delhi,
2005.
2. S.K.Khanna & C.E.G.Justo, Highway Engineering, 7 th Ed, Nemchand & Bros., 2000.
Reference (s)
1. Mannering and Kilareski, Highway Engineering and Traffic Analysis, John Wiley Publications.
2. C. J. Khisty, Transportation Engineering – An Introduction, Prentice Hall
3. Partha Chakroborthy, Animesh Das, Principles of Transportation Engineering, Prentice Hall of India
SAMPLE QUESTION (S)

Remember 20 10 --
Understand 30 20 20
Apply 30 30 30
Analyze 30 30 30
Evaluate -- 10 20
Create -- -- --
Total (%) 100 100 100
REMEMBER
1. List out Methods of Conducting speed studies.
2. List the two factors considered by HCM in LOS.
3. List traffic signals coordination systems.
4. List the chances of generation of noise caused by road traffic.
UNDERSTAND
1. Derive the relationships between the following and represent diagrammatically.
2. (i) Flow and concentration. (ii) Speed and flow. (iii) Speed and concentration
3. Indicate the factors effecting level of service.
4. Indicate the warrants for traffic signals installation.
5. Indicate the measures to reduce air pollution caused by vehicular traffic.
APPLY
1. Twenty five spot speed observations were taken and are as 50 40 60 54 45 31 72 58 43 52 46 56 43 65
33 69 34 51 47 41 62 43 55 40 49 calculate(i)Time mean speed. (ii) Space mean speed and verify
between the two.
2. Predict Design standards of Multi Story Car Parking Facility.
3. A fixed time 2-phase signal is to be provided at an intersection having a north-south and an east west
road where only straight-ahead traffic is permitted. The design hour flows from the various arms and
the saturation flows for these arms are as following
122
North South East West

Design hour flow in PCU/hr 800 400 750 600
Saturation flow in 2400 2000 3000 3000
PCUs/hour
Calculate the optimum cycle time and green times for the minimum overall delay. The time lost per
phase due to starting delays can be assumed to be 2 seconds. The value of the amber period is 2
ANALYZE
1. Differentiate Statistical Methods for Analysis of Speed Data- Origin and Destination studies.
2. Differentiate Types of parking facilities.
3. Organize Types of Traffic Signs.
4. Justify Principles of Road Safety Audit.
EVALUATE
1. Criticize Signal Design by Webster Method?
2. Choose the Measures to reduce Noise Pollution?
33
seconds. Sketch the timing diagram for each phase.Indicate the measures to reduce noise pollution
caused by vehicular traffic ?
123
16CE007 DISASTER MANAGEMENT (OPEN ELECTIVE)

4003
Course Outcomes
1. Demonstrate the interdisciplinary nature of disaster management
2. Apply the knowledge to formulate different risk management frameworks and pre-preparedness tools
for natural and manmade disasters
3. Summarize the risk and vulnerability associated with disasters
4. Apply different technologies in the management of disasters
5. Outline the importance of education and preparedness in the management of disasters
6. Infer the role of different organizations in disaster management
COs–POs Mapping
COs PO2 PO7
1 2 2
2 3 3
3 3 2
4 3 3
5 1 2
6 1 3
Unit I
Introduction to Disaster Management and Management of Natural Disasters
Introduction: Interdisciplinary nature of the subject, Disaster Risk Reduction–Global Policies and Practices,
Basic Strategies and Practices of Disaster Reduction, Linking Disaster Risk Reduction with Global Framework,
Integrated Disaster Risk Management and Post-Disaster Response-Management of Natural Disasters: Floods,
Droughts, Earthquakes, Global Warming, Cyclones, Landslides, Tsunamis and Post Tsunami hazards along the
Indian Coast
Significant Aspects of Disasters-Global Earthquake Safety Initiative-Prediction of Tsunamis-Typology of flood
risks-Framework for Preparedness and Mitigation
12+3 Hours
Unit II
Management of Manmade Disasters and Risk & Vulnerability
Management of Manmade Disasters: Temporal Transport Hazard Dynamics, Solid Waste Management: Post–
disaster, A Threat of Bio-terrorism in Mega Cities, Rail and Air craft’s accidents, emerges infectious diseases,
AIDS and Climate Change Risk Reduction-Risk & Vulnerability: Building Codes and Land Use Planning,
Social Vulnerability, Environmental Vulnerability and Disaster Risk Reduction, Macroeconomic Management
and Sustainable Development, Financial Management of Disaster related Economic Losses
Temporal Analysis of Transport-Capacity Building and Institutional Strengthening-Climate Risk Management -
Decision Framework
11+4 Hours
Unit III
Role of Technology in Disaster Management
Role of Technology in Disaster Management: Implementation Technology for Disaster Reduction, Disaster
Management for Infrastructure, Geospatial Information in agriculture Drought Assessment and Monitoring,
Multimedia Technology in Disaster Risk Management Training-Education and Community: Education in
Disaster Risk Reduction , Essentials of School Disaster Education, Community Capacity and Disaster
Resilience, Community-based Disaster Recovery, Community-based Disaster Management and Social Capital,
Designing Resilience
Disaster Management Program-Building Community Capacity-Remote Sensing and GIS 11+4 Hours
Unit IV
Multi Sectional and Crosscutting Issues
Multi Sectional Issues: Impact of Disasters on Poverty and Deprivation, Climate Change Adaptation and Human
Health, Health Hazards and Environmental Risk-Crosscutting Issues: Forest Management and Disaster Risk
Reduction, Institutional Capacity in Disaster Management, Corporate Sector and Disaster Risk Reduction,
Essentials of Pre-disaster Recovery Planning
124
Poverty Vulnerability Indices-Protective Functions of Forest Resources-Corporate Organizations and Disaster

Potential-Community Focused Approach
11+4 Hours
Total: 45+15 Hours
Textbook (s)
1. R. Shaw and R. R. Krishna Murthy, Disaster Management: Global Challenges and Local Solutions, 1st
Ed., Universities Press (India) Private Limited, Hyderabad, 2009
2. J. Singh, Disaster Management: Future Challenges and Opportunities,2 nd Ed., I.K.International
Publishing House Private Limited, New Delhi, 2007
Reference (s)
1. D. P. Coppola, Introduction to International Disaster Management, 3 rd Ed., Elsevier Publications, 2011
2. U. Ranke, Natural Disaster Risk Management, Springer International Publishing, 2016
SAMPLE QUESTION (S)

Cognitive Level Int. Test 1 (%) Int. Test 2 (%) Assignment Test 34 (%)
Remember 20 10 --
Understand 30 40 --
Apply 50 50 100
Analyze -- -- --
Evaluate -- -- --
Create -- -- --
Total (%) 100 100 100
REMEMBER
1. Define Hazard.
2. Define Disaster.
3. What are the different phases of disaster management cycle?
4. Define Tsunami.
5. Define landslide.
UNDERSTAND
1. Explain when hazard become disaster
2. “Prevention is better than cure is opted proverb in the context of disaster management” Explain.
3. Explain the causes of global warming.
4. Explain the difference between environmental and social vulnerabilities.
5. “All the developmental projects will lead to disaster risk”, Justify.
APPLY
1. Role of Geospatial technology in disaster management
2. Role of multimedia technology in disaster management
34
Assignmenttest should contain only questions related to Higher Order Thinking (HOT) Skills pertaining to this course
125
16EE004 RENEWABLE ENERGY SOURCES (OPEN ELECTIVE)

4003
Course Outcomes
1. Summarize the principles of solar energy systems
2. Demonstrate the applications of solar energy system
3. Illustrate the working principles of wind and biomass energy systems
4. Interpret working principles of geothermal energy system
5. Summarize operation and classification of ocean , tidal, fuel cells, small hydro and magneto hydro
energy system
6. Extend renewable energy sources to distributed generation & micro grids
COs – POs Mapping
COs PO2 PO7
1 3 2
2 2 3
3 2 3
4 2 3
5 2 3
6 3 2
Unit I
Introduction &Solar Energy
Introduction to renewable energy, advantages of generating power through renewable energy sources – technical
& economical, Solar Energy: Physics of sun, the solar constant, extra-terrestrial and terrestrial solar radiation,
instruments for measuring solar radiation and sun shine. Flat Plate and Concentrating Collectors, classification
of concentrating collectors, thermal analysis of flat plate collectors, Photo voltaic energy conversion,PV cell
model and characteristics, Maximum power point tracking for photovoltaic power systems. Types of Maximum
power point tracking methods (Perturb and Observe (hill climbing), Incremental Conductance, Fractional short
circuit current, Fractional open circuit voltage)
Solar applications-solar heating /cooling technique
12+4 Hours
Unit II
Wind & Bio-Mass Energy
Sources and potentials, horizontal and vertical axis windmills, performance characteristics, Betz criteria,
maximum power point tracking for wind, types of Maximum power point tracking methods
Principles of Bio-Conversion, Anaerobic/aerobic digestion,Types of Bio-Gas Digesters,gas yield, Combustion
characteristics of bio-gas,
Utilization for cooking, IC.Engine operation 12+4 Hours
Unit III
Energy Conversion systems
Geothermal & Ocean Energy: Types of Resources (hydrothermal, geo-pressured, hot dry rock), types of
wells, and methods of harnessing the energy (vapour dominated, liquid dominated).Ocean thermal energy
conversion, principles, Open loop&closed loop OTEC Cycles.Tidal energy- potential, conversion techniques-
single basin, two basin system. Wave energy: conversion techniques.
Fuel cells-Principle of working of various types of fuel cells and their working, Magneto-hydrodynamics
(MHD)-Principle of working of MHD Power plant, Hydrogen generation, battery energy storage system.
Wave, tidal power conversion systems & Small hydro power generation 11+3 Hours
Unit IV
Distributed generation & Microgrid
Define grid, distributed generation(DG) & microgrid, importance of DG & microgrid, typical structure and
configuration of a microgrid, AC and DC microgrids, modes of operation and control of microgrid: grid
connected and islanded mode, anti-islanding schemes: passive, active and communication based techniques.
HVDC microgrid system 10+4 Hours
Total: 45+15=60 Hours
126
Textbook (s)
1. G.D. Rai , Non-Conventional Energy Sources, Khanna Publishers, 1 stEdition, 2000.
2. B H Khan, Non-conventional energy resources, Tata McGraw Hill Education Private Limited, 2 ndEdition,
2001.
3. Alexis Kwasinski , Wayne Weaver, Robert S. Balog, Micro grids and other local area power and
energy systems, Cambridge University Press, 1st Edition, 2016
Reference (s)
1. Tiwari and Ghosal, Renewable energy resources, Narosa Publishing house, 2 ndEdition, 2001
2. Ranjan Rakesh, Kothari D. P. & Singal K. C., Renewable Energy Sources And Emerging
Technologies, PHI, 2ndEdition, 2013
3. Nikos Hatziargyriou, Micro grids: Architectures and Control, wiley, 1st Edition.
4. Electricity Act 2003, Renewable Energy Act 2015.
5. Indian Constitution-Articles 51A, 47, 48A.
SAMPLE QUESTION (S)
Cognitive Level Int. Test 1 (%) Int. Test 2 (%) Comprehensive Test35 (%)
Remember 40 40 ---
Understand 60 60 80
Apply 20
Analyze --- --- ---
Evaluate --- --- ---
Create --- --- ---
Total (%) 100 100 100
REMEMBER
1. Define renewable energy
2. List out the advantages HAWT
3. List out the disadvantages non concentration collector
4. Define solar radiation
5. Define solar constant
6. Define micro-grid
UNDERSTAND
1. Explain need of micro-grid
2. Interpret faraday’s laws
3. Explainclosed loop OTEC Cycles system
4. Explain Principle of working of MHD Power plant
5. Compare HAWT and VAWT
6. Classify concentrating collectors
APPLY
1. Compute the power coefficient of wind turbine
2. Demonstrate storage of energy from battery
3. Assess magnetic flux density due to circular ring
4. Compute solar cell working
5. Assess the nature of microgrid
35
Comprehensive test should contain only questions related to Higher Order Thinking (HOT) Skills
127
16ME009 PRINCIPLES OF ENTREPRENEURSHIP (OPEN ELECTIVE)

3103
Course Outcomes
1. Explain the role of entrepreneur in economic development
2. Demonstrate methods of generating ideas
3. Develop the business plan to start their own enterprise
4. Manage various production aspects such as manufacturing costs control, marketing management and
waste reduction
5. Make financial plan for enterprise
6. Find the institutional support entrepreneurship
COs–POs Mapping
COs PO8 PO12
1 3 3
2 1 2
3 1 3
4 2 2
5 3 3
6 1 2
3 – Strongly linked | 2 – Moderately linked | 1 – Weakly linked
Unit I
Introduction to Entrepreneurship
Definition of Entrepreneur, Entrepreneurial Traits, Entrepreneur Vs. Manager, Entrepreneur Vs Entrepreneur.
The Entrepreneurial decision process- Role of Entrepreneurship in Economic Developments, Ethics and Social
responsibility of entrepreneurs, Woman as entrepreneur.
Opportunities for entrepreneurs in India and abroad.
10+3 Hours
Unit II
Creating and starting the venture
Sources of new Ideas, Methods of generating ideas, creating problems solving- Product planning and
development process
The business plan
Writing Business plan, Evaluating Business plans, Using and implementing business plans, marketing plan,
financial plan and the organizational plan launching formalities
Nature and scope of business plan.
15+5 Hours
Unit III
Financing and managing the new venture
Source of Capital, record keeping, recruitment, motivating and leading teams, financial controls, Marketing
and sales controls. E- Commerce and Entrepreneurship
New venture expansion strategies and issues
Features evaluation of joint ventures, acquisitions, merges, franchising, Public issues, rights issues, bonus
issues
Internet advertising
9+3 Hours
Unit IV
Institutional support Entrepreneurship
Role of Dire crate of Industries, District Industries, Centers (DICS), Industrial development Corporation
(IDC), state Financial corporation (SFCs), Small Scale Industries Development Corporations (SSIDCs), Khadi
and village Industries Commission (KVIC), Technical Consultancy Organization (TCO), small Industries
Service Institute (SISI), National Small Industries Corporation (NSIC), Small Industries Development Bank of
India (SIDBI), salient provision under Indian Factories Act, Employees State Insurance Act, Workmen’s
Compensation Act and payment of Bonus Act.
Labour legislation
11+4 Hours
Total: 45+15Hours
128
Textbook (s)
1. Robert Hisrich & Michael Peters, Entrepreneurship, TMH, 5th Edition, 2009.
2. Dollinger, Entrepreneurship, Pearson Education, 4 th Edition, 2004.
Reference (s)
1. Vasant Desal, The Dynamics of Entrepreneurial Development and Management Himalaya publishing
House, 5th Edition, 2017.
2. William A. Sahlman, James Stancill, Arthur Rock, Harvard Business Review on Entrepreneurship,
Harvard Business School Press, 10th Edition 1999.
3. Robert J. Calvin, Entrepreneurial Management, Tata McGraw-Hill Education 2004.
4. Gurmeet Naroola, The Entrepreneurial Connection: East Meets West in the Silicon Valley, Special
edition, TiE, 2001.
5. Bill Bolton & John Thompson, Entrepreneurs Talent, Temperament, Technique, Routledge, 2 nd Edition,
2004.
6. Agrawal, A.N. & Agarwal, M.K., Indian Economy: Problems of Development and Planning, New Age
International, 42nd Edition, 2017.
7. Gaurav Datt & Ashwani Mahajan, Dutt & Sundaram’s Indian Economy, S. Chand, 72 nd Edition, 2016.
8. Srivastava, Industrial Relations Labour Laws, Vikas Publishing House, 6th Edition, 2005.
9. Aruna Kaulgud, Entrepreneurship Management by Vikas publishing house, 2003.
10. Thomas W. Zimmerer & Norman M. Scalbrorough, Essential of Entrepreneurship and small business
management, PHI, 4th Edition, 2005.
11. Mary Coulter, Entrepreneurship in Action, PHI 2 nd Edition, 2005.
12. Kaplan, Patterns of Entrepreneurship, Willey, 4 th Edition, 2005.
13. ND Kapoor, Industrial Law, Sultan Chand & Sons, 14 th Revised Edition, 2013
SAMPLE QUESTION (S)
Remember 30 40 -
Understand 70 60 -
Apply - - 35
Analyze - - 45
Evaluate - - 20
Create - - -
Total (%) 100 100 100
REMEMBER
1. List the different methods of generating ideas and explain any four methods.
2. List the difference between entrepreneur vs manager.
3. What are the objectives of market research?
4. What are the market research activities? List them.
5. List the important functions of IDBI.
UNDERSTAND
1. Illustrate the difference between entrepreneur vs manager.
2. Illustrate the characteristics or traits of an entrepreneur.
3. Illustrate the sources of new ideas for entrepreneur.
4. Explain the various steps involved in writing a business plan.
5. What are the various sources of capital required for business venture?
6. Describe the role of E-commerce in entrepreneurship with its applications.
7. Write about marketing plan and financial plans required for an entrepreneur.
8. Illustrate the factories act 1948.
9. Illustrate the reasons for the need of labour legislation becomes important
.
36Assignment Test should contain only questions related to Higher Order Thinking (HOT) Skills
129
16EC004 FUNDAMENTALS OF GLOBAL POSITIONING SYSTEM (OPEN ELECTIVE)

3103
Course Outcomes
1. Summarize the history of GPS, NAVSTAR GPS
2. State the working principle of GPS, GNSSs
3. Outline GALILEO, GLONASS signal constellation details
4. Conclude about GPS segments, signal components, IRNSS specifications
5. Demonstrate GPS coordinate systems
6. Classify various datums and map projections
COs–POs Mapping
COs PO1 PO2

1 1 2
2 1 2
3 2 3
4 2 3
5 3 2
6 2 2
3–Strongly linked | 2–Moderately linked| 1–Weakly linked
Unit I
Introduction to Global Navigation Satellite Systems
The History of GPS, The Evolution of GPS, Development of NAVSTAR GPS, Block I, Block II, Block IIA,
Block IIR, Block IIR-M, Block IIF and Block III satellites, GPS working principle, Trilateration, Determination
of satellite position, Determining the receiver position: 2D or X-Y Plane, 3D or X-Y-Z Plane, Ionospheric
effects of GPS signals
GIS Integration
12+4 Hours
Unit II
Types of Global Navigation Satellite Systems
GALILEO: Advantages of GALILEO, signal components, PRN codes, Modulation schemes of Galileo signals:
BOC, Alt-BOC, Galileo and GPS Signal interoperability, Improved performance from the combination of
GALILEO and GNSSs, GLONASS: GLONASS constellation details, signal structure: PRN code,P-code,C/A
code,navigation data,signal modulation
GAGAN Navigation system
12+3 Hours
Unit III
GPS Satellite constellation and Signals
GPS system segments: Space segment, Control segment, User segment, GPS Signals: Pseudorandom noise
(PRN) code, C/A code, P code, Navigation data, GPS signal generation: generation of codes, Comparison of
GNSSs in terms of constellation and services, IRNSS: Segments, 1A to 1G specifications, applications
Simulation of GPS signals
10+4 Hours
Unit IV
Coordinate Systems
Geoid, Ellipsoid, Coordinate Systems: Geodetic and Geo centric, CTRS, CIRS, ECEF, Datums: world geodetic
1984, Indian geodetic datum, Conversion between Cartesian and geodetic coordinate frame, Map projections:
Advantages, metric properties, construction, types of map projections
Extract GPS Coordinates for a Google Maps Location 11+4 Hours
Total: 45+15 Hours
130
Textbook (s)
1. G.S. Rao, Global Navigation Satellite Systems, McGraw-Hill Publications, New Delhi, 2010
2. Ahmed El-Rabbany, Introduction to GPS: the Global Positioning System,Artech House, 2002
Reference (s)
1. Scott Gleason and DemozGebre- Egziabher, GNSS Applications and Methods, Artech House, 685
Canton Street, Norwood, MA 02062, 2009
2. James Ba-Yen Tsui, Fundamentals of GPS receivers-A software approach, John Wiley &Sons, 2001
SAMPLE QUESTION (S)

Remember 20 -- --
Understand 45 35 --
Apply -- 35 45
Analyze 35 30 55
Evaluate -- -- --
Create -- -- --
Total (%) 100 100 100
REMEMBER
1. Define trilateration.
2. List two applications of GPS.
3. List two important specifications of GLONASS
4. Retrive the need of PRS.
5. Define ranging codes and data.
UNDERSTAND
1. Illustrate the working principle of GPS.
2. Identify the GPS and GLONASS interoperability issues.
3. Formulate the signal structure of GPS.
4. Abstract geodetic and geocentric coordinate systems.
5. Illustrate the modulation techniques of GALILEO system.
APPLY
1. Compute the receiver position using 3D plane.
2. Find the pseudo range on satellite with travelling time of 70ms?
3. Find the free space loss factor on a GPS satellite L1 C/A code signal at a distance of 2x107.
X
4. Show that the longitude of a point in ECEF is   tan1 .
Y
x(t)  A, t   / 2
5. Compute the Fourier transform of a pulse signal defined as
 0, t   / 2
ANALYSE
1. Compare the features of C/A code and P-code.
2. Outline the unknowns to be solved in acquisition of GPS signal.
3. Contrast BOC and AltBOC modulation techniques.
4. Compare GPS and IRNSS features
5. Contrast ephemeris and almanac codes
37
130
16CS006 COMPUTATIONAL INTELLIGENCE (OPEN ELECTIVE)

3103
Course Outcomes
1. Identify and describe Soft Computing Techniques and their roles in building Intelligent Machines
2. Apply Supervised Learning Networks in Machine Learning Problems
3. Illustrate the working of Associative memory networks
4. Apply Unsupervised Learning Networks in Machine Learning Problems
5. Apply Fuzzy Logic and Reasoning to handle Uncertainty and Solve Engineering Problem
6. Apply Genetic Algorithms to solve Optimized Problems
COs – POs Mapping
COs PO3
1 3
2 3
3 2
4 3
5 3
6 2
Unit I
Basic Elements of Soft Computing
Basic elements of Soft Computing: Difference between Hard Computing & Soft Computing - Introduction
to Neural Networks - Fuzzy Logic - Genetic Algorithms - Hybrid Systems. Artificial Neural Networks:
Introduction to Artificial Neural Networks - Evolution of Neural Networks - Basic Models of Neural
Networks - McCulloch-Pitts Neuron - Hebb Network.
Basics of Artificial Intelligence and Computational Intelligence. 11+4 Hours
Unit II
Supervised Learning Network
Supervised Learning Network: Artificial Neural Networks: Introduction - Perceptron Networks - Back
Propagation Network. Radial Basis Function Network.
Associative Memory Networks: Auto-associative Memory Network - Hetero auto-associative Memory
Network - Bidirectional Associative Memory (BAM) - Hopfield Networks.
Functional Link Neural Network. 11+4 Hours
Unit III
Unsupervised Learning Network
Introduction - Fixed Weight Competitive Nets -Kohonen Self-Organizing Feature Maps - Learning Vector
Quantization - Counter Propagation Networks - Adaptive Resonance Theory Networks (ART-1 & ART-2).
Support Vector Machines and their applications for Classification. 11+4 Hours
Unit IV
Fuzzy logic and Genetic Algorithm
Introduction to Fuzzy Sets: Difference between Classical Sets & Fuzzy Sets – Properties.
Classical Relations and Fuzzy Relations: Cartesian product of Relations - Classical Relations - Fuzzy Relations
Membership Functions: Features of Membership Functions -Fuzzification - and Defuzzification
Genetic Algorithm: Basic Concepts – Operators.
Concepts on Fuzzy Controller and its applications -a Simple Application of Genetic Algorithm for function
Optimization.
11+4 Hours
Total: 44+16 Hours
Textbook (s)
1. S. N. Sivanandam, S N Deepa, Principles of Soft Computing, 2 ndEditionWiley India, 2007
2. V. Kecman, Learning and soft computing, Pearson Education, India, 2006
3. Russell Eberhart and Yuhui Shi - Computational Intelligence: Concepts to Implementations (2007)
131
Reference(s)
1. G. J. Klir and Bo Yuan, Fuzzy sets and Fuzzy Logic, Prentice Hall, USA, 1995
2. N. J. Nelsson, Artificial Intelligence, A New Synthesis, Harcourt Asia Ltd., 1998
3. D. E. Goldberg, Genetic Algorithms: Search, Optimization and Machine Learning, Addison Wesley,
N.Y – 1989
4. S. Haykins, Neural networks: a comprehensive foundation Pearson Education, India, 2002
5. A. P. Engelbrecht, Computational Intelligence: An Introduction, John Wiley & Sons, 2007.
6. X. Yu and M. Gen, Introduction to Evolutionary Algorithms, Springer Verlag, 2010.
7. Fakhreddine Karray and Clarence de Silva - Soft Computing and Intelligent Systems Design, 2004.
8. Andries Engelbrecht - Computational Intelligence: an Introduction, 2007.
9. Amit Konar - Computational Intelligence: Principles, Techniques, and Applications, 2005.
10. Vojislav Kecman - Learning and Soft Computing: Support Vector Machines, Neural Networks, and
Fuzzy Logic Models, 2001.
SAMPLE QUESTION (S)

Remember 25 15 --
Understand 35 15 --
Apply 20 20 40
Analyze 20 30 40
Evaluate -- 20 20
Create -- -- --
Total (%) 100 100 100
REMEMBER
1. Define Chromosome
2. List two methods in which the information flows in a nervous system
3. List five unsupervised learning algorithms
4. List the difference between classical logic and fuzzy logic
5. List the computational units of ART
UNDERSTAND
1. Explain the components of Soft Computing
2. Explain the role of activation function in exhibiting the output from a neuron
3. Construct the 5 node pattern {0,1,1,0,1} by Hopfield network and explain the procedure for recalling
and storing
4. Explain Adaptive Resonance Theory and its type
5. Explain CPN and illustrate the steps involved in training algorithm of full CPN
APPLY
1. Construct a ANN circuit which makes the flow of data using multilayered and multilevel networks
2. Apply clusters of various datasets maintained by learning approach considering live example
3. Draw the neat architecture of hamming network and trace the inhibitatory and excitatory neurons by
considering an inconsistent vector
4. Find the Max-min and Max Product composition of the fuzzy relation matrices
R={0.6,0.3,0.2,0.9}(2x2) S={1,0.5,0.3,0.8,0.4,0.7}(2x3)
5. Find the cardinality for the matrices R={1,4,6,7}(2x2) S={5,2,3,7}(2x2)
ANALYZE
1. Differentiate between learning and training algorithms considering multilayer perceptron networkand
trace the different types of networks obtained.
2. Differentiate between Counter Propagation Network and Adaptive Resonance Theory
38
132
EVALUATE
1. Evaluate using Back Propagation algorithm for the below map considering weights , inputs and outputs
2. Evaluate the instance, that the 2 dimensional input vector X is presented to the three-neuron
ohonennetwork, x=[ 0.52 0.12]. The initial weight vectors, W j are given by
W1=[0.27 , 0.81]
W2=[0.42 , 0.70]
W3=[0.43 , 0.21]
in a form of 2 X 1 matrix. Find the winning neuron using the Euclidean distance and apply kernel self-
organization map.State the differences between register machines and stack machine?
133
16CS007 IoT for ENGINEERING APPLICATIONS (OPEN ELECTIVE)

(COMMON TO CH, CE, EE, EC, ME & PE)
3103
Course Outcomes
1. Understand the basic concepts of IoT
2. Summarize the structural knowledge of IoT
3. Explain M2M in the context of Internet of Things.
4. Describe the IoT Reference Architecture
5. Design the Internet of things systems for the given problem
6. Apply IoT for various engineering applications
COs–POs Mapping
COs PO1 PO3
1 3 1
2 3 3
3 3 3
4 3 3
5 3 3
6 3 3
Unit I
Introduction and Fundamental IoT Mechanisms
What is the Internet of Things? : History of IoT, About IoT, Overview and Motivations, Examples of
Applications, Internet of Things Definitions and Frameworks : IoT Definitions, IoT Architecture, Identification
of IoT Objects and Services, Structural Aspects of the IoT, Environment Characteristics, Traffic Characteristics,
Scalability, Interoperability, Security and Privacy.
IOT paradigm-smart objects-Bits an atoms-goal orientation-RTLS+ GPS-agents+ Multi agent system
12+3 Hours
Unit II
M2M to IoT
A Market Perspective– Introduction, Some Definitions, M2M Value Chains, IoT Value Chains, An emerging
industrial structure for IoT, The international driven global value chain and global information
monopolies. M2M to IoT-An Architectural Overview– Building an architecture, Main design principles and
needed capabilities, An IoT architecture outline, standards considerations.
Introduction to Atmega 8 /16 microcontroller- Architecture of the AVR Microcontroller-Pin description of the
microcontroller-I/O of the microcontroller-IR Sensors
11+4 Hours
Unit III
IoT Reference Architecture
Introduction, Functional View, Information View, Deployment and Operational View, Other Relevant
architectural views. Real-World Design Constraints- Introduction, Technical Design constraints-hardware is
popular again, Interaction and remote control. Industrial realizing the enterprise integrated Web of Things, IMC-
AESOP: from the Web of Things to the Cloud of Things, Commercial Building Automation- Introduction, Case
study: phase one-commercial building automation today, Case study.
Specification-Domain Model Specification-Information Model Specification-Service Specifications-IoT Level
Specification-Functional View 11+4 Hours
Unit VI
IoT for Business Applications
Internet of Things Application : IoT for Smart Grid ,City Automation, Automotive Applications, Home
Automation, Smart Cards , Process Monitoring / Automation, Sensor Technology, Raspberry- pi Interface,
Smart Healthcare, Smart Transportation, M2M Communication, Smart Metering, Systems and Services
Integration, Hands-on training, Smart Waste Management System.
134
Sharing Sensor Data on Social Networks-Twitter-Facebook Connection App-Updation of Sensor Data on

Website / Blog 11+4 Hours
Textbook (s)
1. Jan Holler, Vlasios Tsiatsis, Catherine Mulligan, Stefan Avesand, Stamatis Karnouskos, David
Boyle, From Machine-to-Machine to the Internet of Things: Introduction to a New Age of
Intelligence, 1st Edition, Academic Press, 2014.
2. Daniel Minoli, Building the Internet of Things with IPv6 and MIPv6: The Evolving World of M2M
Communications, ISBN: 978-1-118-47347-4, Willy Publications, 2014
3. Bernd Scholz-Reiter, Florian Michahelles, Architecting the Internet of Things, ISBN 978-3- 642-
19156-5 e-ISBN 978-3-642-19157-2, Springer, 2016
Reference Book (s)
1. Parikshit N. Mahalle & Poonam N. Railkar, Identity Management for Internet of Things, River
Publishers, ISBN: 978-87-93102-90-3 (Hard Copy), 978-87-93102-91-0 (ebook), 2015
SAMPLE QUESTION (S)

Remember 40 40 --
Understand 50 40 20
Apply 10 10 40
Analyze -- 10 30
Evaluate -- -- 10
Create -- -- --
Total (%) 100 100 100
REMEMBER
1. Write the major significance of Internet of Things.
2. State the crucial requirement f IoT in terms of application and its supporting natures.
3. List the dominant technologies behind IoT development.
4. Identify two major differences between Internet of Everything and Industrial IoT.
5. Write about the data-center based cloud tools that use to run the machine learning algorithm internally.
6. Recognizes an alternative approach that results in better adaptivity in case of network fluctuations and
increased latency.
7. Identify the on-demand processing and storage capabilities that is used to analyze the data generated by
IoT objects in batch or stream format.
UNDERSTAND
1. Identify the evolutionary terms of Internet of Things (IoT) that use to interact and live with the physical
objects.
2. Illustrate the reference architecture of IoT that unifies the smart objects and human beings to provide
the ubiquitous communication
3. Illustrate the service-oriented architecture of IoT that ensures the interoperability among the
heterogeneous devices
4. Illustrate the API-Oriented Architecture of IoT that use SOAP and Remote Method Invocation (RMI)
as a means for describing, discovering, and calling services
5. Discuss the resource capacity, selecting and provisioning the resources that greatly impact Quality of
Service (QoS) of the IoT applications
6. Classify the taxonomy of resource management activities of IoT.
7. Report the standard requirement of real time analytics to fulfill the demand of real-time stream
processing engine.
39
Assignment test should contain only questions related to Higher Order Thinking (HOT) Skills pertaining to this course.
135
APPLY
1. Interpret a study analysis on open-source prototyping platform for the industrial IoT Implement a
suitable OPENIoT Architecture for IoT/Cloud Convergence that provides an abstract presentation of
the functional elements of architecture.
2. Sketch W3C SSN-XG ontology and how to semantically enable real time sensor feeds
3. Execute the two-tier data dissemination model for large-scale wireless sensor network
4. Demonstrate SPARQL query caching in order to improve the performance of semantic web
applications
5. Illustrations a technique to cluster semantically similar QA pairs for retrieving an answer for a newly
given query without asking the QA engine on the cloud side
ANALYZE
1. Comparative analysis on real-time analytics in Cloud-IoT and fog computing.
2. Compare the communication efficiencies for the following protocols such as AMPQ, CoAP, DDS,
MQTT, UPnP and XMPP in terms of Transport Layer Protocols.
3. Differentiate the major significances of nesC, keil C and Dynamic C.
4. Relate a set of minimal features to be fulfilled by the programming frameworks for IoT.
5. Comparative analysis on IoT programming approaches
EVALUATE
1. Select an example that utilizes the device-collaboration framework for the proactive suggestion
application
2. Appraise a semantic QA cache that implement the device/cloud collaboration framework to compute
the probability of the on-device semantic QA cache to answer a given query correctly.
3. Select a suitable example that use automatically tagging recognized images to display the additional
information such as social sentiment in order to achieve similar performance improvement for speech-
recognition application with DL through device/cloud collaboration framework
4. Critique on fog-computing assisted distributed analytics system that uses a set of fall-detection
algorithms, including algorithms based on acceleration measurements and time-series analysis
methods, as well as filtering techniques to facilitate the fall-detection process.
136
16CH007 INDUSTRIAL SAFETY AND HAZARD MANAGEMENT

(OPEN ELECTIVE)
3103
Course Outcomes
1. Demonstrate the safety and ethical issues that may arise from industrial processes
2. Explain industrial hygiene practices and its procedures
3. Illustrate the toxic pathways and elimination of toxicity on bio organisms
4. Understand hazards arising from runaway reactions, explosions and fires, and how to deal with them.
5. Choose a suitable method for prevention of fires and explosions
6. Evaluate the process and able to do Hazards Identification and risks Risk Assessment
COs – POs Mapping
COs PO3 PO8

1 1 3
2 1 3
3 3 1
4 1 2
5 3 2
6 3 2
7.
Unit I
Introduction to Safety & Industrial Hygiene
Safety programs, Engineering ethics, Accident and Loss Statistics, Acceptable Risk, Public Perceptions, The
nature of the Accident Process, Inherent Safety, Government of India and OSHA regulations, Industrial
Hygiene, Identification, Evaluation & Control
Lethal dosage–Material Safety Data Sheets
12+4 Hours
Unit II
Toxicology, Fires and Explosions
how toxicants enter biological organisms, how toxicants are eliminated from biological organisms, effects of
toxicants on biological organisms The fire triangle, Distinction between fire and explosions, Definitions,
Flammability characteristics of liquids and vapors, MOC and inerting, ignition energy, Auto ignition, Auto
oxidation, Adiabatic compression, Explosions
Firefighting equipment–Personal protecting equipment–Building fire safety codes
11+3 Hours
Unit III
Designs to Prevent Fires and Explosions
Inerting, static electricity, controlling static electricity, explosion proof equipment and instruments, ventilation,
sprinkler systems, miscellaneous designs for preventing fires and explosions
Work permit–Earthling–Color codes for identification of process
10+4 Hours
Unit IV
Hazards Identification and Risk Assessment
Process hazards checklists, hazards surveys, hazards and operability studies, safety reviews, other methods.
Review of probability theory, event trees, fault trees, QRA and LOPA
Health and safety foundation–5S Practice–Emergency procedures
12+4 Hours
Total: 45+15 Hours
Text book (s)
1. D. A. Crowl, J. F. Louvar, Chemical Process Safety: Fundamentals with Applications, 3 rd Ed., Prentice
Hall, 2011
2. Reese, Charles D. Industrial Safety and Health for People-oriented Services. CRC Press, 2008
137
Reference (s)
1. H.H.Fawcett and W.S.Wood, Safety and Accident Prevention in Chemical Operations, John Wiley and
sons, 2nd Ed., New York, 1982
2. Hammer, Willie, and Dennis Price. Occupational safety management and engineering. Pearson College
Division, 2001
SAMPLE QUESTION (S)

Remember 20 20 --
Understand 30 20 --
Apply 30 20 35
Analyze 20 30 35
Evaluate -- 20 30
Create -- -- --
Total (%) 100 100 100
REMEMBER
1. Define terms hazard and accidents
2. List three-step of accidents process?
3. Define terms LD and ED
4. List any four reversible effects that caused by toxic exposure
5. Define terms risk, loss prevention
UNDERSTAND
1. Identify the initiation, propagation, and termination steps for motor accident
2. Explain about how toxicants enter biological organisms
3. Explain the key responsibilities’ of professional engineers
4. Explain the inherent safety techniques that are used in the chemical industry
5. Explain how toxicants are eliminated from biological organisms
6. List the ingredients of safety program for outstanding safety program
APPLY
1. An employee works in a plant with a FAR of 4. If this employee works a 4-hr shift, 200 days per year,
what are the expected deaths per person per year?
2. Air contains 5 ppm of diethylamide (TLV-TWA of 5 ppm), 20 ppm of cyclohexanol (TLV-TWA of 50
ppm), and 10 ppm of propylene oxide (TLV-TWA of 2 ppm). What is the mixture TLV-TWA and has
this level been exceeded?
3. The following accident report has been filed. Failure of a threaded 1½" drain connection on a rich oil
line at the base of an absorber tower in a large (1.35 MCF/D) gas producing plant allowed the release
of rich oil and gas at 850 psi and –40°F. The resulting vapor cloud probably ignited from the ignition
system of engine driven re compressors. The 75' high × 10' diameter absorber tower eventually
collapsed across the pipe rack and on two exchanger trains. Breaking pipelines added more fuel to the
fire. Severe flame impingement on an 11,000-horsepower gas turbine–driven compressor, waste heat
recovery, and super-heater train resulted in its near total destruction. Identify the initiation,
propagation, and termination steps for this accident
4. A process has a reported FAR of 2. If an employee works a standard 8-hr shift 300 days per year,
compute the deaths per person per year
ANALYZE
1. Can gate valves be placed between a vessel relief and its vessel
2. Liquid levels in storage tanks are frequently determined by measuring the pressure at the bottom of the
tank. In one such tank the material stored in the tank was changed and an overflow resulted. Why?
EVALUATE
1. How to convert your kitchen in to XP area
2. Does LOPA really replace 90% of the QRA?
40
138
16IT005 FUNDAMENTALS OF CLOUD COMPUTING (OPEN ELECTIVE)

3103
Course Outcomes
1. Interpret the main concepts, key technologies, strengths, and limitations of cloud computing and the
possible applications for state-of-the-art cloud computing
2. Illustrate various problems and evaluate related cloud computing solutions.
3. Apply the architecture and infrastructure of cloud computing, including SaaS, PaaS, IaaS, public cloud,
private cloud and hybrid cloud to different problems.
4. Analyze cloud provider for a defined environment and to a specific platform in a cost effective way.
5. Analyze case studies to derive the best practice model to apply when developing and deploying cloud
based applications
6. Build a virtual machine with a machine image
COs–POs Mapping
COs PO2 PO3 PO5
1 3 2 2
2 3 2 2
3 3 3 2
4 2 3 2
5 3 3 2
6 2 3 2
Unit I
Understanding Cloud Computing
Cloud computing: Introduction, Cloud application architectures, Value of cloud computing, Cloud Infrastructure
models, Cloud Services, History of Cloud Computing, Advantages of Cloud Computing, Disadvantages of
Cloud Computing, Companies in the Cloud Today, Amazon Web Services, Windows Azure, Google services,
IBM Cloud
Before the move into the cloud- Know Your Software Licenses, The Shift to a Cloud Cost Model, Service
Levels for Cloud Applications Ready for the cloud: Web Application Design, Machine Image Design, Privacy
Design, Design, Database Management.
Tata Cloud- Salesforce.com 13+3 Hours
Unit II
Virtual Machines and Virtualization of Clusters and Data Centers
Implementation Levels of Virtualization, Virtualization Structures/Tools and Mechanisms, Virtualization of
CPU, Memory, and I/O Devices, Virtual Clusters and Resource Management, Virtualization for Data-Center
Automation Case Studies: Cloud centers in detail, Comparing approaches, Xen, Eucalyptus, Cloud Stack, and
Open Stack
VMware- KVM. 10+5 Hours
Unit III
Scaling of Cloud Infrastructure & Security
Capacity, Planning, Cloud Scale.Cloud Security-Data Security, Network Security, Host Security, Compromise
Response
Disaster Recovery-Disaster Recovery Planning, Disasters in cloud, Cloud Disaster Management.
Requirements for modern data centers- high availability and Service Orientated Infrastructures (SOI)- Modern
data centre use case studies. 10+3 Hours
Unit IV
Cloud Computing Software Security Fundamentals
Cloud information Security Objectives, Cloud Security Services, Relevant Cloud Security Design Principles,
Secure Cloud Software Requirements, Approaches to Cloud Software Requirements Engineering, Cloud
Security Policy Implementation. Cloud Computing Risk Issues: The CIA Triad, Privacy and Compliance Risks,
Threats to Infrastructure Data and Access Control, Cloud Access Control Issues, Cloud Service Provider Risks.
139
Security concepts-Confidentiality-privacy-integrity-authentication-non-repudiation-availabilit- access control-

defence in depth- least privilege
12+4 Hours
Total: 45+15 Hours
Textbook (s)
1. George Reese, Cloud Application Architectures, 1st Edition O’Reilly Media, 2009
2. Ronald L.Krutz and Russell Dean Vines, Cloud Security, 1 st Edition, Wiley Publishing, 2010
Reference (s)
1. Michael Miller, Cloud Computing-Web Based Applications that change the way you work and
collaborate online, 1st Edition, Pearson Education, Publishing, 2011
2. Kai Hwang, Geoffrey C Fox and Jack J. Dongarra, Distributed & Cloud Computing from Parallel
Processing to the Internet of Things, 1st Edition, MK Publishing, 2010
3. David S Linthicum, Cloud Computing and SOA Convergence in Your Enterprise: A Step-by-Step
Guide, 1st Edition, Addison-Wesley, 2009
SAMPLE QUESTION (S)
Remember 40 45 --
Understand 40 45 --
Apply 20 10 80
Analyze -- -- 20
Evaluate -- -- --
Create -- -- --
Total (%) 100 100 100
REMEMBER
1. Define Cloud Computing
2. List types of virtualization
3. Define proactive scaling
4. What is CIA Triad?
UNDERSTAND
1. Explain different cloud Infrastructure models
2. Explain different levels of virtualization
3. Explain about cloud Network security in detail?
4. Explain about Recovery Point Objective.
APPLY
1. Explain any IaaS service provided by Amazon
2. What is cloud Stack?
3. How disaster recovery planning can be done
4. How Web Application Design is used in designing cloud applications
ANALYZE
1. Compare cloud center and service infrastructure.
2. Analyze different cloud services provided by Amazon
3. With neat diagram explain the functioning of Xen Architecture.
4. List and explain various cloud service providers risks.
41
Assignment test should contain only questions related to Higher Order Thinking (HOT) Skills Pertaining to this course
140
16PE007 SMART GRID TECHNOLOGIES (OPEN ELECTIVE)

3103
Course Outcomes
1. Compare the basic difference between existing grid and smart grid
2. Explain perfect power system network (Including distributed and fully integrated systems)
3. Explain the importance of renewable energy systems and distributed energy resources in smart grids
4. Summarize the wide area monitoring system and advanced measuring technologies
5. Recall the technologies like Zigbee, HAN and NAN in smart grids
6. Explain SCADA technology in modern power systems and to analyze the micro grid systems
COs – POs Mapping
COs PO3
1 2
2 3
3 3
4 3
5 3
6 3
3–Strongly linked | 2–Moderately linked| 1–Weakly linked
Unit I
Introduction to the Smart Grids
Introduction to smart grid- Electricity network-Local energy networks- General considerations for a smart grid,
characteristics of smart grids, elements in smart grids.
Electric transportation- Low carbon central generation-Attributes of the smart grid- Alternate views of a smart
grid.
Smart grid to evolve a perfect power system: Introduction- Overview of the perfect power system
configurations- Device level power system- Building integrated power systems- Distributed power systems-
Fully integrated power system-Nodes of innovation.
Present status of smart grids in India 14+4 Hours
Unit II
Smart Electric Grid & Measurement Technologies
Smart electric grid: generation- Distributed energy resources: Renewable energy, energy storage, solar energy,
wind energy, biomass, hydro power, geothermal and fuel cell, effect of electric vehicles(EV’s) , transmission,
distribution, and end-user; Basic concepts of power, load models, load flow analysis
Measurement Technologies: Wide area monitoring system (WAMS), advanced metering infrastructure (AMI),
phasor measurement units.
Functioning of PMU 12+3 Hours
Unit III
Communication & Networking Technology
Architectures, standards and adaptation of power line communication (PLC), zigbee, GSM, GPS, GIS, machine
to-machine communication models for the smart grid; Home area networks (HAN) and neighborhood area
networks (NAN)
Machine to human communication system 11+3 Hours
Unit IV
Energy Management in Smart grids
Aspects of energy management in the smart grid; SCADA; micro grids; demonstration projects; case studies.
Policy and economic drives of the smart grid; environmental implications; sustainability issues of smart grid
systems.
Environmental issues related to smart grid systems 10+3 Hours
Total: 45+15 Hours
141
Text Book(s)
1. Clark W Gellings, “The Smart Grid, Enabling Energy Efficiency and Demand Side Response”- CRC
Press, 2012
2. Janaka Ekanayake, Kithsiri Liyanage,Jianzhong.Wu, Akihiko Yokoyama, Nick Jenkins, “Smart Grid:
Technology and Applications”- Wiley, 2012
Reference(s)
1. A. Keyhani, Smart Power Grid Renewable Energy Systems, Wiley 2011
2. James Momoh, Smart Grid :Fundamentals of Design and Analysis, Wiley, IEEE Press, 2012
SAMPLE QUESTION (S)
Remember 10 10 ---
Understand 50 50 --
Apply 40 40 55
Analyze -- -- 45
Evaluate --- --- ---
Create --- --- ---
Total (%) 100 100 100
REMEMBER
1. Define smart grid system
2. Write about self healing capability
3. List out four basic characteristics of smart grid system
4. Write about resiliency to disturbances
5. Write down the basic elements of smart grid system
6. Write about smart meters
7. Write down the generation options which are possible in smart grid system
8. Write about the functions of smart grids
9. Write down the attributes of smart grid system
10. Write about smart home energy management system
UNDERSTAND
1. Illustrate the advanced power system network
2. Draw the block diagram of smart grid system
3. Explain the self healing property of smart grid system
4. Explain about self healing capability technology in smart grid systems
5. Explain the self healing property of smart grid system
6. Explain about the smart homes
7. Explain the energy storage system in smart grids
8. Explain about outage management system
APPLY
1. Construction of modern power system network with the help of basic characteristics
2. Choose the best renewable energy source based on the environmental conditions
3. Execute the smart home with the smart grid elements
4. Develop a smart hybrid electric vehicle with efficient battery system
5. Compute micro grid system with dc loads
6. Find the net power injected in the bus i for a two bus system
ANALYZE
1. Differentiate between traditional and modern grid
2. Identify the reasons for failure of existing grid
3. Justify the need of AMI in smart grids
4. Compare the operation of micro grid and smart grid systems
5. Identify WAMS in smart grids
42
142
16MA001 COMPUTATIONAL MATHEMATICS (OPEN ELECTIVE)

3103
Course Outcomes
1. Apply the knowledge of finding roots of nonlinear equations and different errors in series
approximations
2. Understand the consistency and inconsistency of linear system of equations
3. Evaluate the solution of Initial and Boundary value problems
4. Perform numerical differentiation and integration
5. Analyze the solution of PDEs under given conditions
6. Apply Knowledge of numerical techniques to Engineering problems
COs–POs Mapping
COs PO3
1 3
2 2
3 3
4 3
5 3
6 3
Unit I
Errors in numerical calculations and Solutions of algebraic and transcendental equations
Absolute, relative and percentage errors, a general error formula, errors in a series approximation
Locating Roots of Equations with one variable : Secant method, Muller’s method
Solution of nonlinear equations - Introduction, Iteration method, Newton-Raphson method
Develop MATLAB code for Bisection method, Newton-Raphson method and for the above methods
12 + 3 Hours
Unit II
Solution of Linear Systems and Interpolation
Direct methods -LU Decomposition, Iterative methods –Jacobi method, Gauss-Seidel method
Interpolating polynomials using finite differences- Bessel interpolation, Piecewise and spline interpolation -
Piecewise Linear interpolation, Quadratic spline interpolation
Develop MATLAB code for the above methods
11 + 4 Hours
Unit III
Numerical Integration and BVP(ODE)
Newton-Cotes methods (Weddle’s rule)
Solution of BVP - Finite difference method, shooting method, the cubic spline method
Develop MATLAB code for Trapezoidal, Simpson’s 1/3 & 3/8 rules and for the above methods
11+4 Hours
Unit IV
Numerical solutions of PDEs
Introduction, Finite difference approximations to derivatives, Solutions of Laplace & Poisson equations using
Jacobi’s, Gauss-Seidel & SOR methods. Solution of parabolic equation using -Bender-Schmidt & Crank-
Nicolson methods. Solution of hyperbolic equation
Develop MATLAB code for the above methods
11 + 4 Hours
Textbook(s)
1. M. K. Jain, S.R.K. Iyengar, R.K. Jain, Numerical methods for Scientific and Engineering Computation,
4th edition, New Age International publishers, New Delhi(
2. S. S. Sastry, Introductory methods of numerical analysis, 4 th Edition, PHI
3. B. S. Grewal, Higher Engineering Mathematics, 42 nd edition, Khanna publishers, New Delhi
143
Reference(s)
1. S. C. Chapra & R. P. Canale, Numerical Methods for Engineers, 6th Edition, McGraw Hill(2012)
2. Cleve Moler, Numerical Computing with MATLAB, SIAM.
SAMPLE QUESTION (S)
Assessment Pattern
Remember 30 30 -
Understand 45 40 -
Apply 20 25 40
Analyze 5 5 30
Evaluate - - -
Create - - 30
Total (%) 100 100 100
REMEMBER
1. List out different Errors in Numerical calculations
2. List the three numerical methods to solve Algebraic and Transcendental equations
3. Define initial and boundary value problem for Ordinary differential equations
4. List the numerical methods in solving Laplace’s, partial differential equations i.e. Parabolic and
hyperbolic
UNDERSTAND
1. Summarize the Absolute, relative and percentage Errors
2. Illustrate the procedure for Newton-Raphson method for finding root of an algebraic equation
3. Explain the mechanism involved in LU decomposition method in solving linear systems
4. Explain spline interpolation formula
APPLY
1. Given𝑓(x) = 𝑠𝑖𝑛x, construct the Taylor series approximations of orders 0 to 7 at x = 𝜋 and state their
3
absolute errors.
2. Apply Newton-Raphson method to find a root of the equation x3 − 2x − 5 = 0.
3. Given the set of data points (1,-8), (2,-1) and (3, 18) satisfying the functiony = 𝑓(x), find the linear
splines satisfying the given data. Determine the approximate values of y(2.5) and ẏ(2)
4. Apply Gauss-Seidel’s method to solve Laplace equation for the region given in the figure
ANALYZE
1. Compare the roots obtained from Secant method, Muller’s methods and explain which method is
preferable
2. Analyze the physical significance of spline’s interpolation formula
3. Differentiate shooting and cubic splines methods for numerical integration.
4. Analyze the platform for the application of Laplace Equation
43
Comprehensive test should contain only questions related to Higher Order Thinking (HOT) Skills
144
16CY001 NANO SCIENCE AND TECHNOLOGY (OPEN ELECTIVE)

3103
Course Outcomes
1. Apply various chemical and physical methods for the synthesis of nanomaterials
2. Understand the properties of nano-materials and their applications in relation to bulk materials
3. Describe the nano size effect on optical, electrical, magnetic and thermal properties
4. Characterize nano materials by powder XRD and microscopy techniques.
5. Understand structure, properties and applications of Fullerenes and Carbon nanotubes.
6. Review the applications of nanomaterials, specially semiconducting metal oxides for sensing and
catalysis
COs – POs Mapping
COs PO12
1 2
2 2
3 2
4 2
5 2
6 2
Unit I
Introduction to Nanomaterials
Introduction to nanomaterials and nanotechnology, Nano-sizes and their unique properties: comparison with the
bulk materials, Different shapes sizes and morphology of nanomaterials; Defects in nanocrystalline materials,
Effect of grain size on physical properties – magnetic, electrical, optical and thermal properties.
11 + 3 Hours
Unit II
Fabrication of Nanomaterials
Top Down Approaches: Grinding, Planetory milling and comparison of particles; Bottom Up Approach: Wet
Chemical Synthesis - Microemulsion Approach, Colloidal Nanoparticles Production, Sol Gel Methods,
Sonochemical Approach, Microwave and Atomization; Gas phase Production Methods - Chemical Vapour
Depositions; Carbon Nano structures: carbon molecules, carbon clusters, carbon nano tubes- synthesis,
formation. 12+4 Hours
Unit III
Characterization of Nanomaterials
Fractionation principles of particle size measurements, Particle size and its distribution, powder X-ray
Diffraction, Zeta potential, Electronic band structure Electron statistics Application: Optical transitions in solids,
photonic crystals, Microscopies: Scanning Electron Microscopy, Transmission Electron Microscopy, Atomic
Forced Microscopy, Scanning and Tunneling Microscopy. 11 + 4 Hours
Unit IV
Applications of Nanomaterials
Self-assembly and molecular manufacturing, Surfactant based system Colloidal system applications, Functional
materials Applications: Single walled and multi walled CNTs, quantum dots, GaN wires, TiO2 and ZnO nano
crystalline materials, Nanosensors based on optical properties.
11 + 4 Hours
Total: 45+15 Hours
145
Textbook(s)
1. B. S. Murthy, P. Shankar, Baldev Raj, B.B. Rath, Ames Murday, Text book of Nanoscience and
Nanotechnology, published by Springer & Universities Press (India) Pvt. Ltd.
2. Sulabha K. Kulkarni, Nanotechnology: Principles & Practices, Springer
3. Nils O. Petersen, Foundations for Nanoscience and Nanotechnology, CRC Press, 2017.
Reference(s)
1. Stuart M. Lindsay, Introduction to Nanoscience, Oxford University Press, 2009.
2. Robert Kelsall, Ian Hamley, Mark Geoghegan, Nanoscale Science and Technology, John Wiley &
Sons, 2005.
3. Gabor L. Hornyak , H.F. Tibbals , Joydeep Dutta , John J. Moore Introduction to Nanoscience and
Nanotechnology CRC Press
4. Davies, J.H. ‘The Physics of Low Dimensional Semiconductors: An Introduction’, Cambridge
University Press, 1998
SAMPLE QUESTION (S)

Remember 30 30 -
Understand 40 40 -
Apply 30 30 80
Analyze - - 20
Evaluate -- - -
Create -- - -
Total (%) 100 100 100
REMEMBER
1. Define a nanomaterial. List any four naturally occurring/synthetically prepared nanomaterils used in
daily life.
2. Differentiate between nano materials & bulk materials in terms of physical properties.
3. List two methods of preparing nanomaterials in bottom up approach & top down approach.
UNDERSTAND
1. Explain the sol-gel method of preparing nano materials. What kind of materials can be prepared by this
method in nano form.
2. How will the electrical, magnetic & optical properties vary for nano amterials compared to bulk.
Explain with an example for each.
3. What are the various carbon nano materials available? Describe one methos of producing Carbon nano
tubes.
APPLY
1. How is SEM used for characterization of nano materials? Describe the principle and working of
instrument.
2. Based on the optical properties of Nano TiO2 and ZnO, describe the design & construction of nano
sensors.
3. Describe the functions and applications of Carbon nano tubes and gaN nano wires.
ANALYZE
1. How is the size of nanomaterials characterized? Assess the advantage of using SEM & TEM instead of
powder XRD for size of particle, grain size characterization.
2. For a semiconductor, as the materials is sized down to nano, the electronic band structure is found to
vary from bulk material. Explain the changes in electronic band structure for a direct band gap
material.
3. Calculate the changes in surface to volume ratio (S/V ratio) for a particle of 1 micrometer cube divided
into 10 nanometer cubes by top down approaches. Comment on its impact in catalysis
44
146
16CE607 ENVIRONMENTAL ENGINEERING LAB

0032
Course Outcomes
1. Demonstrate how to perform relevant tests in the laboratory to determine the major characteristics of
water and wastewater
2. Make use of various equipment/methods available for examining water and wastewater
3. Identify the practical significance of the characteristics, the relevant codes of practice for examination
and permissible limits for the characteristics of water and wastewater
4. Assess the pollutant concentration in water and wastewater
5. Choose various treatment techniques for water, wastewater and recycled water
6. Recommend the degree of treatment required for the water and wastewater
COs–POs Mapping
COs PO4
1 3
2 3
3 3
4 3
5 3
6 3
1.
List of Experiments
1. Determination of pH and Electrical Conductivity
2. Determination and estimation of total Hardness
3. Determination of Calcium and Magnesium hardness
4. Determination of Alkalinity
5. Determination of Acidity
6. Determination of chlorides in water and soil.
7. Determination and estimation of total solids, dissolved solids
8. Determination of Iron
9. Determination of dissolved oxygen with D.O Meter &Winkler’s Method
10. Physical parameters-Temperature, Turbidity
11. Determination of B.O.D/COD
12. Determination of chlorine demand
13. Determination of optimum coagulant dose
14. Detrmination of Flourides
15. Determination of MPN
1. pH and Electrical Conductivity value of different samples
2. Estimation of total Hardness of bore water
3. Determination of Calcium and Magnesium hardness of bore water
4. Determination of Alkalinity and Acidity of different samples
5. Determination of chlorides in water and soil.
6. Estimation of total solids, dissolved solids in Surface water and sub-surface water sample
7. Determination of dissolved oxygen of pond water with D.O Meter &Winkler’s Method
8. Physical parameters-Temperature, Turbidity
9. B.O.D/COD of different samples
10. Determination of chlorine demand for municipal water
1. Environmental Engineering Lab Manual-Civil Engineering, GMRIT, Rajam
2. Standard Methods for Analysis of Water and Waste Water - APIIA
3. KVSG Murali Krishna, Chemical Analyses of Water and Soil,3 rd Ed., Reem Publications, New Delhi.
2013
45
147
16CE022 CONTRACTS AND ARBITRATIONS (CONTEMPORARY COURSE)

4003
Course Outcomes
1. Discover the need for standard specifications and their interpretation with reference to a contractor
2. Summarize the knowledge about different types of contract, their application, preparation, tendering,
and awards
3. Discuss the Indian Contract Act
4. Discuss the other international standard contracts
5. Associate the basic knowledge on different laws applicable to construction contracts
6. Apply the basic knowledge on disputes and their resolutions
COs–POs Mapping
COs PO6
1 2
2 1
3 2
4 2
5 2
6 3
Unit I
Contracts and Management of Contracts
Construction specifications – Standard specifications, development and interpretation, Types of engineering
contracts, procurement philosophy - Definition and essentials of a contract - Clauses for contracts – Types of
engineering contracts and its formulation -Preparation of tender documents – Issues related to tendering process
–Awarding contract.
Construction specifications-Types of engineering contracts- Preparation of tender documents- Awarding
contract
17 Hours
Unit II
Contract Laws
Provisions of contract law, Indian Contract Act 1872 – Breach of contract. Contracts for projects under
International AID. Performance of Contracts- Time of performance - Discharge of a contract – Classification of
contracts – Extras and variations in engineering contracts.
Provisions of contract law- Indian Contract Act 1872- Breach of contract- Time of performance
16 Hours
Unit III
Laws Related To Construction Industry
Labour and Industrial laws – Payment of Wages Act, Contract labour Workmen’s Compensation act –
Insurance, Industrial dispute act.
Labour and Industrial laws-Payment of Wages Act-Contract labour Workmen’s Compensation act
14 Hours
Unit IV
Alternative And Dispute Resolution
Arbitration and Conciliation Act 1996; Arbitration case study, Negotiation
13 Hours
Total: 60 Hours
Textbook (s)
1. “Codes of Practice and Standard Specifications” of AP PWD, CPWD, MES etc.,
2. B.J. Vasavada, “Engineering Contracts and Arbitration”, 2nd Edition, Jubilee Publications, 1996.
3. G.T. Gajaria, “Laws relating to Building and Engineer’s Contracts”, 1st Edition, M.M. Tripathi Private
Limited, Mumbai, 1985.
148
Reference (s)
1. Roshan Namavat, “Professional Practice”, 5th Edition, Anupbhai Publications, Mumbai, 1996.
2. M.O’cHorgon and F.R. Roulstion “Project Control of Engineering contracts E and FN, SPON, NY,
2ndEdition, 1988.
3. K. Collex, “Managing Construction Contracts”, 5th Edition, Reston Publishing Company, Virginia,
1982.
4. W.B. Park, “Construction Bidding for Projects”, 1st Edition, John Wiley, Ny, 1978.
5. "Latest Amendments to latest versions of Building Bye-Laws and Engineering Contract Laws”.
149
16CE023 ARCHITECTURE AND URBAN PLANNING (CONTEMPORARY COURSE)

4003
Course Outcomes
1. Design of buildings with respect to architectural point of view
2. Assess and select the best urban layout plan
3. Assess the Environmental Impact for any civil project
4. Assess the proposals based on the cost-benefit analysis knowledge
5. Evaluate the urban projects in terms of economics
6. Summarize the basic framework for urban planning standards
COs–POs Mapping
COs PO6
1 2
2 3
3 3
4 2
5 1
6 2
Unit I
Architectural and Climate Responsive Design
Architectural design - An analysis - Integration of function and aesthetics - Introduction to basic elements and
principles of design - Factors that determine climate - Characteristics of climate types - Design for various
climate types.
15 Hours
Unit II
Building Types
Building types – Classification of residential, industries and public building - Planning concepts - Residential,
institutional, commercial and Industrial - Application of anthropometry and space standards - Building rules and
regulations - Building services. Layout regulations
15 Hours
Unit III
Urban Planning Process
Urban planning – Development plan – Needs, goals ,and contents – Factors to be considered in development
plan – collection of data – surveys – procedure for preparation – guidelines of development plan – important
measures and stages of development plan. Town planning – objects – principles –necessity – forms – stages.
15 Hours
Unit IV
Urban Project Evaluation
Project evaluation - Economic evaluation [Benefit cost ratio method, Net present value and Internal rate of
return – problems] - Environmental impact assessment and Cash flow analysis, Development Management
Systems
Planning standards – The basic frame work – distribution of land use – Infrastructure – Physical infrastructure –
Social infrastructure – Commercial activity – variations in norms and standards by size of settlement -
Development control rules – Zoning regulations - Building bye-laws. Green Building, Introduction to Building
Management Systems
15 Hours
Total: 60 Hours
Textbook (s)
1. V.R.A. Saathappan and K. Yogeshwari, Principles of Architecture, Raamalingaa Publication, 2005
2. M. Pratap Rao, Urban Planning, CBS Publishers and Distributors, New Delhi, 2005
150
Refernce (s)
1. Gallian B Arthur and Simon Eisner, The Urban Pattern, City Planning and Design, Affiliated Press
Pvt., Ltd., New Delhi, 1995
2. Margaret Roberts, An Introduction to Town Planning and Planning Techniques, Hutchinson, London,
1990.
3. Francis D.K. Ching, Architecture: Form, Space and Order, VNR, N.Y., 1999.
4. B. Givoni , Man Climate and Architecture , Applied Science, Barking ESSEX, 1982
5. Edward D. Mills, Planning the Architects Handbook , ButterworthLondon, 1995
6. Rangwala S C, Town Planning, Charotar Publishing House, 1987
151
16CE024 AVIATION INFRASTRUCTURE AND PLANNING (CONTEMPORARY COURSE)

4003
Course Outcomes
1. Obtain a basic Knowledge of the fundamental issues in Airport engineering.
2. Demonstrate the clear understanding of the airport components.
3. Learn basic principles in airport components geometric design
4. Learn the airport components capacity and delays
5. Learn critical factors consideration in airport grading and design
6. Obtain Knowledge on air traffic control aids
COs-POs Mapping
COs PO3 PSO#2

1 1 1
2 1 1
3 3 3
4 2 2
5 3 3
6 1 2
Unit I
Growth and Characteristics of Airport and Aircraft
Growth of air transport, Airport organization and associations, Classifications of airports airfield components,
airport traffic zones and approach areas. Aircraft Components, size turning radius, speed, airport characteristics
ICAO, FAA, Domestic, International, Defining the key Components of aircraft and their importance.
12 + 3 Hours
Unit II
Capacity and Delay, Airport planning, surveys and Design
Factors affecting capacity, Determination of runway capacity related to delay, gate capacity, and Taxiway
Capacity Airport Site Selection, Runway length and width, sight distances, longitudinal and transverse grades,
runway intersections, taxiways, clearances, aprons, numbering, holding apron, noise control, Problems.
Measures taken for a safe, Feasible and Economical maneuvering of aircraft, Standards and specifications for
determining the airfield safety.
11 + 4 Hours
Unit III
Airport Grading, Planning and Design of the Terminal area
Operational concepts, space relationships and area requirements, vehicular traffic and parking at airports.
Grading of airport area, hydrology.
Pavement characteristics of runways and operation feasibility under different climates
11 + 4 Hours
Unit IV
Airport Drainage, Air Traffic Control and Aids
Design of drainage systems, construction methods, layout of surface drainage and subsurface drainage system,
Problems. Runways and taxiways markings, day and night landing aids, airport lighting, ILS and other
associated aids.
Marking of airfield pavements and safety measures in landing under adverse climatic conditions
11 + 4 Hours
Total:45+15 Hours
Textbook (s)
1. Khanna, Arora and Jain. “Airport Planning and Design", 1 st Ed, Nem Chand and Bros, 2013
2. Rangwala, “Airport Engineering”, 11th Ed., Charotar Publishers, 2011
Reference (s)
1. Virender Kumar and Satish Chandra, "Airport Planning and Design", 1st Ed, Galotia Publication, 2012
2. Robert Horenjeff, “Planning and Design of Airports", 2nd Ed., McGraw Hill Book Co, 1975
152
16CE025 DESIGN OF INDUSTRIAL STRUCTURES (CONTEMPORARY COURSE)

4003
Course Outcomes
1. Outline the layout requirements for industrial buildings
2. Demonstrate the functional requirements for any industry
3. Design industrial RC structures
4. Design storage structures for disposal of nuclear waste
5. Demonstrate the use of transmission towers and the steps involved in the design of towers
6. Design of various types of machine foundations
COs-Pos Mapping
COs PO3 PSO#2

1 1 3
2 2 3
3 3 3
4 3 3
5 2 2
6 3 3
Unit I
General
Classification of Industries and Industrial Structures – Specific requirements for Industries like Engineering,
Textiles, Chemicals, etc.
9 Hours
Unit II
Functional Requirements
Natural and artificial lighting – protection from the sun light – Services – Electrical wiring fixtures – cable and
pipe bridge – Electrical installations – substations – Effluent disposal – Fire expanse and chutes – fire alarm,
extinguishers and hydrants – Guidelines from factories act.
19 Hours
Unit III
Industrial RC Structures
Design and detailing of R.C. gable frames, corbels, nibs, bunkers, silos and chimneys – Cooling towers
17 Hours
Unit IV
Power Transmission Structures
Cables – Transmission Line towers – Tower Foundation – Testing of Towers.
Other Structures, Design of Nuclear Containment structures – Gantry Girders – Machine Foundations – Design
Procedure.
15 Hours
Total: 60 Hours
Textbook (s)
1. N. Krishna Raju, Advanced Reinforced Concrete Design, CBS Publishers and Distributors, 2007
2. A. R. Santhakumar and S. S. Murthy, Transmission Line Structures, Tata McGraw Hill, 1992
Refernce (s)
1. P. Dayaratnam, Design of Steel Structures, A.H. Wheeler & Co., Ltd., Allahabad, 2008
2. IS :4998 (Part 1)
3. IS: 4995 (Part 1 and Part 2)
4. IS: 3483 and IS: 6060
5. S. N. Manokar, Tall Chimneys – Design and Construction, Tata McGraw Hill, 1986
6. Handbook on Functional Requirements of Industrial Buildings(Heating and Ventilation)
153
16CEI03 CHEMICALS IN CONSTRUCTION INDUSTRY

1001
Course Outcomes
1. Understand the basic properties and applications of various types of construction chemicals
2. Identify and resolve field problems related to construction at site and thereafter building distress
Introduction - Construction Industry - Construction Materials - Construction chemicals - Classifications –
Types - Definitions.
Concrete Admixtures – Water proofing materials - Concrete Repair/ Grouts- Industrial Flooring- - Joint
Sealants- Bonding agents- - Anchoring materials- Other related materials : Curing agents, Mould release agents,
Surface retarders, Expansive agents, etc
Concrete Admixtures - Properties and Applications
Mineral Admixture – Types
Fly Ash - Silica Fume - GGBFS - Natural Pozzolans
Chemical Admixtures- Types
Plasticizers - Superplasticizers - Air Entrainers - Waterproofing Admixtures - Anti washout Admixtures for
underwater concreting - Shotcrete Admixtures - Pumping Aids - Light Weight Admixtures-Corrosion
Inhibiting Admixtures - Viscosity Modifying Admixtures - Expansive Agents - Stabilizers/ Activators
Waterproofing Membrances / Coatings - Properties and Applications
Pre-formed Membrane (Bitumen, HDPE, PVC,etc)
Self adhesive membranes - Torch-on membranes - Non-adhesivemembranes - Loose laying membranes
Flexible coatings: Polymer cement - Polyurethanes - SBR Latex - Acrylic - Bituminous - Emulsions
Rigid coatings: Cementitious - Epoxy
Sealants: Polysulphides, Polyurethanes, Silicone
Flooring Compounds and chemicals - Properties and Applications
Epoxy Floor – Features
Decorative / Heavy duty / Hygienic / Chemical Resistant / Abrasion Resistant / Washable / Completely leveled /
Seamless / Repairable / Non staining
Suggested Applications
Offices Showrooms - Factories - Warehouses - Parking Areas - Tennis courts - Athletic tracks, Operation
theaters - Hospitals - Processing Areas
Repairs and rehabilitation Chemicals - Properties and Applications
Concrete / Masonry
Nature of repairs
Cracks / Patch / Filling / Retrofitting / Enhancements/ widening
Crack Repairs of Masonry Structures
Cementitious Non-shrink grout - Cement Paste with expansion agents - Cement Paste with Bonding Agents-
Bonding agents with high solid content - Pump or pour in to saturated wet cavity - Must fill the full
section of the element - Pump from bottom to top - Use low pressure hand operated pumps
Crack Repairs for concrete elements
Polymer modified non-shrink grout for clear fractures - Epoxy Injection Resin for fine-moderate cracks(dry) -
Low viscous epoxy resin for floor cracks - High pressure injection pumps - Seal between injection
ports with Epoxy paste - Inject from lower end to upper end - Epoxy injection only on dry cracks
Patch/ Honeycomb repair for concrete
Bonding agents - Anti-corrosive treatments for steel - Non shrink cementitious grout – Trowellable or pumpable -
Non shrink polymer grout for overhead - application - Curing agents - Initiate treatment on saturated substrate -
Build up the layers wet on wet with trowel - Pump grout into cavity - Pump grout into pre-packed aggregate
cavity.
Retrofitting
Engineers advise - Carbon fiber mesh - Epoxy Resin - Steel plate - Surface preparation of concrete elements - Dry
substrate
Conclusion: Research and developments - future scope of applications.
15 Hours
1. Construction Chemicals, SBP Consultants & Engineers Pvt. Ltd., Jain Books Agency, New Delhi
2. Philip Maslow, Chemical Materials for Construction , Structures Publishing Company – 1974
154
16CEI04 CONSTRUCTION COMMUNICATION

1001
Course Outcomes
1. Understand the basic principles of human communication in the context of learning andprofessional
development
2. Resolve various issues in construction management and ensure improved coordination, quality and
productivity
Introduction
Defining communication – The importance of effective communication – The principles of effective
communication – The role and importance of effective communication to the project manager.
The challenges of communicating in the construction project environment
The nature of project – based working – The communication imperative for construction organisations – New
communication challenges for the contemporary construction industry – Communication challenges for the
construction project manager – Task Manager Role in Communication.
Theoretical perspectives on construction communication
The development and value of communication theory – Theoretical models of communication – Applying
communication models to construction – Barriers to effective communication – Effects of Poor Communication
in Construction
From individuals to corporations:
Communication types and techniques
Interpersonal Communication Defining interpersonal communication – The nature of effective interpersonal
communication within construction – The importance of effective interpersonal communication for construction
project performance – Verbal interpersonal communication in construction – Nonverbal interpersonal
communication in construction. Group and team communication
Organisational communication: Introduction – Understanding communication within organisation – The nature
of communication within construction organisations – Developing and organisational communication strategy.
Corporate communication
Introduction – Principles of mass communication – Managing the corporate image of a construction
organisation – Managing the corporate image of construction industry – Communicating corporate and social
responsibility.
Future directions for construction communication
Information and communications technology
Introduction – The utilisation of ICT in the construction industry – Some examples of ICT innovations in
constructions – Realising the potential of ICT in the future – Maximizing use of Modern Technology –
Standardizing the Construction Language
Conclusions and future directions in construction communication
Introduction – The construction communication contest – Future construction communication challenges – The
role of communication in enabling changes – Some future research directions.
15 Hours
1. Andrew Dainty, David Moore and Michael Murray, Communication in Construction – Theory and
Practice by, Taylor and Francis – 2006
2. Stephen Emmitt, Christopher A Gorse, Construction Communication by, John Wiley & Sons – 2009
155
16ESX2A/2B EMPLOYABILITY SKILS

0201
S No. Topic & Content No. of Periods
PART-A for 5th Semester (16 Sessions)
1. Introduction to Campus Placements: Stages of Campus Placement, Skills 01
assessed in Campus Placements & How to get ready?
2. A Motivational Talk on Positive Thinking: Beliefs, Thoughts, Actions, 02
Habits & Results (Success)
3. Resume Preparation: Resume? Templates? Mistakes to be avoided in a 03
Resume, Steps to be followed in preparing it.(with examples)
4. Group Discussions: GD? Stages of a GD, Skills assessed in a GD, Blunders 02
to be avoided, How to excel in a GD?
5. GD-Practice: Practice sessions for the Students on different Topics 07
including the contemporary issues with brief inputs on each topic &
feedback on their performance & Evaluation.
PART-B for 6th Semester (16 Sessions)
1. Overview of Employability Skills: Skills required for excelling in both the 01
GDs and Interviews.
2. Interview Skills: Interview? Types of Interview, Dos & Don’ts, Skills 03
assessed in an Interview, Mistakes to be avoided, How to equip oneself to
excel? How to handle the Typical Interview Questions? (with Examples)
3. Mock Interviews (HR Round): Practice sessions with Feedback & 07
Evaluation.
4. Email Writing: Practice 02
5. Motivational Talk: (Case specific) such as “Building Confidence” or 02
“Emotional Intelligence”.
6. Summarization 01
Total Periods 32
156
16CE701 GEOSPATIAL TECHNIQUES

3103
Course Outcomes
1. Demonostrate the basic concepts of spatial data acquisition techniques
2. Utilize different visual interpretation and digital image processing techniques to extract meaningful
information from spatial data
3. Explain the geographic information system and its related concepts like database management and
metadata
4. Illustrate the spatial data model and different file formats of spatial data
5. Analyze the geospatial data for different applications
6. Apply different analysis techniques on a varied range of applications in civil engineering
COs–POs Mapping
COs PO1 PO2 PO5

1 3 1 2
2 3 2 2
3 3 1 3
4 3 2 3
5 3 3 3
6 3 3 3
7.

Unit I
Basic Concepts, Platforms and Sensors
Remote Sensing Concepts: Basic Concepts and Foundation of remote sensing, Elements involved in Remote
Sensing, Electromagnetic Spectrum, Remote Sensing Terminology and Units, Energy Resources, Energy
Interactions with Earth Surface features and Atmosphere, Spectral properties of Vegetation, Soil and Water
bodies.
Remote Sensing Platforms & Sensors: Introduction, Characteristics of Imaging Remote Sensing Instruments,
Satellite Remote Sensing System - A Brief Overview, other Remote Sensing Satellites, Concept of Resolution in
Remote Sensing.
Indian Remote Sensing Satellites and their features-Indian Space Program
12 + 4 Hours
Unit II
Digital Image Processing
Basics of Digital Image Processing: Image Restoration: Geometric Corrections, Co-Registration of data, Ground
Control Points (GCPs), Atmospheric Corrections, Solar Illumination Corrections, Image Enhancement: Concept
of Color, Color Composites, Linear and Non Linear Contrast Stretching, Filtering Techniques, Edge
Enhancement, Density Slicing, Information Extraction: Multispectral Classification, Ground Truth Collection,
Supervised and Unsupervised Classification, Change detection Analysis. Elements of Visual Interpretation.
Intensity-Hue Saturation Images-Ratio Images
10 + 3 Hours
Unit III
Geographic Information System and Spatial Data Model
Geographic Information System: Introduction, GIS definition and terminology, GIS categories, components of
GIS, fundamental operations of GIS, A theoretical framework for GIS, Applications and Advantages of GIS,
Layer based GIS, Feature based GIS mapping, Functions of GIS, Process of GIS. Data Management And
Metadata Concept: Introduction, Concept of Database and DBMS, Advantages of DBMS, Functions of DBMS,
File and Data Access, Data Models, Database Models, Data Models in GIS, Concept of Meta Data.Spatial Data
Model: Introduction, Different dimensions of Geographic Data, Spatial Entity and Object, Spatial Data Model,
Raster Data Model, Vector Data Model, Raster versus Vector, Object Oriented Data Model, File Formats of
Spatial Data.
Raster Data Spatial Analysis-Introduction to Web GIS
10 + 4 Hours
157
Unit IV
Geospatial Analysis and Applications
Geospatial Analysis: Introduction, Geospatial Data Analysis, Integration and Modeling of Spatial Data,
Geospatial Data Analysis Methods, Database Query, Geospatial Measurements, Overlay Operations, Network
Analysis, Surface Analysis.
Applications in Engineering Geology and Water Resources Engineering: LULC, Agriculture, Forestry, Geology,
Geomorphology, Urban Development, Flood Zone Delineation and Mapping, Ground Water Prospects and
Recharge.
Applications in Transportation Engineering: GIS database design for Physical Facility Planning, Decision
Support Systems for Land Use Planning. GIS based Highway Alignment, GIS based Road Network Planning
and GIS based Traffic Congestion Analysis, Accident investigation.
Irrigation Management-Rainfall-Runoff Modeling
13 + 4 Hours
Total: 45+15 Hours
Textbook (s)
1. Thomas M Lillesand, Ralfh W Kiefer, Jonathan.W. Chipman, Remote Sensing and Image
Interpretation, 5th Ed., Wiley India Pvt. Ltd, 2014.
2. Basudeb Batta, Remote Sensing and GIS, 2nd Ed., Oxford University Press, New Delhi, 2011.
3. M.Anji Reddy, Text Book of Remote Sensing and Geographical Infromation Systems, 4th Ed., BS
Publications, 2012.
Reference (s)
1. Floyd F. Sabins, Remote Sensing: Principles and Interpretation, 3rd Ed., W.H.Freeman and Company,
New York, 1997.
2. James B. Cambell, Rondolph H. Wynne, Introduction to Remote Sensing, 5 th Ed., Guilford Press,
London and Newyork, 2011.
3. A.M.Chandra and S.K.Ghosh, Remote Sensing and Geographical Information System, 1 st Ed., Narosa
Publishing House, New Delhi. 2007.
Sample Question (S)
Remember 10 10 --
Understand 40 40 --
Apply 50 50 100
Analyze
Evaluate
Create -- -- --
Total (%) 100 100 100
Remember
1. List ten remote sensing satellites launched by India.

2. What are the requirements of ground data in remote sensing data analysis?
3. Define interpretation key.
4. Define GIS.
5. Deifne Spatialdata and attribute data.
Understand
1. Illustate the importance of GIS in the context of infrastructure.
2. Explain the process to integrate the spatial and non spatial data to make a GIS project
3. Explain various network analysis techniques in GIS.
4. Clasify different geospatial analysis techniques
5. Describe vector overlay with suitable examples.
6. Illustrate the use of multiseasonal remote sensing data in wasteland classification.
7. Summarise the scientific approach of remote sensing data analysis
158
Apply
1. Utilize RS and GIS techniques for the preparation of LULC.

2. Construct the flow chart for highway alignment using RS and GIS techniques
3. Apply the RS and GIS techniques to slove traffic congestion problems in any urban area.
4. Apply RS and GIS techniques to evaluate the potential sites for artificial recharge of ground water.
46
159
16CE008 EARTHQUAKE RESISTANT DESIGN (ELECTIVE IV)
Course Outcomes 3103

1. Analyze the free and forced vibration response of single-degree and multi-degree of freedom and
continuous systems
2. Develop an understanding of structural dynamics of simple systems subject to harmonic, impulse
and/or arbitrary loading
3. Distinguish between earthquake magnitude and earthquake damage (intensity)
4. Illustrate the measurement of earthquakes and their effect on engineering structures
5. Apply the Basic Principles of Conceptual Design for Earthquake resistant Buildings
6. Explain the concepts and implementation of IS codes in relation to earthquake design
COs–POs Mapping
COs PO2 PO3 PSO#2
1 3 2 2
2 3 3 2
3 2 2 3
4 3 3 3
5 3 3 3
6 2 3 3
Unit I
Introduction to Structural Dynamics
Theory of vibrations – Lumped mass and continuous mass systems – Single Degree of Freedom (SDOF)
Systems – Formulation of equations of motion – Un damped and damped free vibration – Damping – Response
to harmonic excitation – Concept of response spectrum
Different types of dampers-Not man-made Free and forced vibrations examples in nature
12+ 3 Hours
Unit II
Multi Degree of Freedom Systems
Formulation of equations of motion – Free vibration –Determination of natural frequencies of vibration and
mode shapes – Orthogonal properties of normal modes – Mode superposition method of obtaining response
Construction procedure of simple vibration measuring equipment – Logarithmic decrement
11 + 4 Hours
Unit III
Earthquake Analysis and Earthquake Engineering
Introduction – Rigid base excitation – Earthquake response analysis of single and multi-storied buildings – Use
of response spectra
Engineering Seismology – Earthquake phenomenon – Causes and effects of earthquakes – Faults – Structure of
earth – Plate Tectonics – Elastic Rebound Theory – Earthquake Terminology – Source, Focus, Epicenter etc -
Earthquake size – Magnitude and intensity of earthquakes – Classification of earthquakes – Seismic waves –
Seismic zones – Seismic Zoning Map of India – Seismograms and accelerogram
Various types of earthquake intensity measuring units-Preparation/interpretation of Seismic zone map of
selected district/state
11 + 4 Hours
Unit IV
Codal Design Provisions and Detailing Provisions
Review of the latest Indian seismic code IS:1893 – 2002 (Part-I) provisions for buildings Earthquake design
philosophy – Assumptions – Design by seismic coefficient and response spectrum methods – Displacements and
drift requirements – Provisions for torsion-Review of the latest Indian Seismic codes IS:4326 and IS:13920
provisions for ductile detailing of R.C buildings – Beam, column and joints
Comparison of detailing standards-normal and earthquake for column- Comparison of detailing standard s-
normal and earthquake for beams
11 + 4 Hours
Total:45+15 Hours
160
Textbook (s)
1. Pankaj Agarwal, Manish Shrikhande, Earthquake Resistant Design of Structures, Printice Hall of India,
New Delhi, 2006
2. Mario Paz, William Leigh, Structural Dynamics ,2nd Ed., 2012
3. Dr. Vinod Hosur, Earthquake-Resistant Design of Building Structures, Wiley Precise, 2012
4. Shashikant K. Duggal, Earthquake Resistant Design of Structures, Oxford, 2 nd Ed. 2013
Reference (s)
1. Clough, Penzien, Dynamics of Structures, 2nd Ed., McGraw Hill, 1993
2. A.K.Chopra, Dynamics of Structures, 3rd Ed., Prentice Education India, Delhi, 2005
3. IS Codes IS: 456, IS: 1893, IS: 4326 and IS:13920, any other relevant codes
SAMPLE QUESTION (S)
Remember 20 10 --
Understand 20 10 --
Apply 60 80 100
Analyze -- -- --
Evaluate -- -- --
Create -- -- --
Total (%) 100 100 100
REMEMBER
1. What are the factors influencing the Natural Period?
2. What is an earthquake, and how does it affect buildings?
3. What are the important considerations in making a house more earthquake resistant?
UNDERSTAND
1. How Are Earthquake Magnitudes Measured?
2. Why Do Earthquakes Happen?
APPLY
1. Consider a four-storey reinforced concrete office building shown in Fig. The building is located in
Shillong (seismic zone V). The soil conditions are medium stiff and the entire building is supported on
a raft foundation. The R. C. frames are infilled with brick-masonry. The lumped weight due to dead
loads is 12 kN/m2 on floors and 10 kN/m2 on the roof. The floors are to cater for a live load of 4
kN/m2 on floors and 1.5 kN/m2 on the roof. Determine design seismic load on the structure as per new
code. Calculation of Design Seismic Force by Static Analysis Method.
Figure: Building configuration
47
161
ANALYZE
1. A three-story building is modeled as 3-DOF system and rigid floors as shown in below Figure.
Determine the maximum top floor maximum displacement and base shear due to El-Centro,
1940earthquake ground motion. Take the inter-story lateral stiffness of floors i.e. k1 = k2= k3=16357.5
kN/m and the floor mass m1= m2=10000 kg and m3=5000 kg.
162
16CE009 ENVIRONMENTAL POLLUTION AND SOLID WASTE MANAGEMENT

(ELECTIVE IV)
3103
Course Outcomes
1. Explain air pollution and various types of sources and classification of air pollutants
2. Find effects of gaseous and particulate air pollutants on humans, plants and materials; Principles of air
pollution control and various control equipment’s at source
3. Identify the sources of noise pollution and their adverse impacts, methodologies to control noise
pollution and their limits
4. Outline sources, types and composition of solid waste and its implications of the production
5. Appraise the current practices available and methods of handling, sampling and disposal of solid waste
6. Identify the importance of environmental impact assessment and its statement
COs–POs Mapping
COs PO2 PO3 PO6
1 2 1 2
2 3 3 3
3 3 3 3
4 2 1 2
5 3 3 3
6 3 3 3
Unit 1
Air Pollution and Noise Pollution
Air pollution Control Methods - Particulate control devices - Methods of Controlling Gaseous Emissions - Air
quality standards
Noise standards, Measurement and control methods - Reducing residential and industrial noise - ISO14000
Green House Effect - Heat Islands, Traffic Regulations - Zoning
12 + 4 Hours
Unit II
Solid Waste Management
Solid waste characteristics - basics of on-site handling and collection - separation and processing - Incineration,
Composting-Solid waste disposal methods - fundamentals of Land filling
Land farming, waste- to-energy combustion
12 + 4 Hours
Unit III
Hazardous Waste
Characterization - Nuclear waste - Biomedical wastes - Electronic wastes - Chemical wastes -Treatment and
management of hazardous waste - Disposal and Control methods.
Non- Bio Medical Waste, Integrated waste management (IWM)
10 + 3 Hours
Unit IV
Environmental Impact Assessment
Impact evaluation and analysis, EIA Methodologies, Assessment of Impacts on surface water, Air and biological
Environments - Environmental audit, Preparation of Environmental impact statement - Case studies
Environmental Pollution Act, Mota Act
11 + 4 Hours
Total: 45+15 Hours
Textbook (s)
1. Howard S. Peavy, George Tchobanoglous and Donald R. Rowe’s, Environmental Engineering, Tata
McGraw-Hill Education Publications, New Delhi, 1985.
2. C. S. Rao, Specifications of Environmental Pollution Control Engineering, Second edition, New Age
International Publishers, 2006.
163
Reference (s)
1. M.N. Rao and H.V.N. Rao, Air Pollution and Control, 29 th Reprint, Tata McGraw-Hill, 1988.
2. Gerard Kiley, Environmental Engineering, 1st Ed., Tata McGraw-Hill, 1998.
3. Ruth F. Weiner and Robin Mathews, Environmental Engineering, 4 th Ed., Elsevier, 2003.
4. K. Sasi Kumar, S.A. Gopi Krishna, Solid Waste Management, PHI New Delhi, 2013
5. Harry Freeman, Standard handbook of hazardous waste treatment and disposal, Tata McGraw-Hill,
1998.
6. Y. Anjaneyulu, Environmental Impact Assessment, 2nd Ed., BS Publications, 2010
SAMPLE QUESTION (S)

Remember 20 20 --
Understand 50 40 --
Apply 30 40 100
Analyze -- -- --
Evaluate -- -- --
Create -- -- --
Total (%) 100 100 100
REMEMBER
1. Define refuse.
2. Define rubbish.
UNDERSTAND
1. Explain briefly the sources and classification of air pollutants.
2. Explain the functional elements of noise propagation and different types of noise generation source
3. List out the various Solid Waste produced by community.
4. Explain how Environmental Impact Assessment (EIA) is useful to understand impacts of
developmental projects on environment.
5. Explain the step-by-step procedure for predicting impacts of water environment.
APPLY
1. Describe the various methods of leachate treatment.
2. Identify land farming method of waste disposal.
48
164
16CE010 REPAIR AND REHABILITATION OF STRUCTURES (ELECTIVE IV)

4003
Course Outcomes
1. Identify the probable reasons for the deterioration of various structural members
2. Able to assess the severity of damage in the structural members
3. Choose materials and appropriate technologies for repair
4. Identify the appropriate method for strengthening of existing members
5. Plan for the monitoring of the new buildings by using Sensor technology
6. Planning & Preparing report for forensic assessment of deteriorated concrete structures
COs–POs Mapping
COs PO2 PSO#1

1 3 2
2 3 2
3 2 3
4 3 3
5 3 2
6 3 2
Unit I
Structural Distress and Structural Damage
Introduction to Strucutral Distress – Deterioration of Structures – Causes and prevention of
Deteroriation .Introduction to Structural Damage– Types of causes of Damage-Mechanism of Damage.
Importance of Maintenance – Facets of Maintenance – Need for Rehabilitation
15 Hours
Unit II
Corrosion and Damage Assessment
Introduction to Corrosion of Steel Reinforcement – Causes and Effects – Mechanism and Prevention of
Corrosion. Damage of Structures due to Fire – Fire Rating of Structures – Phenomena of Desiccation
Introduction to Damage assessment, Inspection and Testing – Symptoms and Diagnosis of Distress – Damage
assessment – NDT – Mechanical and Chemical Properties – Semi destructive Tests
Ground Penetrating Radar (GPR) – NDT Methods for Corrosion Monitoring 15 Hours
Unit III
Damage Repairs and Retrofitting
Introduction to Repair of Structure – Common Types of Repairs – Material selection for Repair – Repair in
Concrete Structures – Repairs in Under Water Structures – Repair Techniques – Guniting – Shot Create –
Underpinning.Introduction to Retrofitting – Strengthening of Structures – Strengthening Methods – Retrofitting
techniques – Jacketing
Rust Eliminators – Seismic Retrofitting of Beams and Columns 15 Hours
Unit IV
Structural Health Monitoring
Introduction – Need for continuous monitoring – Levels of system Identification – Components of SHM system
–techniques of SHM – Sensors, actuators and its role in SHM – Principle and organization of a SHM system –
Smart materials in SHM
Non-Invasive techniques for SHM – Case study using SHM and Building Instrumentation in SHM
15 Hours
Total: 60 Hours
Text Book(s)
1. E F & N Spon ,Defects and Deterioration in Buildings,2 nd Ed., Spon press London
2. Bungey, Non-Destructive Evaluation of Concrete Structures, Surrey University Press , 1982
3. B.L. Gupta and Amit Gupta, Maintenance and Repair of Civil Structures, 1 st Ed., Standard
Publications, 2009
165
Reference (s)
1. W. H. Ranso, Concrete Repair and Maintenance Illustrated, RS Means Company Inc, 1993
2. B. A. Richardson , Building Failures : Diagnosis and Avoidance, EF & N Spon, London, 1991
SAMPLE QUESTION (S)

Remember 30 20 --
Understand 30 20 --
Apply 20 20 40
Analyze 20 20 30
Evaluate -- 20 30
Create -- -- --
Total (%) 100 100 100
REMEMBER
1. What are the main distress symptoms in a structure?
2. What are the causes for deterioration and distress in structures?
3. What are the various crack repair techniques?
4. Define the terms Repair, Rehabilitation and Retrofitting of structures with examples.
UNDERSTAND
1. How can the defects and cracks be prevented to appear in concrete? How can these be repaired?
2. Enunciate different causes of cracks in concrete elements.
3. Distinguish between structural and non-structural damages in structures.
4. How is corrosion caused in reinforcing steel in R.C. work? Explain some, of the corrosion control
methods commonly adopted.
5. Explain the use of sensors with practical examples.
APPLY
1. Discuss the principle of corrosion and methods to prevent corrosion.
2. How a steel structure is retrofitted by cathodic protection?
3. What are the methods of evaluation of corrosion in concrete? Give short details of each method?
4. How can you repair the fire damaged concrete? Giving suitable examples?
ANALYZE
1. Describe different methods of excluding external sources of chloride ion from concrete.
2. On what basis structures are designed to withstand fire?
3. Describe the mechanism of micro-crack due to differential thermal exposure of RCC structure.
4. Name the fire damage assessment techniques. Explain any one in detail including its result
interpretation.
EVALUATE
1. On what basis structures are designed to withstand fire?
2. What are the various tools for evaluation of distress in concrete structures?
3. Explain the effects of environment on corrosion of reinforcement in R.C.C. Give methods for
identifying and quantifying them.
4. List the various non-destructive testing methods for determining physical conditions of concrete and
monitoring of defects. Give short details of the tests.
5. Discuss the evaluation procedure for repair and strengthening of concrete structures?
49
166
16CE011 WATER RESOURCES SYSTEMS PLANNING AND MANAGEMENT

(ELECTIVE IV)
3103
Course Outcomes
1. Apply optimization methods to solve problems related to water resource systems
2. Apply basic economic analysis to evaluate the economic feasibility of water resources projects
3. Formulate optimization models for decision making in water resources systems
4. Explain Linear Programming and Dynamic Programming techniques
5. Apply simulation models for planning and design of Water Resources Systems
6. Make use of various concepts of water resources economics for effective management
COs–POs Mapping
COs PO3
1 2
2 2
3 3
4 2
5 3
6 2
Unit I
Introduction
Concepts of systems analysis, definition, systems approach to water resources planning and management, role of
optimization models, objective function and constraints, types of optimization techniques.
Advanced Optimization Techniques
11 + 4 Hours
Unit II
Linear Programming and Dynamic Programming
Formulation of linear programming models, graphical method, simplex method, application of linear
programming in water resources, revised simplex method, duality in linear programming, sensitivity analysis.
Principles of optimality, forward and backward recursive dynamic programming, curse of dimensionality.
Application for resource allocation.
. 11 + 4 Hours
Unit III
Non-Linear Optimization Techniques
Classical optimization techniques, Lagrange methods, Kuhn-Tucker conditions, Search techniques, Overview of
Genetic Algorithm.
Particle Swarm Optimization-Simulated Annealing
11 + 4 Hours
Unit IV
Water Resources Economics, Simulation and Management
Basics of engineering economics, economic analysis, conditions of project optimality, benefit and cost analysis
Application of simulation techniques in water resources, planning of reservoir system, optimal operation of
single reservoir system, allocation of water resources, optimal cropping pattern
Conjunctive use of surface and sub-surface water resources
12 + 3 Hours
Total: 45+15 Hours
Textbook (s)
1. Vedula.S and P. P Mujumdar, Water Resources System Analysis, 5 th Ed., McGraw Hill Company Ltd,
2005.
2. James D and R. Lee, Water Resources Economics, Oxford Publishers, 2005.
167
Refernce (s)
1. Loucks D P and E V Bee, Water Resources Systems Planning and Management – An Introduction to
Methods, Models and Applications, UNESCO Publications, 2005
2. Bhave, P. R, Narosa,, Optimal design of water distribution networks, Publishing house, 2003
SAMPLE QUESTION (S)

Remember 10 10 --
Understand 20 20 --
Apply 40 30 60
Analyze 30 40 40
Evaluate -- -- --
Create -- -- --
Total (%) 100 100 100
REMEMBER
1. What are the major issues and challenges facing water managers today?
2. List all the tools available for integrated water resources planning and management.
3. What is meant by optimization and list some techniques involved in optimization of water resources
systems?
UNDERSTAND
1. Consider two alternative water resource projects, A and B. Project A will cost 2,500,000 and will
return 1,000,000 at the end of 5 years and 4,000,000 at the end of 10 years. Project B will cost
4,000,000 and will return 2,000,000 at the end of 5 and 15 years, and another 3,000,000 at the end of
10 years. Project A has a life of 10 years, and B has a life of 15 years. Assuming an interest rate of 0.1
(10%) per year:
(a) What is the present value of each project?
(b) What is each project’s annual net benefit?
(c) Would the preferred project differ if the interest rates were 0.05?
(d) Assuming that each of these projects would be replaced with a similar project having the same time
stream of costs and returns, show that by extending each series of projects to a common terminal year
(e.g., 30 years), the annual net benefits of each series of projects would be will be same as found in part
(b).
2. Assume water can be allocated to three users. The allocation, xj, to each use j provides the following
returns: R(x1) = (12x1 – x1 2 ), R(x2) = (8x2 – x22) and R(x3) = (18x3 – 3x32 ). Assume that the
objective is to maximize the total return, F(X), from all three allocations and that the sum of all
allocations cannot exceed 10. a) How much would each use like to have? b) Show that at the maximum
total return solution the marginal values, (R (xj))/ xj are each equal to the shadow price or Lagrange
multiplier (dual variable) λ associated with the constraint on the amount of water available. c) Finally,
without resolving a Lagrange multiplier problem, what would the solution be if 15 units of water were
available to allocate to the three users and what would be the value of the Lagrange multiplier?
APPLY
1. Assume that the objective was to minimize the sum of squared deviations of the actual allocations xj
from some desired or known target allocations Tj. Given a supply of water Q less than the sum of all
target allocations Tj, structure a planning model and its corresponding Lagrangian. Will a global
minimum be obtained from solving the partial differential equations derived from the Lagrangian?
Why?
2. A reservoir is to be constructed to supply water at a maximum constant rate per season for a city. The
inflows in the six seasons of the year are 3, 12, 7, 3, 2 and 3 respectively. Determine the minimum
required ..reservoir capacity using (i) Mass diagram method and (ii) Sequent Peak Method neglecting
all losses
50
168
3. Solve the four seasons reservoir operation problem discussed in the class with the initial storage, S1=4
units. Compare the release policy with that obtained in the example and mention which is better In a
town, it was decided expand its water supply system with an existing capacity of 10 units to
the ultimate requirement of 40 units by the end of 15 years from now, in stages of 5 years
each. The present worth of cost of expansion at any stage is estimated to be equal to the
square of the number of units added at that stage. The capacity requirement is estimated to be
15, 25 and 40 units by the end of 5, 10 and 15 years from now. Determine how many units
should be added at each stage for minimum total cost of capacity expansion over 15 year
planning horizon. Capacity can be added only in 5 unit increments
ANALYZE
1. Solve the following water user allocation problem to maximize the total returns, using both forward
and backward recursion of Dynamic Programming. Water available for allocation is 60 units. It should
be allocated in discrete units of 0, 10, 20, …, 60. Returns from the four users for a given allocation are
given in the table below
Allocation Returns from
User 1 User2 User3 User4
0 0 0 -3 1
10 3 4 3 1
20 5 4 5 1
30 6 4 5 7
40 3 4 4 8
50 3 6 2 10
60 3 7 0 10
2. Solve the four seasons reservoir operation problem discussed in the class with the initial storage, S1=4
units. Compare the release policy with that obtained in the example and mention which is better.
3. Consider a system composed of a manufacturing factory and a waste treatment plant owned by the
manufacturer. The manufacturing plant produces finished goods that sell for a unit price of Rs 10,000.
However, the finished goods cost Rs 3,000 per unit to produce. In the manufacturing process two units
of waste are generated for each unit of finished goods produced. In addition to deciding how many
units of goods to produce, the plant manager must also decide how much waste will be discharged into
a river without treatment so that the total net benefit to the company can be maximized and the water
quality requirement of the water course is met. The treatment plant has a maximum capacity of treating
ten units of waste with 80% waste removal efficiency at a treatment cost of Rs 600 per unit of waste.
There is also an effluent tax imposed on the waste discharged to the receiving water body (Rs 2,000 for
each unit of waste discharged). The water pollution control authority has set an upper limit of four units
on the amount of waste the company may discharge. Formulate an LP model clearly specifying the
decision variables, Objective function and constraints and solve it using both graphical method as well
as simplex method.
169
16CE012 BRIDGE ENGINEERING (ELECTIVE V)

3103
Course Outcomes
1. Demonstrate different types of Bridges with diagrams
2. Demonstrate different IRC Loading standards
3. Develop procedures for inspections and maintenance of bridges
4. Analyze and design Slab and T Beam bridge
5. Analyze and design Box culvers with structural detailing
6. Analyze and design alternate material bridges
COs–POs Mapping
COs PO2 PO3 PSO#2
1 2 1 2
2 2 2 3
3 2 3 3
4 3 3 3
5 3 3 3
6 3 3 3
Unit I
Introduction to Bridge Engineering
Introduction- Bridges- Types- Slab bridges, T Beam, Arch bridges, Cable Stayed bridges, Prestressed concrete
bridges, Truss Bridges, Culverts, Nomenclature, Selection of Bridge Site- Economical span- Abutments pier end
connections, Types of foundations- Open, Pile, Well Foundations, Bearings – Types- Introduction to Loading
standards- Railway and IRC Loading.
Bridges made of other materials than steel and concrete- selected case study on bridge substructure
12 + 3 Hours
Unit II
Slab Bridges
Slab bridges- Wheel load on slab- effective width method- slabs supported on two edges- cantilever slabs-
dispersion length- Design of interior panel of slab- Guyon’s – Massonet Method –Hendry- Jaegar Methods-
Courbon’s theory- Pigeaud’s method
Modeling of bridge slab in software-Comparison of different analytical methods used for slab bridge
11 + 4 Hours
Unit III
T-Beam bridges
T-Beam bridges- Analysis and design of various elements of bridge –Design of deck slab, longitudinal girders,
and Secondary beams- Reinforcement detailing.
Concept of plate girder bridge- Composite bridge example
11 + 4 Hours
Unit IV
Box Culverts
Types of Loading –Analysis and Design- Reinforcement detailing.
Various applications of culverts-Alternative structures of culvert
11 + 4 Hours
Total:45+15 Hours
Textbook (s)
1. Johnson Victor D , Essentials of Bridge Engineering, 6 th Ed., Oxford & IBH Publishing Company, 2015
2. B. C. Punmai, Jain & Jain , Design of RC Structures, 10 th Ed., Lakshmi publications, 2016
Reference (s)
1. B. C. Punmai and Jain, Design of Steel Structures, 2nd reprint Ed., Lakshmi Publications, 2014
2. Jagadeesh T.R Design of Bridge Structures 2 edition Prentice Hall India Learning Private Limited2009
3. S. Ponnuswamy Bridge Engineering Third edition McGraw Hill Education 2017
4. IRC codes, IS 456, IS 800
170
SAMPLE QUESTION (S)

Remember 20 10 --
Understand 30 10 --
Apply 10 10 --
Analyze 30 30 30
Evaluate 10 10 20
Create -- 30 50
Total (%) 100 100 100
REMEMBER
1. What is a well foundation? What are its different types?
2. List the loads to be considered in the design of bridge.
3. What are the causes for longitudinal forces on bridges.
4. What essential data is required for the design of a bridge?
UNDERSTAND
1. Explain the various components and their functioning in a bridge.
2. Discuss the various types of abutments.
3. Explain essential requirements of a good foundations.
4. Explain the usual type of bridge piers.
APPLY
1. Identify the different Types of Bridge foundations that can be used on the Rivers
2. Identify & Sketch the elements of plate girder bridge.
3. Identify and describe where R.C.C bridges are economical and Explain any five of them with neat
sketches.
ANALYZE
1. Analyze a box culvert for bending moments having inside dimensions 4m × 4m for the following
data. Dead load = 12 kN/m2 Live load = 46 kN/m2Density of soil = 18 kN/m3Use M20concrete
and Fe 415 steel.
EVALUATE
1. Evaluate the distribution coefficients of the box culvert bridge using Henry – Jaegar method.
CREATE
1. A reinforced concrete simply supported slab is required for the deck of a road bridge having the
following data:-
clear span = 5.5 m. width of carriage way = 7.5 m.foot path on either side = 1m. wide.Materials =
M20 grade concrete and Fe 415 steel.Type of loading IRC class AA. Design the deck slab. Show
the reinforcement details.
2. Design the longitudinal girder of a T-beam and slab bridge for the following data. Effective span
18m, Carriage way width 7.5m, Kerb 600 mm on either side. Provide three longitudinal beams and
five cross beams. Loading IRC class AA tracked vehicle. Adopt M25 Fe415 bars. Also provide the
reinforcement details. Use Courbon’s method for the calculation of reaction coefficients.
51
171
16CE013 PRESTRESSED CONCRETE (ELECTIVE V)

3103
Course Outcomes
1. Explain the concepts of pre-stressing in concrete structures and identify the materials for pre-stressing
2. Evaluate the short-term and long-term losses in prestressing and design prestressed structures
considering these losses
3. Analyse the stresses in a prestressed concrete member
4. Analyse the flexural behaviour and effect of shear in prestressed concrete member
5. Design the prestressed concrete members for flexure and shear
6. Calculate the short term and long term deflection in prestressed members
COs–POs Mapping
COs PO2 PO3
1 2 3
2 2 3
3 3 3
4 3 3
5 3 3
6 3 2
Unit I
Introduction
Historic development – General principles of prestressing, pretensioning and post tensioning – Advantages and
limitations of prestressed concrete – Materials – High strength concrete and high tensile steel their
characteristics. I.S.Code provisions, Methods and Systems of Prestressing; Pre-tensioning and post tensioning
methods – Analysis of post tensioning - Different systems of prestressing like Hoyer System, Magnel System
Freyssinet system and Gifford – Udall System.
Properties of Strands- Properties of Tendon
10+4 Hours
Unit II
Losses of Prestress and Analysis of Sections for Flexure
Loss of prestress in pre-tensioned and post-tensioned members due to various causes like elastic shortage of
concrete, shrinkage of concrete, creep of concrete, Relaxation of steel and frictional losses. Elastic analysis of
concrete beams prestressed with straight, concentric, eccentric, bent and parabolic tendons.
Anchorage Slip
13+4 Hours
Unit III
Design of Sections for Flexure and Shear
Allowable stress, Design criteria as per I.S.Code – Elastic design of simple rectangular and I-section for flexure,
shear, and principal stresses – design for shear in beams – Kern – lines, cable profile.
Transfer of prestress in pre tensioned members 12+4 Hours
Unit IV
Deflections of Prestressed Concrete Beams
Importance of control of deflections – factors influencing deflections – short term deflections of uncracked
members, stage wise prestressing.
Prediction of long term deflection
10+3 Hours
Total: 45+15 Hours
Textbook(s)
1. N. Krishna Raju, Prestressed Concrete, 4th Ed., Tata Mc.Graw Hill Publications,2006
2. N. Rajasekharan, Prestressed Concrete, 2nd Ed., Narosa Publications, 2014
172
Reference(s)
1. S. Ramamrutham, Prestressed Concrete,5th Ed., Dhanpatrai Publications, 2013
2. T.Y. Lin & Ned H.Burns, Design of Prestressed concrete structures, 3 rd Ed., John Wiley & Sons, 1981
3. BIS code on prestressed concrete, IS 1343.
SAMPLE QUESTION (S)

Remember 30 20 --
Understand 20 20 --
Apply 25 30 60
Analyze 25 30 40
Evaluate -- -- --
Create -- -- --
Total (%) 100 100 100
REMEMBER
1. What is the minimum grade of concrete used in pre tensioned and post tensioned members?
2. List all the losses of prestressed members under the classification of intermediate and time dependent
losses.
3. Define creep and shrinkage of Concrete.
4. What is loss due to anchorage slip?
UNDERSTAND
1. Differentiate between pretensioning and posttensioning methods.
2. A pre-tensioned concrete beam, 100mm wide and 300mm deep, is prestressed by straight wires
carrying an initial force of 150kN at an eccentricity of 50mm. The modulus of elasticity of steel and
concrete are 210 and 35 kN/mm2 respectively. Estimate the percentage loss of stress in steel due to
elastic deformation of concrete if the area of steel wires is 188mm2
3. Explain about the types of flexure failure occurs in prestressed concrete section.
4. As per the Indian Code of practice, explain in brief permissibility and relaxation of stresses in steel
when used in prestressed concrete.
APPLY
1. A concrete beam is prestressed by a cable carrying an initial prestressing force of 300kN. The cross-
sectional area of the wires in the cable is 300 mm 2. Calculate the percentage of loss of stress in the
cable only due to shrinkage of concrete using IS: 1343 recommendations assuming the beam to be, (a)
pre-tensioned and (b) post-tensioned. Assume Es = 210 kN/mm2 and age of concrete at transfer = 8
days.
2. A pretensioned T section has a flange width of 1200mm and 150mm thick. The width and depth of the
rib are 300mm and 1500mm respectively. The high tension steel has an area of 4700mm2 and is
located at an effective depth of 1600mm. If the characteristic cube strength of the concrete and the
tensile strength of steel are 40Mpa and 1600Mpa respectively; calculate the flexural strength of the
section.
ANALYZE
1. A prestressed concrete beam (span = 8 m) of rectangular section. 150 mm wide 300 mm deep, is
axially prestressed by a cable carrying an effective force of 160kN. The beam supports a total
uniformly distributed load of 4kN/m which includes the self-weight of the member. Compare the
magnitude of the principal tension developed in the beam with and without the axial prestress.
2. A rectangular prestressed beam 150 mm wide and 300 mm deep is used over an effective span of 10 m.
The cable with zero eccentricity at the supports, and linearly varying to 50 mm at the center, carries an
effective prestressing force of 500kN. Find the magnitude of the concentrated load Q located at the
centre of the span for the following conditions at the centre of span section:
a) If the load counteracts the bending effect of the prestressing force (neglecting self weight of beam)
and
b) If the pressure line passes through the upper kern of the section under the action of the external load,
self-weight and prestress.
52
173
16CE014 WATERSHED MANAGEMENT (ELECTIVE V)

3103
Course Outcomes
1. Analyze the characteristics of watershed
2. Summarize the various types of Erosion and Sedimentation process
3. Choose the underlying principles or measures to control Erosion
4. Analyze the various Water Harvesting methods
5. Evaluate Ecosystem Management and its practical implications
6. Assess the current status of the watershed at field, by taking up accurate investigation measures and
conduct survey
COs–POs Mapping
COs PO6 PO7
1 3 1
2 3 2
3 2 2
4 2 3
5 3 3
6 3 3
Unit I
Introduction and Characteristics of Watershed
Concept of watershed development, objectives of watershed development, need for watershed development in
India, Integrated and multidisciplinary approach for watershed management.
Characteristics of Watershed: size, shape, physiography, slope, climate, drainage, land use, vegetation,
geology and soils, hydrology and hydrogeology, socio-economic characteristics, basic data on watersheds.
Watershed Improvements- Another Approach of Watershed Management
12 + 3 Hours
Unit II
Principles of Erosion and Measures to Control Erosion
Types of erosion, factors affecting erosion, effects of erosion on land fertility and land capability, estimation of
soil loss due to erosion, Universal soil loss equation.
Measures to Control Erosion: Contour techniques, ploughing, furrowing, trenching, bunding, terracing, gully
control, rockfill dams, brushwood dam, Gabion.
Difficulties for Development of Watershed
11 + 4 Hours
Unit III
Water Harvesting and Land Management
Rainwater Harvesting, catchment harvesting, harvesting structures, soil moisture conservation, check dams,
artificial recharge, farm ponds, percolation tanks.
Land Management: Land use and Land capability classification, management of forest, agricultural,
grassland and wild land. Reclamation of saline and alkaline soils.
Improvement Techniques for Oil Strength- Advanced Techniques for Prevention of Soil Erosion
11 + 4 Hours
Unit IV
Ecosystem Management & Planning and Administration
Role of Ecosystem, crop husbandry, soil enrichment, inter, mixed and strip cropping, cropping pattern,
sustainable agriculture, bio-mass management, dry land agriculture, Silvipasture, horticulture, social forestry
and afforestation.
Planning and Administration: Planning of watershed management activities, peoples participation,
preparation of action plan, administrative requirements.
Eco System Development.
11 + 4 Hours
Total:45+15 Hours
174
Text Book(s)
1. J.V.S. Murthy ,Watershed Management, 2nd Ed., New Age International Publishers, 2011
2. R.A.Wurbs and W.P James , Water Resource Engineering , 1 st Ed., Prentice Hall Publishers, 2001
Reference (s)
1. V.V.N. Murthy, Land and Water Management, 6th Ed., Kalyani Publications, 2011
2. D.K.Majumdar, Irrigation and Water Management, 2 nd Ed., Printice Hall of India, 2013
SAMPLE QUESTION (S)

Remember 30 30 --
Understand 70 70 --
Apply -- -- 100
Analyze -- -- --
Evaluate -- -- --
Create -- -- --
Total (%) 100 100 100
REMEMBER
1. What is the function of watershed?
2. List all the types of erosion.
3. What are the consequences of erosion?
4. Write a short note on land grading operation?
UNDERSTAND
1. Explain classifications of land use and land capability.
2. Explain in detail inter, mixed and strip cropping
3. Discuss the importance of watershed management in India
4. Explain the causes of erosion
53
175
16CE015 URBAN TRANSPORTATION PLANNING (ELECTIVE V)

3103
Course Outcomes
1. Interpret urban transportation issues and learn the solution generation
2. Develop Knowledge on Origin and Destination Surveys and Analysis of survey data
3. Build knowledge data inventory for efficient transportation planning
4. Build knowledge on requirement of four stages of transportation planning
5. Model the land utilization for urban transport planning
6. Interpret the Traffic and Transportation Problems in Indian towns/cities
COs–POs Mapping
COs PO2 PO3

1 3 3
2 3 3
3 2 2
4 2 2
5 3 3
6 3 3
Unit I
Urban Transportation Problems & Travel Demand
Urban Issues, Travel Characteristics, Evolution of Planning Process, Supply and Demand – Systems approach;
Trends, Overall Planning process, Long term Vs Short term planning, Demand Function, Independent Variables,
Travel Attributes, Assumptions in Demand Estimation, Sequential, and Simultaneous Approaches.
Aggregate and Disaggregate Techniques
11+ 4 Hours
Unit II
Data Collection and Inventories
Collection of data – Organisation of surveys and Analysis, Study Area, Zoning, Types and Sources of Data,
Road Side Interviews, Home Interview Surveys, Commercial Vehicle Surveys, Sampling Techniques,
Expansion Factors, Accuracy Checks.
Use of Secondary Sources-Economic data –Income – Population – Employment – Vehicle Owner Ship
10 + 3 Hours
Unit III
Trip Generation and Trip Distribution
UTPS Approach, Trip Generation Analysis: Zonal Models, Category Analysis, Household Models, Trip
Attraction models, Commercial Trip Rates.
Trip Distribution: Growth Factor Methods, Gravity Models, Opportunity Models,
Time Function Iteration Models
12+ 4 Hours
Unit IV
Mode Choice Analysis and Traffic Assignment
Mode Choice Behaviour, Competing Modes, Mode Split Curves, Aggregate and Disaggregate Approaches;
Discrete Choice Analysis, Choice sets, Maximum Utility, Probabilistic Models: Binary Logit, Multinomial
Logit Model – IIA property; Aggregation.
Traffic Assignment: Diversion Curves; Basic Elements of Transport Networks, Coding, Route Properties, Path
Building Criteria, Skimming Tree, All-or-Nothing Assignment, Capacity Restraint Techniques,
Reallocation of Assigned Volumes-Equilibrium Assignment
12 + 4 Hours
Total: 45+15 Hours
Textbook (s)
1. Hutchinson, B.G, Introduction to Urban System Planning, 1st Ed., McGraw Hill, 1974
2. Khisty C.J, Transportation Engineering - An Introduction, 3rd Ed., Prentice Hall, 2003
3. C.S. Papacostas, Fundamentals of Transportation Planning,3 rd Ed.,Prentice Hall India, 2000
176
Reference (s)
1. Mayer.M and Miller.E, Urban Transportation Planning: A Decision Oriented Approach, 2nd Ed.,
McGraw Hill, 2000
2. Bruton M.J, Introduction to Transportation Planning, Hutchinson of London, 1975
3. Dicky.J.W, Metropolitan Transportation Planning, Tata McGraw Hill, 1975
4. L.R. Kadiyali, Traffic Engineering and Transportation Planning, 8th Ed., Khanna Publishers, New Delhi
SAMPLE QUESTION (S)

Remember 20 10 20
Understand 40 20 20
Apply 20 30 20
Analyze 20 30 20
Evaluate -- 10 20
Create -- -- --
Total (%) 100 100 100
REMEMBER
1. Define travel attributes.
2. List all the methods of data collection for inventories.
3. Write the problems related to expansion factors.
UNDERSTAND
1. Classify long term planning vs. short term planning.
2. Summarize the various approaches of trip generation analysis.
3. Explain Sequential and Simultaneous Models of Travel Demand Estimation.
APPLY
1. Explain the application of Capacity Restraint Techniques.
2. Organize the flow chart for path building criteria.
3. Explain in detail about Road side interview survey and Home interview survey
ANALYZE
1. Distinguish Supply and Demand
2. Categorize the different approaches of Probabilistic Models
3. Discuss any two techniques available for traffic assignment.
EVALUATE
1. Compute the horizon year trip distribution matrix till convergence by using Fratar’s method.
With the following base year trip data. Here A, B, C, D are the respective zones.
A B C D ∑Future
A - 10 12 18 80
B 10 - 14 14 114
C 12 14 - 6 48
D 18 14 6 - 38
∑Futur 80 114 48 38
e
54
177
2. The total trips produced in and attracted to the three zones A.B and C of a survey area in the
designed area are tabulated as :
ZONE TRIPS PRODUCED TRIPS ATTRACTED

A 2000 4000
B 3000 3000
C 4000 2000
It is known that the trips between two zones are inversely proportional to the second power of
the travel time between zones, which is uniformly 20 min..If the trip interchange between
zones B and C is known to be 600, calculate the trip interchange between A
&B,A&C,B&C,C&B?
178
16CE704 STRUCTURAL MODELING AND DESIGN LAB

0032
Course Outcomes
1. Define the various loads acting on the structures
2. Model the structures for Load combinations
3. Analyze the structures for various load combinations
4. Compare the Results given by software with Manual Calculations
5. Design the structural members for governing loading case
6. Examine the design results obtained from software with relevant IS code provisions
COs–POs Mapping
COs PO4 PO5 PO10

1 1 1 2
2 2 3 3
3 2 3 2
4 3 2 2
5 1 3 2
6 3 1 3
1.
List of Experiments (Minimum 6 Experiments to be performed)

3. Analysis and Design of simply supported beam for all practical loadings
4. Analysis and Design of Cantilever beam for all practical loadings
5. Analysis and Design of pin jointed trusses of various types
6. Analysis and design of determinate 2D-Steel Frame
7. Analysis and Design of Continuous beam for all practical loadings
8. Analysis and design of indeterminate 2D-Steel Frame
9. Analysis and design of RCC Frame (Portal Frame)
10. Analysis and Design Space Tower
1. Analysis and Design of pin jointed trusses for all load combinations.
2. Analysis and Design of a single storey building
3. Analysis and Design of a G+1 building.
4. Analysis and Design of a G+2 building.
1. Structural Modeling and Design Lab Manual- Civil Engineering, GMRIT, Rajam
2. Vignesh Kumar M, Structural Modeling, Analysis & Design Using Staad Pro Software, LAP Lambert
Academic Publishing, 2015
3. S. Unnikrishna, Pillai and Devdas Menon, Reinforced Concrete Design, 3rd Ed., Mcgraw Hill
Education, 2009
4. Dr. V. L. Shah, Dr. S. R. Karve, Illustrated Design of Reinforced Concrete Buildings (Design of G+3
Storeyed Buildings + Earthquake Analysis & Design) , Structures Publications,2017.
55
179
16CE705 GIS LAB

0032
Course Outcomes
1. Summarize the working environment of ArcGIS
2. Make use of different steps to do Georeferencing, Projection and Digitization of Map/Toposheet
3. Create Digital Elevation Model and delineate watershed
4. Create thematic map and estimation of its features
5. Apply different analysis techniques involving with geospatial data to solve various problems
6. Apply the spatial analysis technique to solve road network problems
Cos – POs Mapping
COs PO4 PO5 PO10

1 1 3 1
2 2 3 2
3 2 3 3
4 2 3 3
5 2 3 3
6 2 3 3
List of Experiments
1. Introduction to ArcGIS Info Desktop
2. Identify Data Types and Examine Metadata
3. Work with Coordinate Systems
4. Georeferencing and Projection
5. Digitization
6. Creation of Thematic Map
7. Features Estimation
8. Generation of Digital Elevation Model
9. Proximity Analysis: Buffering
10. Spatial Interpolation
11. Watershed Delineation
12. Road Network Layer Analysis
13. Topology
Any 10 of the above experiments to be perfomed.

Software Required: ArcGIS
1. Creation of Land Use Land Cover (LULC) of an area

2. Watershed Delineation using Spatial Analyst
3. Spatial Analysis of Surface Water Quality using GIS
4. Spatial Analysis of Ground Water Quality using GIS
5. Finding a new route using Network Analyst
6. Finding a location for School Building

1. GIS Lab Manual-Civil Engineering, GMRIT, Rajam
2. ArcGIS: Introduction to GIS: Student Edition, ESRI, United States of America, 2013
56
180
16CE801 CONSTRUCTION COSTING AND MANAGEMENT

3103
Course Outcomes
1. Identify, analyze and solve the complex problems that deal with estimation of buildings and
pavements
2. Estimate cost of Civil Engineering projects
3. Estimate the detailed and abstract quantities of items for construction
4. Identify relationship between cost and quality of the construction process
5. Develop and administer construction contracts
6. Estimate the value of existing infrastructure
COs–POs Mapping
COs PO8 PO11
1 1 1
2 3 2
3 3 2
4 2 3
5 3 3
6 3 2
Unit I
General Items of Work in Buildings and Rate Analysis
Standard Units.Principles of working out quantities for detailed and abstract estimates.Approximate
method of Estimating.Working out data for various items of work over head and contingent charges.
Standard specifications for different items of building construction.
Various item of work involved in road construction-Estimation of earthwork in road construction
12 + 3 Hours
Unit II
Reinforcement bar Bending Schedules and Valuation of Buildings
Reinforcement bar bending and bar requirement schedules. Valuation of various components of
buildings
Scrap value of buildings for different materials
10 + 4 Hours
Unit III
Contracts and Planning Of Construction Projects
Types of contracts - Contract Documents - Conditions of contract.Planning scheduling and monitoring
of building construction projects, Bar chart, CPM and PERT Network planning.Computation of times
and floats – their significance.
Various Indian laws referred in road construction-Various Indian laws referred in Airport
construction
10 + 4 Hours
Unit IV
Detailed Estimates of Buildings
Individual wall method and center line method.
Application of Centre line method in road construction-Application of Long and short wall method
12+5 Hours
Total: 44+16 Hours
Textbook (s)
1. B.N. Dutta, Estimating and Costing, 25th Ed.,, UBS Publishers, 2000.
2. B.C.Punmia & Khandelwal , PERT and CPM – Project planning and control, 4th Ed., Laxmi
Publications, 2002.
181
Reference (s)
1. Standard Schedule of Rates and Standard data Book, Public Works Department, Latest
Publication.
2. I. S. 1200 (Parts I to XXV - 1974/ method of measurement of building and Civil Engineering
works - B.I.S.)
3. National Building Code-Latest Publication.
SAMPLE QUESTION (S)
Remember 10 10 --
Understand 20 20 --
Apply 40 30 50
Analyze 30 30 30
Evaluate -- 10 20
Create -- -- --
Total (%) 100 100 100
REMEMBER
1. Write down the unit of 12mm thick plastering work and reinforcement.
2. Enumerates the list of labor required for reinforcement concrete work.
3. Write down the expression related to expected time duration calculation in PERT.
4. Write down the basic essential to draw a network diagram.
5. What do you mean by latest event time?
UNDERSTAND
1. Analyze the rate for 2.5 cm thick cement concrete flooring with (1:4:8) . unit 1 sq.m, take 100 sq.m.
2. Explain general item of work in building and write down its unit.
3. What is the main objective of construction costing and management?
4. What do you mean by analysis of rate? Write down its objectives.
5. What do you mean by activity?
6. Write down two network technique of project management.
7. What do you mean by total float, free float and independent float?
8. Distinguish between CPM and PERT with suitable example.
9. What do you mean by event?
10. Write down two network technique of project management.
APPLY
1. With the use of longwall and shortwall method findout the quantity of earthwork in excavation in
foundation,cement concrete foundation, brickwork in foundation and plinth,2.5cm thick
DPC,brickwork in super structure of a single room building.For calculate the quantity draw the plan
and elevation with suitable assumptions?
2. What is an estimate? Draw the standard measurement form for detail and abstract estimate & also write
down the requriment for estimation.
3. Explain general item of work in building and write down its unit.
4. Analyze the rate for 12mm thick cement plastering with (1:6) . unit 1sq.m, take 100 sq.m.
5. With the use of center line method findout the quantity of earthwork in excavation in
foundation,cement concrete foundation, brickwork in foundation and plinth,2.5cm thick
DPC,brickwork in super structure of a single room building. For calculate the quantity draw the plan
and elevation with suitable assumptions.
6. A room 300cmx400cm has a flat. There is one T beam in the center(c/s below the slab20cmx40cm) and
the slab is 12cm thick. Estimate the quantity required for reinforcement from the data given below:-
Main bars (8-20mmØ in 2 rows of 4 each (all 4 in bottom being straight and other bent)), stirrups
(8mmØ and 18cm c/c throughout), Anchor bars (2-12mmØ bar).
7. A RCC rectangular beam 25cm widex40cm deepx4.5m overall length is reinforced with 3-20mmØ two
outer bar straight and L hooked at ends and inner bar bent up at 45 degree at appropriate places with L
hooked ends. At top two outer hanger bars are 16mmØ straight and L hooked at ends. Stirrups are 8mm
in Ø and spaced at 180mm c/c.
57
182
ANALYZE
1. What is an estimate? Write down the principle of working out the quantity for detail and abstract
estimate & also draw the standard measurement form.
2. Find out the volume of 50kg of sand.
3. Analyze the rate for cement concrete work with 1:2:4. UNIT 1 Cum .Take 10Cum.
4. Analyze the rate for brickwork in super structure with (1:6) . unit 1cum, take 10 cum.
5. Analyze the rate for RCC work in beam with (1:2:4) . unit 1cum, take 10 cum.
6. Analyze the rate for reinforcement cements concrete work with 1:1.5:3. UNIT 1 Cum .Take 10Cum.
7. Analyze the rate for 12mm thick cement plastering work with 1:6. UNIT1Sqm .Take 100sqm
8. Analyze the rate for cement concrete flooring work with 1:2:4. UNIT 1Sqm. Take 100sqm
9. Calculate the quantity of reinforcement required for 0.1cum of RCC column
10. Estimate the quantities of RCC beam?C/S(250x400)mm
1. i)Draw the network diagram? (ii) Find out the critical path? (iii)Find out the
total float, free float and independent float?
Activity Preceding Time

Activity duration
A _ 3
B A 4
C A 2
D _ 1
E B,D 4
F C,E 3
G F 2
Calculate the quantity of reinforcement required for 0.1cum of RCC beam?
183
16CE802 PROFESSIONAL ETHICS IN CIVIL ENGINEERING

4003
Course Outcomes
1. Explain the importance of ethics and qualities of etiquette
2. Explain how to communication at workplace, response to co-employee
3. Outline the structure of safety & Risk management
4. Illustrate various aspects of Organizational Communication
5. Illustrate the basic of minutes of meeting, protocol, agenda and chairing a meeting
6. Outline the social responsibilities in corporate societies
COs–POs Mapping
COs PO8
1 3
2 3
3 2
4 3
5 3
6 2
Unit I
Introduction to Human values & Ethics
Morals, values and Ethics – Integrity – Work ethic – Service learning – Civic virtue – Respect for others –
Living peacefully – Caring – Sharing – Honesty – Courage – Valuing time – Cooperation – Commitment –
Empathy – Self confidence – Character – Spirituality – Introduction to Yoga and meditation for professional
excellence and stress management.
Ethics, qualities 15 Hours
Unit II
Engineering Ethics
Senses of ‘Engineering Ethics’ – Variety of moral issues – Types of inquiry – Moral dilemmas – Moral
Autonomy – Kohlberg’s theory – Gilligan’s theory – Consensus and Controversy – Models of professional roles
- Theories about right action – Self-interest – Customs and Religion – Uses of Ethical Theories.
Communication, Speaking, Work place 15 Hours
Unit III
Risk Management
Engineering as Experimentation – Engineers as responsible Experimenters – Codes of Ethics – A Balanced
Outlook on Law. Safety and Risk – Assessment of Safety and Risk – Risk Benefit Analysis and Reducing Risk -
Respect for Authority – Collective Bargaining – Confidentiality – Conflicts of Interest – Occupational Crime –
Professional Rights – Employee Rights – Intellectual Property Rights (IPR) – Discrimination.
Laws, Risk 15 Hours
Unit IV
Global Issues
Multinational Corporations – Environmental Ethics – Computer Ethics – Weapons Development – Engineers as
Managers – Consulting Engineers – Engineers as Expert Witnesses and Advisors – Moral Leadership –Code of
Conduct – Corporate Social Responsibility.
Consultants, leadership, Profession, Responsibilities 15 Hours
Total: 60 Hours
Textbook(s)
1. R.Subramanian, “Professional Ethics”, Oxford University Press, New Delhi, 2013.
2. Mike W. Martin and Roland Schinzinger, “Ethics in Engineering”, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi,
2003.
3. Govindarajan M, Natarajan S, Senthil Kumar V. S, “Engineering Ethics”, Prentice Hall of India, New
Delhi, 2004.
184
Reference(s)
1. Charles B. Fleddermann, “Engineering Ethics”, Pearson Prentice Hall, New Jersey, 2004.
2. Charles E. Harris, Michael S. Pritchard and Michael J. Rabins, “Engineering Ethics – Concepts and
Cases”, Cengage Learning, 2009.
3. Edmund G Seebauer and Robert L Barry, “Fundamentals of Ethics for Scientists and Engineers”,
Oxford University Press, Oxford, 2001
SAMPLE QUESTION (S)

Remember 30 20 20
Understand 30 30 20
Apply 20 30 30
Analyze 20 20 30
Evaluate - - -
Create - - -
Total (%) 100 100 100
REMEMBER
1. What are the approaches of Engineering Ethics?
2. Define Consensus and Controversy.
3. List out the roles of codes.
UNDERSTAND
1. Summarize the theories responsible for morality or right action.
2. How does a code support engineers?
3. Outline the techniques that are available for reducing risk.
APPLY
1. Organize the drawbacks that are involved in the definition of Lawrence on safety.
2. Give three arguments in favors of unions in collective bargaining.
3. Explain the uses of Ethical Theories.
ANALYZE
1. Categorize model of Professional Roles.
2. Explain the criteria for achievement of professionalism.
3. Difference between Ethics and Engineering Ethics.
58
Assignment test should contain only questions related to Higher Order Thinking (HOT) Skills
185
16CE016 ADVANCED REINFORCED CONCRETE DESIGN (ELECTIVE VI)

1033
Course Outcomes
1. Design & Detail the reinforcement in cantilever and counterfort retaining walls
2. Design & Detail Flat slab as per the recommendations of code IS: 456:2000
3. Design & Detail stair case as per the recommendations of code IS: 456:2000.
4. Design & Detail the combined and pile footings as per the recommendations of IS: 456:2000
5. Design cross section of concrete and reinforcement in circular and rectangular underground and
overhead water tanks.
6. Apply the principles, procedures and current Indian code requirements to the analysis and design..
COs–POs Mapping
COs PO2 PO3 PO10 PSO # 2
1 2 3 3 3
2 2 3 3 3
3 2 3 3 3
4 2 3 3 3
5 2 3 3 3
6 1 3 1 3
Unit I
Retaining Walls
Introduction – Types of retaining walls –Active and passive earth pressure-Design principles of cantilever
retaining walls with horizontal back fill- Design principles of Counterfort retaining walls with horizontal back
fill- Reinforcement detailing and bar bending schedule.
The design of the counter-fort retaining walls
11+4 Hours
Unit II
Staircases and Flat Slabs
Introduction- types- dog-legged staircases – Design of flat slabs – Types – Design methods, IS code
recommendations – Reinforcement details.
Exterior panel design
11+3 Hours
Unit III
Combined and Pile Foundations
Design of combined footing- rectangular and trapezoidal footing. Types of piles – Load carrying capacity of
piles – Group action in piles – Structural design of RC piles – Design of pile cap for 2 or 3 piles - Reinforcement
detailing and bar bending schedule.
Trapezoidal footing
12+4 Hours
Unit IV
Liquid Retaining Structures
Design of rectangular and circular water tanks- both below and above ground level- Design of overhead water
tank (As per IS 3370(Part I-III))
Design of underground rectangular tank, Design of overhead rectangular tank
11+4 Hours
Total: 45+15 Hours
186
Text Book (s)

1. N. Krisna Raju, ‘Structural Design and Drawing (Concrete and Steel)’ 3rd edition, University press
publications, 2005.
2. N. Krishna Raju and R.N. Pranesh, ‘Reinforced concrete design’, 1st edition, New age International
Publishres, 2009.
3. Punmia B.C., Ashok kumar Jain & Aurn Kumar Jain, “Reinforced concrete structures”, volume – I, 5th
Edition, Laxmi publications Pvt. Ltd., 2008.
4. Varghese P.C., “Limit State Design of Reinforced Concrete Structures”, 3rd Edition, Prentice hall of
India, 2005.
Reference (s)
1. S.N Sinha, ‘Reinforced concrete Design’ 2nd edition, Tata Mc. Hill publications, 2002.
2. B.C.Punmia, Ashok Kumar Jain and Arun Kumar Jain, ‘Limit State Design of Reinforced concrete
design’ 1st edition, Laxmi publications, 2016.
SAMPLE QUESTION (S)

Remember -- -- --
Understand -- -- --
Apply -- -- --
Analyze -- -- --
Evaluate -- -- --
Create 100 100 100
Total (%) 100 100 100
CREATE
1. Design an interior panel of a flat slab with panel size 6 m x 6 m supported by columns of size 500 mm
x 500 mm. Take a live load as 4 KN/m2 . Use M-20 concrete and Fe 415 steel. Draw the plan to a
suitable scale.
2. A combined rectangular footing is to be designed for two columns spaced at 6m c/c. Face of one of the
columns of section 400 mm x 400 mm coincides with the property line and subjected to a load of
1500KN at service state and other column section 500 mm x 500 mm and subjected to load of 2500 KN
at service state. Use concrete of grade M-20 and steel Fe-415. Design the combined footing, having a
central beam joining the columns. Draw the reinforcement details of transverse and longitudinal
sections?
3. Design a rectangular RC water tank (resting on the ground) with an open top for a capacity of 80,000
litres. The inside dimension of the tank may be taken as 6 m x 4 m. Design the side walls of the tank
using M-20 and Fe- 250 grade-1 steel. Permissible stresses should comply with IS: 456:2000, and IS:
3370(Part-II)-1965. Sketch cross section of the elevation and plan of the tank showing reinforcement
details in the tank.
4. Design a cantilever retaining wall to retain an earth embankment with a horizontal top of 4 m above the
ground level. Density of earth = 18 kN/m3 . Angle of internal friction  = 300 . SBC of soil= 200
kN/m2. Coefficient of friction between soil and concrete =0.5. Use M-20 and Fe-415. Sketch the C/S
ofretaining wall showing the reinforcement details and also sketch the longitudinal section curtailment.
5. A R.C.C. retaining wall with counterforts is required to support earth to a height of 7 m above the
ground level. The top surface of the backfill is horizontal. The trial pit taken at the site indicates that
soil of bearing capacity 220 kN/m2 is available at a depth of 1.25 m below the ground level. The weight
of earth is 18 kN/m3 and angle of repose is 30°. The coefficient of friction between concrete and soil is
0.58. Use concrete M20 and steel grade Fe 415. Design the retaining wall.
6. Design a pile cap for a group of two files spaced 1.5 m apart. The piles are 400 mm diameter and the
column transmits a factored load of 1000 kN and is of size 500 mm × 500 mm. Adopt M-20 grade
concrete and Fe-415 grade HYSD bars. Sketch the details of reinforcement.
59
187
7. Design a dog legged stair case for a residential building hall measuring 2.2 m x 4.7 m. The width of the
landing is 1 m. The distance between floor to floor is 3.3 m. The rise and tread may be taken as 150
mm and 270 mm respectively. The weight of floor finish is 1 kN/m2. The materials used are M-20
grade concrete and Fe-415 grade steel. Sketch the details of steel. Here flight and the landing slabs
spans in the same direction, i.e, flight spans longitudinally.
188
16CE017 DESIGN AND DRAWING OF IRRIGATION STRUCTURES

1033
Course Outcomes
1. Analyze the data given related to design of irrigation structures
2. Design the Components of Irrigation Structures
3. Create the Drawings of various Irrigation Structures
4. Outline the Importance of Irrigation Structures
5. Determining the effect of water pressure in designing the Bed Protective works
6. Assess the effect of Soil Erosion on the Irrigation structures
COs–POs Mapping
COs PO3 PO10
1 3 2
2 3 2
3 3 3
4 3 1
5 2 1
6 2 1
1. Surplus Weir
09 + 3 Hours
2. Canal Regulator cum Road Bridge
09 + 3 Hours
3. Trapezoidal Notch Fall (Sarda Type Fall)
06 + 3 Hours
4. Tank Sluice with Tower Head
06 + 3 Hours
5. Syphon Aqueduct- Type III
06 + 3 Hours
6. Under Tunnel
06 + 3 Hours
Total: 42+18 Hours

Textbook (s)
1. Satyanarayana Murthy Challa, Water Resources Engineering (Principles and Practice), 2nd
Ed., New Age International (P) Limited, 2015
Reference (s)
1. C.Satyanarayana Murthy, Design of minor irrigation and canal structures, Wiley Eastern
Limited, New Delhi,1994
2. S.K.Garg, Irrigation engineering and Hydraulic structures, 1st Ed., Khanna Publishers, 2011
3. P.N.Modi, Irrigation and Water Resources & Water Power, 7th Ed., Standard Book House,
2008
SAMPLE QUESTION (S)
Cognitive Level Int. Test 1 (%) Int. Test 2 (%) Assesment pattern for
drawing sheets
Remember -- --
Understand -- --
Apply 100 100 Based on the Submitted
Analyze -- -- Drawing Sheets
Evaluate -- --
Create -- --
Total (%) 100 100 --
Assesment Pattern is based on submitted drawing sheets

189
APPLY
1. Design and draw plan and elevation to a suitable scale of the surplus work of a tank forming
part of a chain of Tanks. The combined catchment area of the group of tanks is 30.45 sq.km
and the area of the catchment intercepted by the upper tank is 24.85 sq.km. It is decided to
store water in the tank to a level of + 12.00 m above M.S.L. limiting the submersion of fore
share lands upto a level of + 12.75 m above M.S.L. The ground level at the proposed site of
work is + 11.00 m, and ground level below the proposed surplus slopes off till it reaches +
10.00 m in about 6.0 m distance. The tank bund has a top width of 2.0 m at level + 14.50 m
with 2:1 side slopes on either side. The tank bunds are designed for a saturation gradient of
4:1 with one meter clear cover. The foundations are of hard gravel at a level of + 9.50 m near
the site of work.
(Assume Ryve’s coefficient C as 9 and modified coefficient c as 1.50).
2. Design and draw plan and elevations to a suitable scale of a canal regulator for a channel
which takes off from the parent channel with the following data:
Discharge of parent channel = 140 cumec
Discharge of distributary = 15 cumec
F.S.L of the parent channel, U/S = 210.0 m
F.S.L of the parent channel, D/S = 209.8 m
Bed width of parent channel, U/S = 52 m
Bed width of parent channel, D/S = 46 m
Depth of water in parent channel D/S and U/S = 2.5 m
F.S.L of distributary = 209.1 m
Silt factor = 0.8 m
Assume safe exit gradient = 1/5
190
16CE018 PAVEMENT MANAGEMENT SYSTEMS (ELECTIVE VI)

3103
Course Outcomes
1. Extend Knowledge on fundamental issues in pavement management system
2. Illustrate structural and functional evaluation of pavements
3. Distinguish distress and surveys done on the pavement
4. Dissect design strategies and economic evaluation
5. Make use of expert systems in pavement management systems
6. Build knowledge on project appraisal and its elements
COs–POs Mapping
COs PO3 PO5
1 1 1
2 2 1
3 3 2
4 2 1
5 1 3
6 2 2
Unit I
Pavement Management Components Levels and functions
Definition -Components of Pavement Management Systems, Essential features. Ideal PMS- Network and
Project levels of PMS-Influence Levels- PMS Functions- Function of Pavement evaluation
Major Phases and Components of the Pavement System Methods-Various Tools and Usage in Pavement
Management Systems
12 + 3 Hours
Unit II
Pavement Performance and Evaluation of Pavement Structural capacity
Serviceability Concepts- roughness- Roughness Components-Equipment-IRI -modeling techniques, structural
condition deterioration models, mechanistic and empirical models, HDM and other models, comparison of
different deterioration models
Basics- NDT and Analysis—Condition Surveys- Distress-Destructive Structural Analysis- Application in
Network and Project Levels
User Related Evaluation Vs. Engineering Evaluation of Pavements-Pavement Evaluation with respect to User
Cost and Benefits
11 + 4 Hours
Unit III
Pavement Design Selection and Alternatives
Design objectives and constraints, basic structural response models, physical design inputs,
Alternate pavement design strategies and economic evaluation, life cycle costing, analysis of alternate pavement
strategies based on distress and performance, case studies. Equipment.
General Response of Pavement Subjected to Traffic Loads and Temperature Induced Stresses
11 + 4 Hours
Unit IV
Expert Systems and Pavement Management, Project Appraisal
Role of computers in pavement management, applications of expert systems for managing pavements, expert
system for pavement evaluation and rehabilitation, knowledge-based expert systems, case studies.
Project appraisal: private sector participation-Environmental impact assessment-TQM in highway projects
Rehabilitation and Maintenance Policies-Methods for Economic Evaluation of Pavements
11 + 4 Hours
Total: 45+15 Hours
Textbook (s)
1. Ralph Haas, W.Ronald Hudson, Pavement Management Systems, McGraw Publishers, 2015
2. S. K. Khanna& C.E.G Justo, Highway Engineering, 8 th Ed.,Nem Chand & Bros., Publisher
191
SAMPLE QUESTION (S)

Remember 20 20 20
Understand 60 50 50
Apply -- -- --
Analyze 20 20 20
Evaluate -- 10 10
Create -- -- --
Total (%) 100 100 100
REMEMBER
1. What is ideal PMS? Explain the network and project levels of PMS
2. Defining the PMS, explain the important components of an effective PMS and the Essential
features associated with them.
3. Write on assumptions of pavement serviceability index.
UNDERSTAND
1. What are the functions of PMS and explain the Function of pavement evaluation.
2. Summarize the advantages of network and project levels of PMS.
3. Explore various structural condition deterioration models.
ANALYZE
1. Detail on expert systems in pavement evaluation and rehabilitation
2. Write on principle characteristics in public private sector participation at various stages in
Pavement projects
3. What are the principal components of condition surveys? Detail
EVALUATE
1. List and detail Physical design inputs for pavement
2. Is role of computers in pavement management system will be supportive if so why? And
Write the applications of expert systems for managing pavements
61
192
16CE019 SOIL DYNAMICS (ELECTIVE VI)

3103
Course Outcomes
1. Identify scope and significance of soil dynamics
2. Explain the basic dynamic properties of soils
3. Summarize the dynamics of Continuous system (Wave Propagation)
4. Analyze the dynamic Response Analysis
5. Demonostrate liquefaction of soils and related phenomena
6. Explain the basic theory of vibrations
COs–POs Mapping
COs PO1 PO3 PSO#2
1 1 2 2
2 3 3 2
3 3 1 1
4 3 3 2
5 1 2 2
6 3 2 2
Unit I
Fundamentals of Vibration
Definitions, Simple harmonic motion, Response of SDOF systems of Free and Forced vibrations with and
without viscous damping, Frequency dependent excitation, Systems under transient loads, Logarithmic
decrement, Determination of viscous damping, Transmissibility, Vibration measuring instruments.
Simple harmonic motion- Free and Forced vibrations- Vibration measuring instruments. 10 + 4 Hours
Unit II
Wave Propagation
Longitudinal and torsional waves in infinitely long rod; Solution for one-dimensional and three-dimensional
equations of motion; Waves in semi-infinite body; Waves in layered medium; Earthquake waves – P-wave, S-
wave, Rayleigh wave and Love wave; Locating earthquake's epicentre.
Wave propagation- dynamic Soil Properties and types of waves 12 + 4 Hours
Unit III
Dynamic soil properties
Laboratory and field testing techniques (Seismic Reflection and MASW methods), Elastic constants of soils.
Liquefaction of soils: An introduction and evaluation using simple methods and methods for mitigating
liquefaction of soils.
Seismic Reflection and MASW methods. Liquefaction of soils. 10 + 3 Hours
Unit IV
Vibration Analyses
Types, General Requirements, Permissible amplitude, Allowable soil pressure, Modes of vibration of a rigid
foundation block, Methods of analysis, Lumped Mass models, elastic half space method, elasto-dynamics, effect
of footing shape on vibratory response, dynamic response of embedded block foundation, Vibration isolation.
Introduction to the design of reciprocating, impact, turbo generator machine foundations.
Modes of vibration-Introduction to the design of machine foundations. 13 + 4 Hours
Total: 45+15 Hours
Textbook (s)
1. Swami Saran, Soil Dynamics and Machine Foundation, 2 nd Ed., Galgotia Publications Pvt. Ltd., 1999
2. Prakash. S., Soil Dynamics, McGraw Hill, 1981
3. Kramer S. L., Geotechnical Earthquake Engineering, Prentice Hall, 1996
193
Reference (s)
1. Das, B. M., Principles of Soil Dynamics, PWS KENT publishing Company, Boston, 2002.
2. Richart, F. E. Hall J. R and Woods R. D., Vibrations of Soils and Foundations, Prentice Hall Inc., 1970.
3. Prasad, Bharat Bhushan, Advanced Soil Dynamics and Earthquake Engineering, 1st Ed., PHI Learning
Pvt. Limited, New Delhi, 2011.
SAMPLE QUESTION (S)
Remember 30 20 --
Understand 40 30 --
Apply 10 10 40
Analyze 20 40 60
Evaluate -- -- --
Create -- -- --
Total (%) 100 100 100
REMEMBER
1. What is ‘Logarithmic Decrement’?
2. What is viscous damping? Explain the effect of damping on amplitude of vibrations.
3. What are the considerations involved in design of pile foundations subjected to dynamic loads?
4. Describe cyclic plate load test used in determination of coefficient of elastic uniform compression of
soils.
UNDERSTAND
1. Explain the terms, damped natural frequency, magnification factor and logarithmic decrement.
2. Explain the Pressure bulb concept used in determination of mass of co-vibrating soil for determination
of natural frequency of foundation-soil system.
3. Derive expressions for its determination.
4. Explain the different types of waves that propagate through semi infinite elastic medium.
5. Explain dynamic bearing capacity theory of soils.
6. Describe the methods of determining the damping factor.
7. Describe the development of mass spring dashpot model from elastic half space theory.
APPLY
1. From first principles obtain the equation of motion for over damped, critically damped and under
damped systems.
2. Describe the development of mass spring dashpot model from elastic half space theory.
ANALYSE
1. In a block test according to Indian standards, resonant frequency of 18 Hz was observed in the vertical
direction. The base size of concrete test block was 1.5m X 0.75 m. The thickness of the block was
0.75m. Unit weight of concrete = 24kN/m3 . Determine Cu. If a machine weighing 100kN is to be
supported on a rigid block 6m X 8m X 2.5m, what is the natural frequency in the vertical direction?
2. Distinguish between Longitudinal and torsional vibrations of elastic rods.
3. A foundation block of weight 30 kN rests on soil for which stiffness may be assumed as 25000 kN/m.
The machine is vibrated vertically by an exciting force of 3Sin 30t kN. Find the natural frequency,
period, natural circular frequency and the amplitude of vertical displacement.
4. The following data refer to vertical vibration test conducted for a compressor foundation of size 10m X
8m in contact with soil. Size of M15 concrete block used in 1.5mX0.75mX0.7m, f mγ=35Hz,
Xmγ=0.06375m, ν=0.3. Find E.
5. Determine the natural frequency of a machine foundation that has a base area of 6m 2 and a weight of
175kN including weight of machine. The coefficient of elastic uniform compression of soil is 4 x 10 4
kN/m3. Use Barkan’s method.
6. A block vibration test was performed on a concrete block of size 1m x 1m x 1m using vertical
excitation. the results are tabulated. Assuming unit weight of concrete as 24 kN/m3, determine the value
of damping Factor (D).
Frequency (rpm) 500 600 700 750 850 950 1000 1200
Amplitude (mm) 0.2 0.6 1.5 2.5 3.2 2.5 1.5 0.6
62
194
16CE020 PROJECT MANAGEMENT (ELECTIVE VI)

4003
Course Outcomes
1. Develop a project schedule using PERT/CPM.
2. Differentiate between different types of time-cost tradeoffs.
3. Construct a resource usage profile for any schedule in a project.
4. See the importance of team building and leadership in project management.
5. Conduct the financial evaluation of production related decisions in terms of NPV, IRR, and payback
and debt service coverage ratio.
6. Develop familiarity with Aggregate Production Planning and the various solution procedures like linear
programming, transportation and the shortest path on a network.
COs–POs Mapping
COs PO11
1 3
2 3
3 3
4 3
5 3
6 3
Unit I
Project Conception and Appraisal, Project Planning
Project definition, Project as an Input-Output system, New challenges in production, Project as a production
system, Features of a project, Life cycle of a project, Variety of projects, Project identification- SWOT analysis,
BRAINSTORMING, Screening of ideas : Project Appraisal, Project selection, Work breakdown structure, AOA
and AON networks, Prerequisites for a valid project network, Scheduling probabilistic activities.
AON networks, New challenges in production
15 Hours
Unit II
Project Crashing & Resource Consideration, Project Implementation
Project crashing- Direct and indirect costs, Heuristic procedure: Resource considerations- Resource aggregation,
Resource leveling, Resource allocation: Limited resource allocation- Various heuristics, Wiest’s Heuristic:
PERT/cost, Team building & leadership, Organizational & behavioral issues, Computers in management,
Project completion, Nature of problems, Network based project management, Research trends in project
management.
Team building & leadership
15 Hours
Unit III
Strategic Decisions in Production Management, Product and Process Selection
Life Cycle of a Production System, Role of Models in Production Management, Variety of Models, Models for
Decision Making, Product Mix Model, LP Model, Leontief’s Input-Output Model, THE BASIC PRODUCTION
MODEL, Financial Evaluation of Capital Investments, Tax Considerations, Decision trees and risk evaluation,
Introducing New Products and Services, Economic Evaluation of Products and Services, Product Mix
Decisions, Product and Process Selection.
Product Mix Model, LP Model
15 Hours
Unit IV
Facility Layout and Location, Forecasting and Aggregate Production Planning
Issues in location of facilities, Mathematical models for facility location, Commonly used distances, Minimax
problems, Multi-objective considerations in location decisions, Layout planning, Layout types, Computerized
layout planning, Product layouts, Problems and prospects of mass production, Forecasting, Methods of
forecasting, Opinion polls, Common regression functions, Time series analysis, Forecasting system, Analysis of
the time series,
Aggregate production planning.
15 Hours
Total: 60 Hours
195
Textbook(s)
1. Construction Engineering and Management by Dr.Seetharaman S., Umesh Publications, Nai Sarak,
Delhi, 2000.
2. Fundamentals of PERT/CPM and project management, (1 st edition) by Bhattacharjee S.K Khanna
Publishers, Nai Sarak Delhi, 2011.
Reference(s)
1. Construction Management & Planning by Sengupta, B. and Guha H., Tata McGraw-Hill , New Delhi ,
1995.
2. PERT & CPM principles and applications by Srinath , L.S. Affiliated East West Press, 1971.
SAMPLE QUESTION (S)

Remember 40 40 --
Understand 60 60 100
Apply -- -- --
Analyze -- -- --
Evaluate -- -- --
Create -- -- --
Total (%) 100 100 100
REMEMBER
1. What is a project?
2. What are the new challenges in production?
3. What are the features of the projects?
4. What are the varieties of the projects?
5. What is Work breakdown structure?
6. Why to use project networks?
7. What are the resource considerations?
8. What are the performance indices?
9. What are the recent trends in project management?
10. What are the features and varieties of models?
11. What are the commonly used distances?
12. What is DELPHI method?
UNDERSTAND
1. Explain about SWOT analysis.

2. Explain about BRAINSTORMING.
3. Briefly explain the project appraisal concept.
4. Explain about TOPSIS.
5. Explain about scheduling probabilistic activities.
6. Explain about project crashing.
7. Explain about BURGESS & KILLEBREW HEURISTIC Procedure.
8. Explain about network based project management.
9. Explain about product analysis.
10. Explain about layout planning.
11. Briefly discuss about advantages and disadvantages of flow-line production.
12. Explain the methods of forecasting.
13. Discuss about time series analysis.
14. Explain about aggregate production planning
63
196
16CE021 GREEN BUILDINGS (ELECTIVE VI)

4003
Course Outcomes
1. Apply the knowledge in development of green field infrastructure in relation to sustainable
environment
2. Learn about Green Building specifications and various eco friendly materials
3. Choose and size building components, as well as energy and environmental systems suitable for
different categories of buildings to achieve the smallest feasible life-time environmental impact
4. Utilize a variety of tools and methodologies suitable for evaluating the resource consumption and
overall environmental performance of buildings in different stages of their life cycles
5. Summarize importance of solar energy in green buildings.
6. Demonstrate the passive energy system and components of building fabrics and materials
COs–POs Mapping
COs PO7
1 3
2 2
3 3
4 3
5 1
6 2
Unit I
Green Buildings
Definition of Green Buildings, typical features of green buildings, benefits of Green Buildings, Green building
Principles, Sustainable site selection and planning of buildings to maximize comfort, day lighting, ventilation,
planning for storm water drainage
Smart Buildings 14 Hours
Unit II
Environmentally Friendly Building Materials and Technologies
Natural Materials like bamboo, timber, rammed earth, stabilized mud blocks, hollow blocks, lime & lime-
pozzolana cements, materials from agro and industrial waste, ferro-cement, alternative roofing systems, various
paints reducing the heat gain of the building, etc.
Ferro Concrete 15 Hours
Unit III
Energy and Resource Conservation and Use of Renewable Energy Resources
Need for energy conservation, various forms of energy used in buildings, embodied energy of materials, energy
used in transportation and construction processes- water conservation systems in buildings-water harvesting in
buildings – waste to energy management in residential complexes or gated communities. Wind and Solar
Energy Harvesting, potential of solar energy in India and world, construction and operation of various solar
appliances,
Case studies of fully solar energy based buildings in India.
16 Hours
Unit IV
Building Resources and Green Building Rating Systems
Passive energy system design, Building envelope, orientation and components of building fabric and shading,
High rise buildings, modular building, Construction of curtain walls, Sourcing and recycling of building
materials, alternative calcareous, metallic and non metallic materials. Introduction to Leadership in Energy and
Environment Design (LEED), Green Rating systems for Integrated Habitat Assessment – Modular wastewater
treatment systems for built environment – Building automation
Building management systems
15 Hours
Total: 60 Hours
197
Textbook(s)
1. K.S.Jagadish, B. U. Venkataramareddy, K. S. Nanjundarao, Alternative Building Materials and
Technologies, 2nd Ed., New Age International, 2007
2. Osman Attmann, Green Architecture Advanced Technologies and Materials, McGraw Hill, 2010
Reference(s)
1. Kibert, C. J, Sustainable Construction:Green Building Design and Delivery, 3 rd Ed., John Wiley &
Sons, Inc., 2012
2. G. D. Rai, Non-Conventional Energy Resources,6th Ed., Khanna Publishers.1988
3. Greening Building – Green Congress, US. (Web).
4. Sustainable Building Design Manual. Vol 1 and 2, Teri, New Delhi, 2004.
SAMPLE QUESTION (S)

Cognitive Level Int. Test 1 (%) Int. Test 2 (%) Assignement Test 64(%)
Remember 50 50 --
Understand 50 50 --
Apply -- -- 100
Analyze -- -- --
Evaluate -- -- --
Create -- -- --
Total (%) 100 100 100
REMEMBER
1. What are the aims and objectives of green building development?

2. What is a LEED Building?
3. What are the principles of green buildings?
4. Discuss the various forms of energy and energy scenario in India
UNDERSTAND
1. Explain various rating systems for the assessment of sustainability.

2. Explain the necessity of understanding basic concepts of green buildings and intelligent buildings.
3. Explain about the various rating systems for the assessment of sustainability.
64
198

B.tech Civil Syllabus AR16 Revised

Загружено:

Сведения о документе

Исходное описание:

Авторское право

Доступные форматы

Поделиться этим документом

Поделиться или встроить документ

Параметры публикации

Этот документ был вам полезен?

Это неприемлемый материал?

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

B.tech Civil Syllabus AR16 Revised

Загружено:

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

GMRIT

Academic Regulations, Curriculum and Syllabi

Department of Civil Engineering

(Affiliated to JNTUK, Kakinada and Accredited by NAAC ad NBA)

GMR Institute of Technology

1. Eligibility for Admission ................................................................................................... i

The Vision of GMRIT

 To be among the most preferred institutions for engineering and technological

The Mission of GMRIT

Academic Regulations for B. Tech. Programme

1. Eligibility for Admission

b. Admission eligibility-Under Lateral Entry Scheme

2. Duration of the Programme

V. Electronics and Communication Engineering (EC)

a. Integrated Courses: Integrated courses are exclusively designed to provide a

i. Summer Internship: As a part of curriculum in all branches of Engineering, it is

4.1. Credit Distribution for Courses Offered

4.2. Structure of curriculum

a. Full Semester Internship (FSI) Model

A. Course Pattern for Four year Regular Programme (FSI)

6 + Audit course 1 + Term paper/Mini project +

B. Course Pattern for Four Year Regular Programme (Non - FSI)

VIII 3 (2 Compulsory + 1 Elective) Project work 19

C. Course Pattern for Three Year Lateral Entry Programme (FSI)

VII Full semester internship 16

VIII 4 (2 Compulsory + 2 Elective) 2 16

VIII 3 (2 Compulsory + 1 Elective) Project work 19

4.3 Credit Break-up for Various Category of Courses

Total Integrated Courses: 4 @ 4 credits each = 16

c. For three year lateral entry Programme (FSI)

d. For three year lateral entry Programme (Non FSI)

Total Theory Courses : 26 @ 3 credits each = 78

4.4 Division of Marks for Continuous and Semester End Assessment

Marks Marks for

e. After completion of the Programme, the Cumulative Grade Point Average

25 marks are awarded for continuous assessment and following is

Internal Test : 05 Marks

Continuous Assessment : 50 Marks Distribution

h. Full Semester Internship

i. Co-Curricular and Extra Curricular (CCEC) Activities

The credits earned through these courses will be indicated in the

j. Employability Skills (ES)

 Assessment for Aptitude skills

h. Industry Driven One Credit Courses

a) It is desirable for a candidate to put on 100% attendance in all the

 In four year B. Tech. Programme, a student shall be promoted from

Classification of degree will be as follows:

i. CGPA ≥ 7.5 : Degree with Distinction

e) Quick Supplementary Examination

9. Flexibility to Add or Drop Courses

10. Withdrawal from the Examination

a. A candidate may, for valid reasons, be granted permission by the Principal to

11. Curriculum: The curriculum of all the UG Programmes is given below

To be a nationally preferred department of learning for students and teachers alike,

1. To provide high-quality education in Engineering to prepare the graduates

Program Educational Objectives (PEOs)

PEO 1: Engage in ongoing learning and professional development

Program Outcomes (POs):

Engineering graduate will be able to:

PSO#1: Demonstrate the quality and suitability of construction materials

Department of Civil Engineering

Contemporary Courses (CC)4

Curriculum is designed and developed in such a way that it provides a high